Home

Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 MANUAL CHANGES ADVANTEST C

Contents

1. tiie 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 8 HDO MND OFF Sets the header OFF 30 PRINT 8 MFL 40 PRINT 8 CF30MZ SP10MZ Sets various data 50 PRINT 98 S Sets the single sweep 60 GOSUB SWEEP Executes one sweep 70 PRINT 8 CN1 Executes the counter and the peak search 80 PRINT 8 PS 90 GOSUB SWEEP Executes one sweep 100 INPUT 98 MF1 ML1 Reads the marker frequency and level 110 PRINT 8 NXP Executes the next peak search 120 GOSUB SWEEP Executes one sweep 130 INPUT 8 MF2 ML2 Reads the second peak frequency and level 140 PRINT 1st PEAK MF1 ML1 2nd PEAK 2 ML2 150 END 160 SWEEP 11 29 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 7 Service Request SRQ cont d 770 PRINT S2 ears the status 180 PRINT 98 SI Starts the sweep 190 SPOLL 200 POLL 8 5 210 IF S AND 4 0 THEN SPOLL Waits for the end of the sweep 220 BEEP RETURN Example PC 23 After executing the sweep twice read out the peak frequency and level Use the TS command instead of SRQ 40 ISETIFCISET REN T 20 PRINT
2. E ESO A m c hh Rem m m 5 2000 It s the function to setup the title of user table and the title of band display section optionally If the title of user table and the title of band display section are not set User Table and USR are displayed as the default characters For the way to change the title refer to 7 11 Label Function 9 7 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL itle isplay title table t t the top of band d ion at the top of user ion a 5 menu input pos input pos Returns to the prev Puts label Puts label LI TET HE 4 4 I 2 MOVE T 16 JL M B RETURN lous menu Returns to the UR SS ing from the memory card in the memory card and call ing Sav 4 lyzer s memory card IS ana Can get the contents in the stored file Refer to 7 6 1 Memory Card Function Calls the user table from th From 1 i LS User table screen ASE ZAD 1 RSMo LIVES LEM Softkey menu screen am
3. Enables SRQ Clears the status register Starts averaging Jumps to line 70 when an interrupt occurs 1 Sets the analyzer to receive an interrupt Loops until an interrupt occurs Reads the status register into 5 Jumps to line 110 if bit 3 is ON Clears the status register Repeats 11 27 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 7 Service Request SRQ PC9801 series programming examples GPIB address 8 Example 19 Read the average end SHQ is not enabled 40 ISETIFCISETREN 20 8 S2 Clears the status byte 30 PRINT 8 AG 30GZ Starts averaging 40 50 POLL 8 5 Reads the status byte into variable S 60 IF S AND 8 0 THEN GOTO Executes the loop until 1 stands at the third bit 70 END Example PC 20 Read out the end of the sweep and execute a single sweep The SRQ interrupt is not output IEEE Ng 22g g EN NM NM EU y a i y pl pp gi b l O a a dein 10 SET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 8 SI Sets the single sweep 30 40 PRINT 8 S2 Clears the status byte 50 PRINT 8 SR Starts the sweep 60 SPOLL 70 POLL 8 5 Reads the status by
4. OOS dei Example 16 Continuously read out the single sweep SRQ is not enabled e ye 4 4 dell ee fe Clears the status register Starts averaging Reads the status register into S Loops until bit 3 turns ON Sets the mode to single Clears the status register Starts the sweep Reads the status register into S Waits until bit 2 tums ON Starts the next sweep Example HP 17 Read out the average end SRQ is enabled en er 4 Dn 4 e 10 OUTPUT 701 0 20 OUTPUT 701 S2 30 OUTPUT 701 AG 40 ON INTR 7 GOTO 70 50 ENABLE INTR 7 2 60 GOTO 50 70 S SPOLL 701 80 IF BIT S 3 2 1 THEN 110 90 OUTPUT 701 S2 100 GOTO 40 110 DISP AVG END 120 END za aam cum aum mem aum gt 504 Omas NEM o debo A
5. 42M G3 p md ARN N 4 ORB ON 9 8 NN ON NOE PP 4 Freq in MHz level in dBm time in sec I Per Freq in kHz level in mV time in msec Freq in Hz time in sec on spectrum mode The channel can be set on TV mode Enters TV mode to enable channel setup Assigns channel table The spectrum screen can be changed to TV scroen cat 223932 u324582FT488UB3NEEP MAWBP LuSYAS REREIFv 40 2 2uuurusn duvuttassua uaad ntersscuaz2nvuuumuuensohutttus 2 Displays the menu for TV monitor screen adjustment 3 12 Jun 10 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 2 U4341 series 55868000 L3 FUNCTION GD CENTER 4 MEAS2 4 START VD CB EIS e s m Xem eye 22
6. m 255029009 Switches INTERNAL EXTERNAL of TV VIDEO input and TV sound input Displays the following menu 8 6 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 8 3 Adjusiment of TV Monitor Screen SHIFT Key PICTURE Key Displays the tuning level The level of the 23 ON OFF demodulated picture frequency and the condition of the preamplifier ON OFF are displayed on the OSD See Figure 8 3 ON The tuning level and the condition of preamplifier ON OFF are displayed OFF The tuning level and the condition of preamplifier ON OFF are not displayed 8 TUNING 20 0 dBm PREAMP OFF Level of the demodulated picture frequency Condition of preamplifier Figure 8 3 Tuning level display Return to the previous menu e o Rs Soc x XP 5 8 7 Mar 1 97 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 1 Channel Setup TV Key 9 TV CHANNEL FUNCTION OPT72 OPT78 Standard equipment on U4341 series 9 1 Channel Setup TV Key The ananlyzer can measure each channel s picture carrier frequency and sound carrier frequency at the same time by setting TV and CATV channel in channel input mode Moreover it can measure multi channels at the same time User table the table to define channels optionally is ready to set up easily 1 Picture frequency setup There are 2 ways
7. 5 cR ee n ee cA 10 DIM Tr 700 Fetches 701 variables 20 OUTPUT 701 DL3 Specifies CR LF as the delimiter 30 OUTPUT 701 TAA Specifies that data will be read from memory in ASCII format 40 FOR 1 0 TO 700 Fetches data 701 times 50 ENTER 701 Tr l 60 NEXT 70 END Result Tr 0 208 Tr 1 210 1 699 311 Tr 700 298 Example HP 12 Output binary data from memory B 12e m E JJ JEN NENNEN EN adii d 10 DIM Tr 700 Fetches 701 variables 20 OUTPUT 701 DL2 Specifies EOI as the delimiter 30 OUTPUT 701 TBB Specifies that data will be read from memory B in ASCII format 40 ENTER 701 USING 96 W Tr Fetches data through word conversion until the EO is received 50 END Result Tr 0 312 Tr 1 2 319 Tr 699 208 Tr 700 211 Example HP 13 Input ASCII data to memory A m 4 iis diii di eld 10 INTEGER Tr 700 20
8. SPAN 100 0 MHz 1 SWP ms VEW Figure 7 4 Color definition window screen Select the parameter to be changed in accordance with the table Number seo Table 7 3 Pressing this key cause the parameter to be changed to turn in No 1 No 2 No 3 in order Select the parameter to be changed in accordance with the table Number see Table 7 3 Pressing this key cause the parameter to change to turn in No 3 No 2 No 1 in order Switch the R G or B for the color adjustment window see Figure 7 5 The RGB is changed with this key strength of each RGB can be changed with vA La keys or data knob C by confirming the display colors on the second line in the color adjustment window see Figure 7 3 7 14 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys Save the defined color data Return to the previous menu uu cde ee e eas ot 7 15 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys Table 7 3 Color table mode WAVE Waveform color WAVE B Waveform B color WAVE A amp B Color mixed with waveform A and B NORMAL MARKER Normal marker color DELTA MARKER AMarker color MARKER NORM amp DLT Color mixed with normal color and marker SCALE LINE Scale line color SCALE BACK Background color for scale
9. U4342N OPT72 FRONT VIEW U4342 series OPT72 REAR VIEW UA342PHS REAR VIEW C 14 Contents Jun 10 97 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 7 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 5 1 5 2 5 4 5 5 5 7 5 8 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL List of lilustrations LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Title Page Battery pack Anton Bauer company 2 5 AC DCBUSDIGI 2 5 AC DC adapter and battery connection diagram 2 6 DC power supply connection diagram 2 8 Checking TUBB o UR EC ROCHE SCR RO Ee 2 8 Front Panel U4941 series rrr 3 4 Rear Panel U4941 series 3 6 Top Panel U4941 serios 3 9 Front panel UA341 Series uper RUE ERE E Ra n ad dco Ra 3 18 Rear panel U4341 series 3 15 panel 0234159185 3 18 Front panel 04342 series 3 22 Balter Connsctlolt eda Re Eo ad d dr See 4 1 Power ON OFF Sade OS SX 4 2 Measurement setup abc c aco do
10. i i 9 5 Apr 1 96 3 User channel setup PROSE VICO E E CY C3 Co D and Unit key Yo o RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 1 Channel Setu V Ke Set the table name within 15 characters Set the name of band display Present display is the initial value Displays inputtable channel Displays inputtable frequency Picture frequency Upper limit and lower limit Set the table name within 15 characters Set the name of band display Present display is the initial value Channel number Picture frequency g RET Upper limit and lower limit 2400 P 50 ms Input upper limit and lower limit of channel frequency range and the picture frequency Select the data to input Upper limit Lower limit Picture frequency Select the channel to input Figure 9 6 User channel setup screen 9 6 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 1 Channel Setu V Ke Clears the user channel setup value on active line x TABLE 1 It s the mode to clear setup values of user channel Before the SET clear is executed the following softkey menu is always displayed to confirm the clear should be executed or not m r Confirms and executes the clear ET CANCEL Returns to the previous menu 4 X
11. 6 30 9 Feak power usa 6 31 4 Average power Pag 6 31 6 5 Occupied Bandwidth OBW Measurement 6 32 1 Measurement procedure 6 32 6 6 Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement 6 34 1 Measurement procedure 6 34 6 7 Television Carrier Signal Measurements 6 38 6 7 1 V A Measurement 6 39 6 7 2 Satellite Broadcast Signal C N Measurement 6 41 1 Measure the carrier signal level eee ee ee 6 42 2 Noise level measurement 6 43 6 8 Analyzing Burst Signal Spectra 6 45 7 FUNGTION DESCRIPTIONS xa ad nr C OR Rec Sr s cats 7 1 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys 7 1 GenterFrequency 7 2 1 Center frequency setup procedure 7 2 2 Menu explanation es ee ee ees 7 2 7 12Tr 8 06n6y SPAN emu edic Re UN eRe es 7 2 1 Frequency span setup procedure 5 7 2 2 Frequency span menu explanation 7 3 7 1 3 START STOP Frequencies 7 3 1 START STOP frequency setup procedure 7 3 2 Menu explanation
12. mma 4 E E E E E OP 9 F Gy F C 4 gt gt E b Y E E d E Bo a 1 059 gain Combression DOIBIE uo ed qe x XC QUE CR Re CN OR a dedic ede Pag e DER sire Second order harmonic distortion Third order intermodulation distortion e mn Normal marker Frequency counter s a rE y ay m p y Connection of second order harmonic distortion measurement Measuring the fundamental frequency component amplitude Second order harmonic distortion measurement Third order intermodulation distortion measurement Third order intermodulation distortion Pre amplifier OFF Pre amplifier ON AM signal measurement AM modulation index P Rw C h h W 4 y h X E 4 b 4 B Modulation frequency of an signal AM modulation accuracy Sideband level
13. 3 1 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 1 U4941 series cont d e ee 0 USER key Calls up a user defined function Enter a user defined function DEFINE key SHIFT USER RCL key Recall a setup mode and waveform stored in a memory card Store the current setup and waveform data to a memory card SAVE key SHIFT RCL POWER switch Turn the power on off 0 MEAS 1 key Selects the ON OFF of the incorporated preamplifier the counter function and so on 52 key Selects ADJ OBW dB down third order 7 4 inter modulation distortion measurement and so on Enter the shift mode Multiple function keys LED lights when in the shift mode MKR key Display the marker on screen Hide the marker OFF key SHIFT MKR PEAK key Move the marker to the peak level displayed gt key Move current marker point values to another SHIFT PEAK function such as center frequency etc EN PRESET key Return the analyzer to initial conditions lamp Lights when the analyzer is being remotely controlled Qo to local control from remote control Set the ADRS key GPIB device address SHIFT LCL A v key Increment or decrement input data step key data knob Dial to fine adjust input d
14. 5559 CONTRAST 2 COLOR Serene 1NTSC PAL TINT 4 TVSTD i 4 HUE NTSC 4 CARRIER 1 MEN 1 READOUT B VIDEO IN i 2222 1 INT EXT NEXT NEXT eee 1 NOTES se section ss A 20 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 3 Menu Lists 3 3 Softkey Menu for TV Channel Function OPT72 78 Standard equipment on U4341 series 4 Key operating TV channel input mode 4 4 RETURN 5 RETURN mL See section 9 1 4 CONFIRM i 21 Jun 10 97 ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 3 Menu Lists a V N Key operating on TV channel input mode BAND 1 ET CONFIRM us SELECT 4 4 aki SELECT ata _ GOPY 1 RETURN CANCEL T 1 d ll See section 9 2 Seo section 9 3 A 3 4 Tracking Generator Function Standard equipment on U4342 series See section 10 5 22 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 4 List of Massages 4 List of Massages ERR 100 CAL SIG ERR 101 2 RF ERR 102 IF ERR 103 RBW Calibration cannot be executed due to no calibration signal An error was detected in the RF ATT calibration An error was detected in
15. o m e e e e e Mem Mem m m _ _ eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee pepe e o o o p p o o x Qo 9 pan c gt Q t5 gt gt e 0 1 96 9 8 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 1 Channel Setu V ke T 1 1 1 2 1 a o p aM l o 2 o E E E NM NE Jio NH Stores the user table in this analyzer s memory card At this time the file name is created automatically If the file name has already existed the following soft menu is displayed which confirms the overwrite r Confirm and execute the overwrite C aum Gm Gum 9205 Change the existing name 8 characters For the way to change refer to 7 11 Label Function qm i mi Select a character type from 1 2 3 to input SPACE 1 ERAN input space BT ABEL CLEAR Clear all the displayed labels e EPA 555 9 9 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 1 Channel Setup TV key dM
16. cont d Talker request Remarks Output format Max 25 characters Enciose a character with a siash Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker request Function Listener code Remarks Output format Softkey No 1 Softkey No 2 Softkey No 3 Softkey No 4 Softkey No 5 Softkey No 6 Data input correspondence 0109 decimal point BK SP step up 4 step down Knob up coarse fine Knob down coarse fine mV mW dB correspondence mA Second Milli second Micro second ENTER 11 56 Mar 1 97 Trace Data 341 points 2721 points Memory output ASCII BINARY Memory B output ASCH BINARY ASCII BINARY ASCII BINARY Memory input Memory B input TV BAND Channel input Channel AUTO AUTO MANUAL CF TVCH FA TVCH FB TVCH CHAUTO CHMNL RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker request Remarks Output format 0 0 to 340 mode 1 0 to 2720 mode 4 bytes delimiter 2 bytes X 700 points 4 bytes delimiter 2 bytes 700 points ON OFF 1 UHF 2 CATV 3 BS 4 69 S5 USER 6 USER 2 AUTO MANUAL 11 57 signal Standard equipment on U4341 series Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes Talker request
17. i Dea mam MOM oun m Lower byte 10 write View o o oe wes pepy sim LS NENNEN mJ billed M M MOMS Mm nh am m de CO NE E m L IL E E NN uu E BM M MS m 11 42 Feb 25 98 A c rc M e cC eee X integer integer RECALL See Note1 RCNORM RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Talker request Function Listener code _ Outputformet ITDFLT Setting of BIN type Setup ITSET OFF ITSET 0 OFF ITSET ON 1 ON Waveform data Waveform data OFF ITTRCOF ITTRC 0 OFF Waveform data ITTRCA 1 Waveform data A Waveform data B ITTRCB 2 Waveform data B Waveform data A
18. i 1 1 SOR RIA ir 1 1261 zZ ku bae i umo roo i Rob wes dE lt Lu O 15 EE 5 ee ir 4 4 1 m cA m m gt ca M M Miei M ter 4 u gt MU OM tea i gt ZO c Im ccs ELIT Du Lele UP d 2 eO Ow vii x 1 15656 B in HO a FO sis Ky O og 8 e 050 92 10 97 16 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 3 Menu Lists UTIL SHIFT ee ne eec pt i 1 1 c dpe ii i i i i l wil 2 ir LO Oy Ebr i OK zz ui t 5 1 in slot lt lt 10 21 IE 3 e 1 I i 1 i rae Oo i uu zt 1 i Z I i lt ptg eve rhon i i mO O SA mj ILL Hp di iin dex Nd 1 1o ovd tee m ne nuc NT 2 1 r me pu ricum ad 17 gt 8 ee i see 1 E 1 tr zm 212 21 As S S i 1 ye oO
19. 0 EF EEE gt AE RDS e c gt cg cj lg 2 Z an 9 D te O z 2 CB S ox oa o LL iL LL LL 9 22 266 6 lt m Orar 68 m T N e 1O 5 ae ee i O gt e d 2 LL wee cee eee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee a ee ee eee ee eee ee da eee ee eee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee gt gt Apr 1 96 7 55 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 6 Save Recall Functions of Memory Card ANT OFF Compensation table cannot be stored ON Compensation table can be stored PHSID OFF ID ist cannot be stored ON ID list can be stored l 1 1 I Apply WRITE PROTECT to the selected file Select ON to WRITE PROTECT state OFF to cancel WRITE PROTECT state A Return to the previous menu ee eee ee Copy the file selected with the cursor arrow to the other memory card At that time moving the active cursor switches the display and B A in the copy menu Moving the active cursor to the desired file and pressing this softkey enable to display the following softkeys When a mem
20. 03031230840 3H JIAN e ONY AWS HILIR und 277938 OuvzvH Jid 4611231043 aW ANO 304 19 A35 LII 74941 series 04342 series VIEW 9 9706 M3IATVNH3IX3 unus SS 525050809059 o b 06909 969696909069 020090909090 005900009 08500209 ASsAMWAGU LU o x 0920905080 20290909090 050202050505 _9 2086 014 3 11X3 M3IA TVNH3IX3 NEVEPN MIIA xt uuu i Ae 99 9 n _ FRONT VIEW U4341 EXT 1 2 9802 B 18102 Z3 FUNCTIONL 1 C U4344N FRONT VIEW EXT13 9802 B U4341 4341N REAR VIEW 27 440 fi DOPONITHL HL 19 268 Mire fi WO up ed ive ONTA LEVEN MOL LITLU GNA DOO adis AO 22 44008 iri vu AB ON 1190 0311 154 ce CBE U4341 series TOP VIEW EXT15 9706 A _ WNH31X3 crvevn 2 9 9 920090020260 990220050520 02929205 LSALNVAGY 09000 599009050009 8900 9909090 000909095 LNOYS 9 2086
21. 6 3 1 Harmonic Distortion Measurement 6 3 2 Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Measurement 6 3 3 Measuring Minute Signal Level 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements Signal AnalyvSiS 225 23 804 1 Measurement of an AM signal with low frequency modulation and large modulation accuracy index 4 5 47 5 47 5 47 5 48 5 48 5 52 5 56 5 58 5 60 5 62 5 63 5 66 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 3 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 5 6 5 6 7 6 9 6 10 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 12 6 15 6 17 6 18 6 18 6 19 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table of Contents 2 Measurement of an AM signal with high frequency modulation and small modulation index m 6 21 64 2 Signal AndlVSIS sua dam mox quoe te tU arde Sx a ux ees 6 22 1 Example analysis of an FM signal with low frequency modulation 6 24 2 Analyzing an FM signal with high modulation frequency l w modulation Inde 3 Ewa So E ok RE ace oe E 6 25 3 Measuring an FM signal peak shift Afpeak 6 26 4 Finding the modulation index m when m is small 6 27 6 4 3 Measuring Pulse Modulated Signals 6 29 1 Pulse width 2 do ae E 6 30 2 Carrier frequency fc
22. 5 7 5 6 ID 5 12 5 7 Cumulative operation 5 13 6 1 Output format of ID list 6 5 6 2 Output format of ID 6 5 6 3 Output format of burst error measurement resuit 6 5 Mar 15 97 F 1 1 Products overview This chapter provides a brief explanation of PHS ID demodulation function 1 1 Overview RF field analyzer PHS ID demodulation function is to demodulate logic control channel signal of personal handy phone system PHS and to detect base station ID number Combined with RF field analyzer signal analyzing function it displays signal level and ID code on the waveform measurement screen Functions Apr 1 96 D trigger ID list ID marker Channel setting Level measurement Starts sweeping after agreement between specified ID code and measurement demodulated ID code ID code can trigger register the input from keys and the measurement data Displays the list of measurement results Display items CS ID PS ID level time between IDs Display type Hexadecimal Selection of right left alignment Puts the cursor on a signal on the measurement screen and dis plays ID code of the signal Can set the measuring frequency by PHS channel carrier num ber Obtains median value average value maximum and minimum value d PHS ID DEMODU
23. 595266 eee r RAGA IND Qu o5 J RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section This key is used to select that data are sorted in the order of frequency or of level The initial setting is in the order of level Note When this setting is changed the obtained peak list is initialized 1 In the order of frequency All data obtained are displayed However up to 99 data are available 2 In the order of level The number of peaks to be displayed can be set The specified number of peaks are displayed The number can be set by using a numeric keypad a unit key step key or a knob Up to 99 can be specified To create the peak list enter the amplitude condition of the object waveform of the peak search The available range of the data is from 0 05 to 5 0 Data can be entered by using the numeric keypad unit key step keys or the knob The definition of the amplitude condition is the same as of the next peak search Refer to item 7 3 2 2 The reference level of the peak search can be changed by using the display line When ALL is set peak search is executed to all waveform Initial condition When UP or LOW is set peak search is executed at the upper level or the lower level than the display line respectively Pressing this key ends the peak list display 7 41 Mar 1 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section This page
24. BNC female rear panel 10kQ nominal DC coupled TTL level Gate input Connector BNC female rear panel Impedance 10kQ nominal Sweep stop during TTL level low level Sweep continue during TTL level high level Phone output Connector Power output Subminiature monophonic 3 6 mm jack front pane 0 2 watt 80 nominal TV picture demodulation output Connector Impedance Amplitude BNC female rear panel 750 nominal DC coupled Approx 1Vp p 759 termination 13 28 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 4 U4341N Specifications cont d TV sound demodulation output Connector Impedance Pin female rear panel 1kQ nominal AC coupled TV picture signal input Connector Impedance Input level female rear panel 750 nominal AC coupled Approx 1Vp p TV sound signal input Connector impedance Pin female rear panel 1kQ nominal AC coupled Plotter 488 bus connector Supports R9833 HP7470A HP7475A 7440 HP7550A 682 XA HP2225AJ Printer e RS 232 Printer Power input Battery mounter adapted D SUB 9 pin rear panel BJ 10 VP 600 MJ400 HP505J Advantest AC DC adapter Model A08364 Automatically selections between 100VAC and 220VAC Anton Bauer Inc PROPAC14 battery nominal 60WH 13 29 Jun 10 97
25. Q 10 MHz REF IN Input for a 10 MHz reference signal Level connector should be between 8 to 16 dBm input impedance approx 500 COMP VIDEO Composite video output a 1V with output connector impedance approx 750 the video output of NTSC is used as standard and also PAL standards can be corresponded as an option The video signal for both NTSC and PAL standards can not be simultaneously output Cooling fan Cooling fan exhausts heat outside the analyzer connector GPIB connector for external control or connection to printer plotter RS 232 connector Connector for connection to external controller when remote controls the analyzer using a Battery mount Battery Anton Bauer PROPAC14 or AC DC 2 4 Adapter A08364 mounts here GPIB interface FUSE for the external DC power supply 2 4 4 10A 250V External DC power connects here via the 2 4 4 external DC power cable A01434 Input voltage range 10V to 16V GATE IN connector Controls sweep and measurement A TTL High level enables sweep and measurement TTL level stops both DC IN connector 3 5 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 1 U4941 series Figure 3 2 Rear panel U4941 series 3 6 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 1 U4941 series 3 1 3 Top Panel Figure 3 3 shows the location of each numbered item further details and explanations
26. at 10dBm 30MHz reference e Attenuation accuracy IA VSWR x1 5 100kHz to 2GHz VSWR x2 0 100kHz to 2 2GHz 10dBm output 13 36 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 5 U4342 4342PHS Specifications 9 General Specifications Environment temperature Operating temperature Non operating temperature Relative humidity 0 to 50 20 C to 60 RH 85 or less Power supply External DC input Connector XLR 4 pin Input range 10V to 16V Power consumption during DC operation During AC adapter is used During 100 VAC operation 50W max Automatically selections between 100VAC and 220VAC Voltage 100V to 120V Power consumption 110 Frequency 50 60Hz Voltage 220V to 240V Power consumption 110 max Frequency 50 60Hz During 220 VAC operation e Mass e Dimensions Approx 6 8kg Without option accessory carrying belt and battery Approx 148 height x 291 wide x 330 depth mm Excluding the projecting legs connector etc External memory Memory card 2 slot upper panel Connector JEIDA Ver4 1 PCMCIA Rev 2 0 or later 13 37 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 5 U4342 4342PHS Specifications 10 PHS ID Demodulator function U4342PHS only Receiving signal Radio access form TDMA TDD Modulation f
27. CO dE T SS dE PATTY CAE DS _ uoti 4 ex I sono war 1 2000 GHz SP 8 MHz VBW 3 MHz Q DD EN OG A P EE SON i GF 1 2z 000 GHz amp PAN 2400 MHz Ss 3 MHz SWP 50 ms Figure 5 35 Parity bit setting 5 42 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function Data length setting DATA 1 key on the display 2 LENGTH softmenu shown in Figure 5 31 Each time this softkey is pressed the gt will move enabling the data length to be set Stop bit setting Press the STOP 1 key on the display softmenu shown in Figure 5 31 Each time this softkey is pressed the gt will move enabling the stop bit to be set Parity bit setting 1 key on the display softmenu shown in Figure 5 31 Each time this softkey is pressed the gt will move enabling the parity bit to be set Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 2000 SPAN 2400 MHZ VBW 3 MHz 50 ms 2000 GHz EAT 2400 MHz MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 50 ms Figure 5 37 Interval time setting 0 dBm DEDI 4 gt Tn ATTAT 63 m T 2000 2 MHz REW MHz VBW 3 MHz SWPISD ms Figure 5 38 Communication port open setting
28. Figure A 2 Reference Level Gain Compression If the input signal is greater than a certain value the correct value is not displayed on the CRT and the input signal appears as if it were compressed This phenomenon is called gain compression and is a expresses the linearity of the input signal range Max gain compression is 1dB Maximum Input Sensitivity This is maximum sensitivity of the spectrum analyzer to detect signals The sensitivity is affected by the noise generated by the spectrum analyzer itself and depends on the IF bandwidth The maximum input sensitivity is normally as the average noise level in the minimum IF bandwidth of the spectrum analyzer Maximum Input Level This is the maximum level allowed for the input circuit of the spectrum analyzer The level can be modified by the input attenuator Residual FM The short period frequency stability of the local oscillators built in the spectrum analyzer is expressed as residual FM The frequency width fluctuating per unit time is expressed by p p This also determines the measurement limit value when measuring the residual FM of the signal 2 Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 1 Glossary Residual Response Residual response is a measure of how much in the input level calculation the spurious signal generated in the spectrum analyzer is suppressed Residual response is generated by leaks of particular signals such as local oscillati
29. Level offset REFOFS OFF ON Level RO OFF ON Level Level offset ON REFOFS ON RO ON RON Level offset OFF REFOFS OFF RO OFF ROF Reference Level 41 37 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Remarks Header Talker request Output format mm CDD DO vate 5 m X ge Frequency wa ue uno ci m m Frequency AUTO MANUAL AUTO MANUAL eee ee i Frequency p ee A m Frequency AUTO MANUAL AUTO MANUAL XV MR RO AE m ae eiim AUTO MANUAL AUTO MANUAL Me dede ee ee Coupled Function o og AUTO MANUAL LONE NE AUTOMANUAL ___ Couple All AUTO COALL AUTO MANUAL AL AUTO MANUAL Trigger moe j FREE RUN VIDEO V SIM M External FREE RUN Integer nteger Integer 11 38 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD
30. b ERROR HANDLING ROUTINE EELEE EEEE S E E E E S E ET EE E doe d ee ae idi ee did qoe Error t Error trap IF ERRN lt gt 167 THEN Otner error STATUS Sc 10 Uart error Get UART error information IF Uart error 2 THEN Overrun Overrun error IF BIT Uart_error 2 THEN Parity Parity error IF BIT Uart error 2 THEN Framing Framing error IF BIT Uart error 7 THEN Break Break detected Other Other error PRINT Other error STOP Overrun Overrun error PRINT Overrun error STOP Framing Framing error PRINT Framing error STOP Break Break PRINT Break detected STOP Other error NO ERROR PRINT Error trapped STOP oe SERIAL COMMUNICATION I F INITIALIZE EEE EEE 5 64 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 5 232 Remote Control Function cont d 470 Sio init Initialize 510 Contro reg 480 CONTROL Sc 0 1 Reset board 490 CONTROL Sc 3 1 Set PROTOCOL TO Async 500 Wait STATUS Sc 38 11 sent 510 NOT 11 sent THEN Wait 520 CONTROL Sc 0 1 Reset I F Card 530 CONTROL Sc 14 1 2 4 Set Control Block Mask 540 CONTROL Sc 39 4 Set Break signal time 550 CONTROL Sc 6 1 Break signal send 550 CONTROL Sc 8 3 Set DIR RTS line 570 CONTROL Sc 13 128 1 Set INT mask 580 CONTROL Sc 15 0 No modem lime change notification 590 CONTROL Sc 16
31. 5 43 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function Data flow control setting Press thefS FLOW softmenu shown in Figure 5 31 Each time this softkey is pressed the will move enabling the data flow control method to be set Interval 22 softmenu shown Figure 5 31 to display the next sofimenu iid then praes dial pressed the will move enabling the transmission interval time between each character to be set for the transmission from the System Communication port open setting Press the key on the display softmenu shown in Figure 5 37 When this softkey is pressed the communication port will be opened Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL gt PTT A anr E E L r 29 HH LA p e gt VU M o d CF 1 2000 GHz RBW 2 MHz WBW 3 MHz Figure 5 39 Communication port close setting 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function amp Communication port close setting 5 44 Press the softmenu shown in Figure 5 37 When this softkey is pressed the communication port will be closed Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function 5 5 4 Message Format The messages which are transmitted between the controller and the system are basically ASCII code character strings The ends of the messages are indicated by carriage return C
32. 7 4 7 1 4 Reference Level 7 4 EROR nt ane ce eS 7 4 2 REG R KS 7 5 7 1 5 Gouple Kev OPE ex ode dete e tq 7 6 C 5 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table of Contents 4 5 Menu sie ssa ee ERAS eR EE ep Md atur tione atr eda 7 8 1 iR goger mode Selup CS uo qr 7 8 2i Detectormiode 2 244 585 7 10 3 Sweep mode setup jT PE 7 10 4 Sound monitor mode setup 7 12 5 Display Setup 7 13 6 Display Color SOLU spades tase sierra we 7 13 7 Definition of display color 7 14 7 2 RAGE FUNCIONS 2 2 cote C a n c 7 18 7 2 1 Fraco Modes ES aee ed au a ma Non M v tea 7 18 1 Modes for the trace memory 7 19 2 Trace B 10998 esci 7 20 7 2 2 Averaging Mode Trace Only 7 21 T2 3 Calculation MOUOS 2552 d 7 23 7 2 4 Normalize Mode Trace A Only 7 24 7 3 Marker Section Functions 7 25 73 1 Marker ON sx sup eoo Sure bes Hears Hes UTR 7 25 1 Both normal marker and Amarker 7 25
33. t Input attenuation See I D NACE OE ME 30 000 MHz SPAN 1 000 MHz lt Frequency span fRewi 10 kHz VBW 10 SWPIS ma Hesolution bandwidth Sweep time Video bandwidth Center frequency Figure 5 5 Display annotation 5 5 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data 5 3 Output of Screen Data The screen data can be output to an external plotter printer memory card or video printer 5 3 1 Plotter Output 1 Connection to the plotter Measurement data from the analyzer can be output to a GPIB input plotter Table 5 1 gives a list of plotter models that can be used The GPIB cable connection is shown in Figure 5 6 Table 5 1 List of plotters that can be used with the analyzer ADVANTEST R9833 Hewlett Packard HP7470A HP7475A HP7440A HP7550A Hitachi Electronics 682 Rear panel U4941 Plotter s rear panel GPIB cable Figure 5 6 Plotter connection diagram 5 6 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data CAUTION 1 Be sure that the power is OFF before connecting the GPIB cable 2 Please read the instruction manual for the plotter 2 Plotter setup The plotter GPIB address should be set to LISTEN ONLY or to the same address 0 to 30 that the analyzer has been configured to use as its output
34. LOOP Loop till 1 comes up at the third bit 70 END perform burst error measurement Refer to Fig 6 3 for the output format 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT Q8 HDO0 Header OFF 30 PRINT 08 52 Clear status byte 40 PRINT 88 BSTMS Set measurement mode of burst error to ON 30 PRINT 8 IDMS 20ENT Set measurement number of times to 20 60 LOOP 70 POLL 8 S Read status byte into variable s 80 IF S AND 8 0 THEN GOTO LOOP Loop till 1 comes up at the third bit 90 PRINT 88 BSTERR Read measurement result 100 INPUT 08 PER CNT UW CRC 110 END To perform measurement of median ISET IFC ISET REN PRINT Q08 HDO Header OFF PRINT 68 Clear status byte PRINT 88 MEDMS ON set measurement mode of burst error to ON PRINT 88 IDMS 20ENT set measurement number of times to 20 LOOP POLL 8 S Read status byte into variable s S AND 8 0 THEN GOTO LOOP Loop till 1 comes up at the third bit PRINT Q08 MEDIAN Read measurement result INPUT 8 MED END 6 8 15 97 perform measurement of average power 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 10 20 39 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 ISET IFC ISET REN PRINT 88 HDO Header OFF PRINT 8 52 Clear status byte PRINT 68 5 Set measurement mode of burst error to ON PRINT 8 IDMS 20 Set measurement number of times to 20 LOOP
35. a 7 REL Display the relative level difference between the active marker and 22 1 display line Initial state ABS Display the marker level independent of the display line 7 29 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 3 Marker Section Functions CAUTION Even when REL is selected when the Amarker is ON the Amarker level data is unaffected and it continues to operate as usual 6 Marker movement between trace A and B Move the active marker to the A or B waveform at 2 screen trace operation see Figure 7 14 However Amarker does not move Trace A Trace B a When selecting moves the active marker to the trace A When selecting B moves the active marker to the trace B 7 30 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 9 Marker Section Functions 7 3 2 Peak Search 1 Peak search menu Finds the highest level of the trace the marker is currently located on and move the marker there Display that frequency and level in the marker data area If a measurement window is OPEN then search for the peak inside the window When softmenu disappears display the PEAK search function is also performed Set the center frequency to the frequency of the active marker Set the reference level to the level of the active marker For each press of this key a search is conducted for the next smaller peak Search to th
36. Selectivity je Video bandwidth 13 15 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 3 U4341 Specifications 2 Amplitude range je Measurement range 20dBm to average indicated noise level e Maximum input level Preamplifier OFF 27dBm Input ATT 10dB 50V DC max 13 50V DC max Preamplifier ON Display range Log 10 X 10div 10 5 2 1dB div 10 div of reference level Linear Reference level range Preamplifier OFF 64dBm to 40dBm 0 14 step Log Linear 141 14V to 22 36V Preamplifier ON Log 84dBm to 5dBm 0 1dB step Linear 14 14 to 707 1mV Input attenuator range 0 to 5098 1098 step 13 16 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 3 U4341 Specifications 3 Dynamic range Display average noise level Preamplifier OFF 1174 2 7f GHz dB RBW 1kHz VBW 10Hz INPUT 098 frequency 1MHz or more Preamplifier ON 132 3 3f GHz dB RBW 1kHz VBW 10Hz INPUT OdB frequency 1MHz or more 1 dB gain compression Preamplifier OFF gt 10dBm mixer input level Frequency 10MHz or more Preamplifier ON gt 40dBm input level Frequency 10MHz or more Spurious response Preamplifier OFF 2nd harmonic distortion lt 70dB 30dBm input INPUT ATT 0 dB frequency gt 10MHz 3rd order inter modulation lt 7
37. xo hae ee ome ae 11 59 11 59 12 TROUBLESHOOTING Q amp A 12 1 12 1 In Case a Problem Like This Should Occur 12 1 I9S oPECIBFIGATIONS wee 13 1 13 1 U4941 4941PHS Specifications 13 1 cad 13 1 2 Amplitude range 3 99 LIE 13 2 3 Dymanie tange ie aste doses Ep Lege be e ck 13 3 4 Ampitude accuracy saio eee es 13 4 b SWOCD gt eg d 13 4 6 DSMOCUIEHON 13 4 7 Input OU 13 5 B General specifications 13 6 9 PHS ID Demodulation function U4941PHS only 13 7 13 2 494 Specifications 13 8 Side qoi XR velo oe ROUEN nike 6 RU ML 13 8 2y Amplitude rand 13 9 3 Dynamic Tange 13 10 4 Amplitude daccurdey 13 11 by JSWBOD EDU e e Redes 13 11 6 Demodulgllol Ratte PR CUR RC Ew dedo olt 8 8 13 12 7 Input OUIDULE 53 95 x ERE ge XO d acd e RR we 13 13 8 General specifications 13 14 C 11 Jun 10 97 RF FI
38. Requests the readout of status byte information from the system PLL 52 Clears the status byte of the system same as GPIB code Table 5 9 Status byte information Decimal Content 1 Sets to 1 when UNCAL REN 2 Sets to 1 when calibration is ended Sets to 1 when sweeping is Sets to 1 when average reaches the specified number of times 16 Sets to 1 when plot output is ended 32 Sets to 1 when an error occurs in the message code of this function 64 Not defined 128 Not defined Example of status byte data Case for sweeping end and where average reaches the specified number of times 4 8 12 oar 5 56 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function Sample program 3 Example 17 Reads out the end of average OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 DS6000 LF FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 1 S2 Clears status byto PRINT 1 AG 3067 Start of average A 30 times SW PRINT 1 PLL Reads out status byte INPUT 1 StatusByte SB VAL StatusByte IF SB AND amp H8 0 THEN GOTO SW Loops until third bit is set to 1 PRINT AVG END Displays end END Example 18 intermittently reads out the end of single sweeping OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 DS6000 LF FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT Z1 SI Sets to SINGLE PRINT 1 S2 Clears status byte PRINT 1 SR Start of sweeping SW PRINT 1 PLL Reads out status byte IN
39. measurement 7 47 C 6 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table of Contents 6 Power Measurement 7 48 r5 User Defined FUNCIONS dg X CREE UR 7 49 Menu explanation Kex ades desc 7 50 2 Example of setting up user defined key 7 51 7 6 Save Recall Functions of Memory 7 53 7 6 1 Memory Card Functions 7 54 70 2 Save TUO 2 3 3 7 59 EOS R cal FUNCION 7 61 1 In NORMAL Inde 7 61 2 EFAS MOGG 3523 7 62 L7 PrtoSsoLPunclOH 2 4 ee 64 5 ca eae we 7 63 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function Initialization Function 7 64 7 8 1 Printer Plotter Memory Card Output Setup 7 65 1 Selecting output devices where the screen data is sent 7 65 2 Printer output configuration menu 7 66 3 Plotter output configuration menu 7 66 4 Memory card output configuration menu 7 68 5 Canceling the data output directed to a printer or a plotter 7 68 58 2 DAVE FUNCION s CR RR due dis 7 69 POWerOPRE FUNCION sss cR REUS Ere OR a 7 69 7 8 4 RS 232 Interface Communication Port Setup s 7 70 153
40. 5 16 i ie ca 7 19 A 7 TIT 7 54 i raras 7 19 exci 7 6 Apr 1 96 8 2086 LIX3 M3IATWNHSDXG uvau JAIS 9046 21 3 AASIA IVNH31X3 34 09999505959 992950090959 508000505 050529202909 99095969 9090 0505950 i 0 0 0 609020965 5 6 OG000993080 992959 506950 0090005000 959000000 095920090 MIIA e JAIS 202000202090 9959290 5909090 029090090 5000500 959000009 POWER PRESET 5 ADRS LCL MEAS2 REMOTE aris lt OFF MKR MEAS CICI 249 GO TRACE DEFINE 27dBm MAX X50VDC U4941 FRONT VIEW EXT4 9706 A V 9046 S1X3 MIA LNOX3 5 59 es ZAW 90 6 91 3 91 46 HUNA 440 1 1 9 59 CO usmod JAYS _ Nevev evevn Niw6v Lv6vn U4941PHS 4342PHS REAR VIEW SI W3MOd INZHiLSH iVMI ONA ONT LSNNOISTO UR 307386
41. 7 81 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 13 Utility Function 7 13 Utility Functions Figure 7 45 Front panel UTILITY function key The utility menu provides access to the following functions e Selection of a compensation antenna factor arbitrary antenna factor data entry is also possible Limit line function e Setup Go No go tests using the limit lines 7 13 1 Antenna Factor Correction When an antenna is used to measure the electric field intensity the raw data needs to be corrected for the actual sensitivity of the antenna When the antenna factor is taken into account a calibrated electrical field intensity measurement in can be displayed directly M LA o _ e e P mh PN ta e Co Measurement MHz Figure 7 46 TR1722 antenna factor 7 82 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 13 Utility Functions SHIFT ada mum um Gum mm me OOOO 5 RR o 214 UTIL 22552065206596 IS Select the compensation data from a menu of antenna factors In each case the loss from 10 meters of 5D2W cable is included Correct for a half wave dipole antenna TR1722 Correct for a log periodic antenna TR1711 Cancel the above antenna correction Create a user defined table of antenna factor corre
42. V 8 U4941N FRONT VIEW 1 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Preface PREFACE This manual configuration Part 1 Operating Instruction Following options also are explained TV demodulation function 2 TV channel function OPT 78 Tracking generator function Part 2 Explanation of PHS ID demodulation function U4342PHS 4941PHS only Selection Guide TV Tracking demodulation generator channel Model name function function function wee 1 Input impedance of U4341 4342 4342PHS 4941 4941PHS is 500 Input Impedance of U4341N 4342N 4941N is 750 2 Option 72 include option 78 Preface 1 Feb 9 99 Safety Summary To ensure thorough understanding of all functions and to ensure efficient use of this instrument please read the manual carefully before using Note that Advantest bears absolutely no responsibility for the result of operations caused due to incorrect or inappropriate use of this instrument If the equipment 1 used 1n a manner not specified by Advantest the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired Warning Labels Warning labels are applied to Advantest products in locations where specific dangers exist Pay careful attention to these labels during handling Do not remove or tear these labels If you have any questions regarding warning labels
43. h y p eet ee ee Peak range Normal Upper side Lower side eee eee ee ee Peak AY div 4 ee Rm 11 47 vem um 1 2 race e uuu HZ NM NN NE 5 55 Lae MOD pn ep qu VASA MARII O ERAR MuR 4 4 04 4 4 MN 4 eo state ate se E c o 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker request Remarks MKR A SPAN MKR CF step MKH MKR step gt step Frequency Frequency MKR step AUTO MKSAUTO MKSAUTO AUTO MANUAL MPA MPA _ 5 AUTO MANUAL 11 48 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker request Function Listener code Remarks Output format OFON i OFF ON OFF ON r i o i cr mo A mum gt Window
44. et __5 __ T NEXT PK PEAK MKR gt A RIGHT div _ 4 STEP 3 NEXT ALUUP MKHA _ LOW__ 4 CF STEP NEXT RETURN NEX ccc e DEOR See section 7 3 See section 7 3 SHIFT DEFINE gt gt gt gt 5 5 aat 4 i RAM 5o D Co uet section 7 5 See section 7 5 A 12 Jun 10 97 3 Menu Lists p ILS gt WA i gt e e Jun 10 97 1 5 l l i WLIO 1 7 Pot 1 lt 1 a NN 5 En Tu Uem UR prep ee pue I ny 1 m I 221 Tan AA lt c 1 lt lt r i i let i T 1 2 ir C lt 1 gt t 4 IO 1 1 i i d i 1 Z 1 8 0 78967 i FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 13 Iz mem ESO ESI ES rur RUNG HET 1 I gt 1 T i i i 1008001 1 lt MEME m tr 2 id em RES enirn Ve pee ee ong eee gt gt qua 212 8 I 1 i i 2 2 gt c yy lt E LL O gle 5 lt Ci 1 Out a Of Q K m
45. LABEL key SHIFT 9 FOBOW 3 3 19373743 8984 2 Uv 4 wo ww B SOROR 49 PICTURE key SHIFT key PICTURE key This function cannot be used annuos dum h Configure the analyzer ee ere ee ee ee ee ee ee o eoeocnaccheokttppernsvonuunnn Execute a utility function ree Ceara eee ara ee a a Operate the memory cards ee rr a ee a al Calibrate the analyzer ee ee ee ee ee ee Copy the display to a printer or plotter 1 Put a label the display screen Select a set of units and input corresponding values s 25232d sz bt54uumuussuuub iude5ttustzasnasssiumnavs dsdedupmsiuamumstuumponus tueutnnutisesemauopst atae Frequency in GHz level in dBm
46. Selecting PCL Selects the printer to which the PCL command output from the GPIB port can be used Selecting ESC Selects the printer to which the ESC P command output from the RS 232 port can be used 5 19a Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data 4 Printer output execution and cancellation D Execution SHIFT COPY Now that the setup has been completed press Perform the printer output according to the step 3 Printer output procedure 2 Cancelletion SHIFT CONFIG __ 1 Press _ CANCEL enables to cancel the printer output during the print is output 5 19b Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data 5 3 8 Memory Card Output This section explains how to output the screen data to the memory card in the Microsoft Windows bitmap format 1 Memory card output procedure CONFIG key is used for the setup memory card Press COPY key for the memory card output D Selecting memory card drives SHIFT CONFIG cb Vi i and Press jin order When the drive A or B of memory card has been selected at the output devices where the screen data is sent 2 Setting a filename or the file number of 0001 to 9999 to store in the memory SHIFT CONFIG Press The file number can be selected using the ten keys F keys or the knob A file extension must be BMP and a file size will be 44 222k
47. _ EET END 1 i I TEE Specify the active drive of memory Facing the front panel the drive A is in the foreground 9 10 Apr 1 96 ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 92 Channel Table Allocation SHIFT Key TV Ke 9 2 Channel Table Allocation SHIFT Key TV Key Operation and explanation This analyzer enables to allocate the country channel table which vou want to use for each SHIFT band VHF UHF CATV BS CS by pressing key and Tv key in order Fig 9 7 shows the possible setup example Select a band to allocate the table Allocate the table to the setup band Figure 9 7 Setup example 9 11 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 2 Channel Table Allocation SHIFT Key IV Ke Select a band to allocate the table 3 TABLE 1 Select a table according to the selected band d SELECT Copies any table to user table according to the selected band and channel table After the copy can edit freely with user editor function m Executes the and returns to the previous menu a Cancels the copy and returns to the previous menu Wei cnm rm e mth 2 2 M 2 Gua um Gm en 9 12 1 96 FIELD
48. 1 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys Menu explanation Displays Start Stop frequency softmenu When softmenu disappears display Start Stop frequency can be set by procedure 1 When ON is selected an offset of 0 10 GHz can be specified However if an offset less than the RBW is entered it will be replaced with the RBW START frequency Displayed START freq SET Offset freq STOP frequency Displayed STOP freq SET Offset freq When OFF is selected the offset is removed Reference Level Reference level setup The reference level setting range is shown in Table 7 1 and the relation between the reference level and the input attenuator are shown in Table 7 2 REF LEVEL Numeric key units keys End v Lo Step keys 10 dB steps Data knob 9 CAUTION When the input attenuator is set to MANUAL the reference level is depending on the attenuation value set and the setting range may be narrower than the range shown in Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Reference level setting range U4941 4341 4342 Reference level range 74941 4341 4342 U4941PHS 4342PHS Preamplifier OFF 64 40 dBm 46 to 150 dBuV 84 to 15 dBm _ 210 125 dBuV Note Reference level can be set according to Table 7 1 shown above Preamplifier ON _ 7 4 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys 2
49. 4 561 dk 4 dBm TE AB 4 NKR 200 00 MHz SPAN 20 0 100 kHz VBW 1 kHz 2 Figure 10 6 Measurement of an Insertion Loss In this measurement the insertion loss is 4 581dB b Measurement of a passing bandwidth 3dB MEAS2 D Press Q Press e c to make an attention 3dB to measure 3dB DOWN to set from the condition of measurement insertion loss to Then two marker moves to points below the level of 200 2 respectively and then the markers indicate 3 dB passing bandwidth 10 9 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 10 3 Measurement Example The screen becomes Figure 10 7 ME BH 18 REF 6 dBm _ i i A CF 200 00 MHZ SPAN RBW 106 kHz VBW 1 kHz Figure 10 7 Measurement of Passing Bandwidth In this measurement the 3 dB passing bandwidth is 3 97MHz c Measurement of an attenuation Measurement of an attenuation at 14MHz referred to the level of 200MHz TRACE Press 51 a cm to release normalization the should be on a scale of 10dB DIV not to be influenced by the through line frequency characteristic CU lt Co GHz to sot 10dB DIV 0 8 77 Ti TI Loma o ar un zi re e o o 5 QUOS to set a AMKR E 14MHz high m
50. 6 7 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 1 Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Common to Measurements Third order intermodulation distortion When two signals with frequencies f4 f2 are applied to the spectrum analyzer intermodulation occurs in the input mixer and new spurious signals with frequencies of 21 f2 and 2f f4 are created These are the third order intermodulation distortion and the ratio of their level to the fundamental is used to quantify the distortion In the analyzer when the level of the fundamental 30 dBm at the mixer input the third order intermodulation distortion is guaranteed to be below 70 dB The third order intermodulation distortion for the analyzer is shown in Table 6 4 101 KH m 37 d 0 0 dBm ATT 3Q dB 101 kHz j i i 1 Figure 6 9 Third order intermodulation distortion Table 6 4 Spurious response Second order harmonic 41 4341 4342 i 4 ane Hiro U4941PHS 4342PHS 4941 1 4342 emarks intermodulation distortion Amplifier OFF 70 dB or less 70 dB or less Input attenuator of 0 dB in 30 dBm input in 78 dByV input and frequency of 10 MHz or more 6 8 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 1 Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Common to Ali Measurements Residual response Residual response is the name for those spurious responses that are gene
51. 983 25 1013 25 1043 25 1073 25 1103 25 1133 25 1163 25 1193 25 1223 25 1253 25 1283 25 1313 25 1343 25 1373 25 1433 25 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table H TYPE2 For JCSAT communication local oscillation 10 873 GHz horizontally polarized Waves Table 9 16 Channel table of CS in Analyzer 5 Frequgney range Center frequency channel MHz 1396 75 to 1423 75 1426 75 to 1453 75 1456 75 to 1483 75 1486 75 to 1513 75 1516 75 to 1543 75 1546 75 to 1573 75 1576 75 to 1603 75 1606 75 to 1633 75 1636 75 to 1663 75 1666 75 to 1693 75 1696 75 to 1723 75 1726 75 to 1753 75 1756 75 to 1783 75 1786 75 to 1813 75 1816 75 to 1843 75 1846 75 to 1873 75 H TYPE2 1410 25 1440 25 1470 25 1500 25 1530 25 1560 25 1590 25 1620 25 1650 25 1680 25 1710 25 1740 25 1770 25 1800 25 1830 25 1860 25 H TV For JCSAT broadcast local oscillation 11 2 GHz horizontally polarized waves Table 9 17 Channel table of CS in Japan H TV Analyzer 5 Transponder NO Frequency range Center frequency channel Channel MHz MHz 1309 75 to 1336 75 1339 75 to 1366 75 1369 75 to 1396 75 1389 75 to 1426 75 1429 75 to 1456 75 1459 75 to 1486 75 1489 75 to 1516 75 9 27 1323 25 1353 25 1383 25 1413 25 1443 25 1473 25 1503 25 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUA
52. Data set ready DSH RTS Request to send Clear to send 5 40 Apr 1 96 ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function 5 5 3 Communication Port Setting The CONFIG function is used to set the communication ports of the RS 232 interface in the system D Window screen for setting communication ports SHIFT CONFIG Pressing the ES rrt window screen setting shown in Figure 5 31 The upper portion of the window screen shows the current settings and the lower portion 1 used to change each parameter Use the arrow diae no ALI UTI NOUS GF 1 2000 GHz SPAN 2400 to change them MHz 5 OSWPISO ms Figure 5 31 Window screen for communication port setting ge A Js 2 softmenu shown in Figure 5 31 Each time this softkey is pressed the will move enabling the transmission speed to be set X100 zc lt 41717 bh Lo ee On 3X CTVTD UIT D CUN 1 1 Pa RM Ea 24 NAME Al 00 200 a t 80 2 En 92 ER 5 3 Y n E uet SPAN 2400 MHz SWP S50 ms 2000 ES MHz VBW 3 MHz Figure 5 32 Transmission speed setting 5 41 Mar 1 97 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 REF 0 0 dB 2 4 5 H i 1 BA Lt 34 EL IN gt
53. Manual sweep Continuous dB down 1 Amarker FIXED Amarker Power measurement Multi marker 7 35 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section Figure 7 19 Location of measurement section keys on the front panel Measurement section consists of two keys MEAS1 and MEAS2 7 4 1 MEAS Functions Four modes high sensitive and frequency counter are provided as follow 1 High sensitive 2 Frequency counter 3 Delay sweep function 4 Peak list function 1 High sensitive MEAS1 Switch the high sensitive mode ON OFF When ON is selected the pre amplifier gain of 20 dB or more is set to ON In this case the pre amplifier again in each frequency has already compensated the gain in level measurement is not required When OFF is selected the pre amplifier is set to OFF The example of measurement to execute the internal pre amplifier refer to 6 3 3 Measuring Minute Signal Level rmn Z Ti 7 36 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section 2 Frequency Counter MEAS1 2 COUNTER the following inequality is satisfied this mode enables to make a high i accuracy counter measurement on the marker s existing signal frequency Move the marker to the desired signal peak to be measured and the peak level where the marker is located is more than 25 dB above the noise level
54. PRESET key REMOTE lamp LCL key ADRS key SHIFT LCL A Lz key step key Move the marker to the peak level displayed Move current marker point values to another function such as center frequency etc S Return the analyzer to initial conditions Lights when the analyzer is being remotely controlled Go to local control from remote control Set the GPIB device address Increment or decrement input data Dial to fine adjust input data data knob NUMERIC key pad input digits from 0 to 9 and decimal point Extended function Used in combination with the shift key for keys extended functions peveccussauassasruv ieasanuasssesuavbhusssFuumnmasescupsusuavatanuuuuuq eonpecaaduauazaaapseususeevAeceed unsumumopuri NuaunusseuvaunsaspestecasmuaumuueanueueeeoummT MW key Set up a measurement window 7 14 SHIFT 0 7 5 7 6 4 1 7 4 7 4 5 1 7 3 7 3 7 7 51 5 1 3 11 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 2 U4341 series cont d EMC key CONFIG key SHIFT 2 a UTIL key SHIFT 3 gm MEM CD key SHIFT 4 semen FA HG 57 V8 REM CAL key SHIFT 7 COPY key SHIFT 8 HON om MOM 4 d MAR NON M MM Pb WAT n nat
55. RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section 3 Measuring AM modulation accuracy The analyzer obtains an AM modulation accuracy using the peak search function in the current setup condition and enables to display the calculated result on the marker area with 96 unit For details of AM modulation accuracy setup refer to 6 4 1 AM Signal Analysis MEAS2 4 The following three conditions are used to measure the AM modulation accuracy and are displayed on the marker area 0 When putting the horizontal axis into Log scale and the vertical axis into frequency domain Measuring the AM modulation accuracy in high modulation frequency and low modulation accuracy amp 9 25 14048 REF 2 4 dBm 4150854 45 0000 _ 3 1 Figure 7 28 modulation wave spectrum Log scale AMarker is set as shown in Figure 7 28 and the AM modulation accuracy can be obtained by moving the Amarker in the wave peak level and the active marker in the next peak level The obtained AM modulation accuracy is displayed on the marker area with unit See Figure 7 19 7 45 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section When putting the horizontal axis into the Log scale and the vertical axis into the frequency domain Measuring the AM modulation accuracy in high modulation frequency and low
56. Representation in N88 BASIC Example 8 Outputs the center frequency character strings 10 OPEN COM1 N83NN AS 1 20 PRINT 1 HDi 30 PRINT 1 CF 40 INPUT 1 A 50 END Example 10 Simultaneously outputs the marker frequency and the level 10 OPEN COM1 N83NN AS 41 20 PRINT 1 30 PRINT 1 MFL 40 INPUT 1 MF ML 50 Mff VAL MF 60 Mli VAL ML 70 END Example 17 Heads out the end of average 10 OPEM COM1 N83NN AS 1 20 PRINT 1 S2 30 PRINT 1 AG 3067 40 LOP1 50 PRINT 1 PLL 60 1 70 IF S AND 8 0 THEN GOTO LOP1 80 PRINT AVG END 90 END 5 63 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function Representation in HP BASIC 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 139 140 150 150 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 oe at ade fe ae ape oft he a 335244424424 he EB DO AVERAGING OPERATION THRU 510 as he eee Oe ake obs a ale ae ake a Re oe ae DIM Message 1 130 56 20 ON ERROR GOTO Error Set up error trap routine GOSUB Sio init OUTPUT 5 52 OUTPUT Sc AG 3067 OUTPUT Sc PLL ENTER 5 5 IF BIT 5 3 lt gt 1 THEN L1 PRINT AVG END STOP tee aRt afe E ske eie dodo oer
57. et 1 15k i amo e o Mem Xn TU NUS ONE OE I ii Z Zazi om OB 5 ip lt v el 1 f LH ee p D iw 2 3 I i t Jun 10 97 10 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 3 Menu Lists TRACE ON OEE SAVE See section 7 2 OFF n P mo roo gt gt lt a ee et REUABS XT FIX MKR MARKER E RESABS J fel Ehe AW 4 ON OFF _ oe MKR LIST 1 AMKR 4 ee 4 ES _ m _ 4 MULTI Des 81 PKLIST 22 22222 24 Bote uy 1 SIG TRK LIST 22222224 ad BEL FREQ 4 Bu MAH eo NOIZE MH2__ Bd 4 BL MBSE 4 Ea anann NEXU RETORN 6 1 a ac ObE c section 7 3 11 Feb 25 98 ed m e RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL SHIFT MKR A 3 Menu Lists SI MKR gt CF1 MINIMUM gt PS _ PEAK__ DAS MKR gt REF NEXT 1 gt cd f MINIMUM CONT PK 81
58. rer kde ES ADMANTEST U4341 FIELD ANALYZER INPUT 500 SkHsz 2 2 274 450VDCc 04341 Figure 3 4 Front panel 04341 series 3 13 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 2 U4341 series 3 2 2 Rear Panel Figure 3 5 shows the location of each numbered item further details and explanations will be found in the indicated sections SOUND OUT Outputs sound signal at the time of internal connector signal in TV mode VIDEO OUT connector Outputs picture signal at the time of internal signal in TV mode Composite video output a 1V p p with output 5 3 3 impedance approx 750 the video output of NTSC is used as standard TV picture input Inputs picture signal when VIDEO IN key menu in EXT mode TV sound input Inputs sound signal when VIDEO IN key menu in EXT mode Input for a 10 MHz reference signal Level should be between 8 to 16 dBm Input impedance approx 502 amp COMP VIDEO connector VIDEO IN connector SOUND N connector amp 10MHz REF IN connector 7 8 5 Controls sweep and measurement TTL High level enables sweep and measurement TTL Low level stops both IN connector TTL level input to control the start of the sweep Active edge can be selected to be either the rising or falling edge Input impedance approx 10 RS 232 connector Connecto
59. 1 EE B UE were M Figure 6 34 NTSC signal 1 channel Figure 6 35 NTSC signat 12 channe Television broadcast channels are divided into two bands VHF and UHF In Japan VHF band contains channels 1 through 12 90 to 108 MHz 170 to 222 MHz as shown in Figure 6 36 However channels 7 and 8 have a 2 MHz overlap 6 38 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 7 Television Carrier Signal Measuremenis 188 194 7 3 10114 42 t a a 1 i i i t ze 90 96 108 170 192 198 222 470476482488 758764770 MHz VHF Band UHF Band Figure 6 36 VHF and UHF channel assignments UHF channel assignments are for channels 13 through 62 470 to 770 MHz total there are 62 standard broadcast channels in Japan Thus we see that there are many channels of television broadcast signals The spectrum analyzer can be the most efficient tool in measuring each channel s level and frequency and in presenting at a glance the overall situation of the entire broadcast band In the following we will present several example televisions related measurements to show how the U4941N impedance 75 can be used to best advantage 6 7 1 V A Measurement The V A is the ratio of the Video and Audio levels If the audio level is too much below the video level a buzz noise interferes with the sound C
60. 1 Press Co _ NORM and select WDO see Figure 7 55 Peak search inside the window Same as MIN search continuous search see Figure 7 56 NEXT peak search inside the window e Same as NEXT PK HIGHT LEFT and MIN X dB down inside the window e Same as LEFT RIGHT and continuous dB down 3rd order modulation distortion measurement _ Window sweep Peak search MKR REF 10 REF 22 4 dBm brc Se 722 4 jdBm ess dBm 24181 MHz 400 000 MHz SPAN 1 090 MHz RBW 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP Figure 7 55 Partial sweep inside the window Figure 7 56 Continuous peak search inside the window 7 94 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 8 1 Notes on Using Monitoring Function 8 TV DEMODULATION FUNCTION OPT72 Standard equipment on U4341 series 8 1 Notes on Using TV Monitoring Function For good picture quality RF wide band preamplifier have no selectivity of input frequency unlike general TV receiver So take care on saturation and distortion of the input pre amp for the multiple channel signal Use an external attenuator filter and so on as required 1 For single channel signal input The relationship between input signal level and S N ratio is shown in Fig 8 1 S N ratio Pre Amp ON Pre Amp OFF Input signal level Figure 8 1 Relationship between input signal level and S N ratio e Using a pre amp i
61. 6 7 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 17 6 18 6 20 6 20 6 21 6 21 6 23 6 25 6 25 6 26 6 26 6 28 6 29 6 33 6 36 6 37 6 38 6 38 6 39 6 40 6 41 6 43 6 44 Mar 1 97 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 22 7 23 7 24 7 25 7 25 7 25 7 26 7 27 7 28 7 29 7 30 7 31 7 32 7 33 7 34 7 35 7 36 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL List of illustrations Front panel fundamental keys Display legends Using a VIDEO trigger to display a waveform cua uet ieu Color definition window screen Color sething WIndOW 2 Trace key its front panel location WRITE and VIEW trace modes Maru d diee EUR A ie PNOPAGING 20 WINGS o AD CRUS The MARKER section on front panel Active marker and fixed marker AMarker level Sample of Multi Marker List Display Th BSUr emiblil 243 ce eee Xe xor e ORC rie aa qoe m Pos te re
62. ADVANTEST ADVANTEST CORPORATION U4941 4341 4342 Series RF Field Analyzer Operation Manual MANUAL NUMBER FOE 8311278D01 Applicable models U4941 Series U4941 41PHS 41N U4341 Series U4341 41N U4342 Series U4342 42PHS 42N C 1996 ADVANTEST CORPORATION First printing April 1 1996 rights reserved Printed in Japan MANUAL CHANGES ADVANTEST CORPORATION GB 984 2H 26H Date Fev 26 98 Ws TZ 04941 5341 4342 1 Manual Name OPERATION MANUAL 3 amp FH 22 2 7 No OJDOO Manual number 2 OEDOO or later he Fx JMC 01 Manual Change No EMC 01 X Be AE 04341 Ul3HTN Applicable models 04342 0 2 U342N OPT72 FEO 4 EORR ENDEN NET 5 NECAT TTAF V The TV key and CH key in this manual is different from your product However the differences are not related to specifications and usage HRS EIE iii UV OPERATION MANUAL Front panel TV 1 TV ti 55 x i 9 N 59 B T Git rt o 9 59 1 MANUAL CHANGES ADVANTEST ADVANTEST Corporation The OPTION key has been added to the front panel used with the 04941 or U4941N This key however is not currently used U4941 U4941N O ETE OPTION 35 258 L7 OPTION X i CH mn Manual No Manuai Change No OO pO JOY OF DoE 5 OF OR e
63. Active Area REF 0 dBm H Z Figure 4 5 Active area display There are three different methods for data input These are the step keys Data is incremented or decremented by the step size eom o e e y M This is the knob The screen display moves as it is tumed to continuously change resolution etc Numeric keys and Units keys are also used for data entry Figure 4 6 Data input 4 7 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 4 2 Measurement Start to Finish 4 Setting the center frequency EO Set the center frequency with the following key pushes EROR IIR D MF ON OFF Soy Gm CO CO CO Gat Eu The signal is displayed centrally on the screen 25 Note The step keys and the data knob can be also used instead of the numeric keys 500 0 MHz SPAN 1480 NL Wid MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP b Setting the frequency span Let s set the frequency span to get a clearer display say 1 MHz here To use the NUMERIC keys dBm To use the STEP keys Press span and then 9 Le as many times as necessary or hold it down until the span reaches the desired value Note Data knob can be also used 509 000 SPA Bw 10 kHz VBW i10 kHz 4 8 Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 42 Measurement Start to Finish 6 Setting t
64. Cancels the display of the marker corresponding to the is decremented A D lt rA o D m D 3 gt Z e zi c Changes the active marker among the displayed markers Each time this key is pressed the marker No in the MKR NO menu is changed in ascending order indicating which marker is active Returns to the previous menu Set to ON to display the list of frequencies and levels of the displayed markers See Figure 7 12a and Notes on List Display Displays maximum six markers and the list of levels at the waveform peak points in the order of marker No Displays maximum six markers and the list of frequencies at the waveform peak points in the order of marker No Cancels the multiple marker display and displays the No 1 marker only Cancels the marker list display as well as displayed markers No 1 to No 7 2 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 3 Marker Section Functions Figure 7 12a Sample of Multi Marker List Display Notes on List Display 1 When the soft menu display is active the unit is simplified for the list display e Case of horizontal axis frequency display GHz gt MHz M kHz gt k Hz gt H e Case of level display in units of dBm dBuV dBuVemf dBmV and dBpW All units are omitted See the standard level unit Case of volt and watt Units are displayed 2 Displays of dB div
65. Figure 11 3 Signal line termination Open collector type Output voltage at Low 0 4 V or below 48 mA at High 2 4 V or above 6 2 mA 0 6 V or below Low state 2 0 V or above High state Connect one device for every four meters of cable you use The total length of cable connected to the bus must be less than 20 meters Assign a unique talk isten address 0 through 30 to each device on the bus using the front panel keys Each device on the bus must have a unique address 11 5 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 2 GPIB Specifications 4 Interface Function Table 11 1 describes the GPIB codes used by the analyzer Table 11 1 Analyzer GPIB interface codes Description Source handshake function Acceptor handshake function Basic talker function Serial pole function Talker cancel function by listener specification Basic listener function Listener cancel function by talker specification Service request function Remote function No parallel function Device clear function provided Device trigger function provided No controller function Used open collector bus driver however EO and DAV is used a three state bus driver 11 6 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 3 Initializing the Analyzer 11 3 Initializing the Analyzer Before you use the analyzer with a GPIB system you must initialize it as described below 11 3 1 Setting the Analyz
66. Function Listener code Remarks Output format Marker channel Integer Standard equipment on U4341 series According to bands oo c m oe cmo m Table input Table delete i er e am wm umm me amm UM ane aar Ammo Memory card TVPIC ON OFF GM gt cue AR m e m p Meo eee et COLOR NTSC PAL NTSC nrc r m o A m 4 TVSDKK TVSLL m C r m m m di m VIDEO INPUT INT VID MUTO EXE VID ena BRIGHT BRIGHT CONTRAST CONTRAST TINT TINT HUE NTSC HUENTSC READ OUT READOUT Tuning
67. PLL INPUT 1 SB VAL A LOOP UNTIL SB AND amp H4 PRINT 1 PS Marker peak search GOTO SWLOOP END Example 5 Sets to MAX HOLD A OPEN 0 1 9600 8 1 056000 1 FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 1 AM Sets to DIRECT END 5 49 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function Example 6 Executes the RECALL in the case of file name FILEOQ01 OPEN 0 1 9600 8 1 056000 1 FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 41 RC A FILE0001 Recalls file name FILEOO001 Example 7 Outputs the marker frequency integer OPEN 1 9600 8 1 056000 1 FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 1 Header output prevention PRINT 1 INPUT 1 5 VAL A Example result 1700000 END Example 8 Outputs the center frequency character strings OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 DS6000 LF FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 1 HD1 Starts header output PRINT 1 CF INPUT 1 A Example result A CF 0000001 8000E 9 END Example 9 Outputs the unit conditions OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 DS6000 LF FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT Zi UN INPUT 1 Example result A 2 dBuv END 5 50 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Contro Function Example 10 Outputs the marker frequency and the level simultaneously OPEN 0 1 9600 8 1 056000 1 FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 1 HDO Header output prevention P
68. _ negative detector and the trace accuracy for 0 40 PRINT 8 TAA Specifies the memory A for the ASCII output 50 1 0 700 60 INPUT 98 TH l Reads data for 701 points 70 PRINT 5 TR 80 NEXT 90 END Result Tr 0 208 Tr 1 2210 Tr 699 311 Tr 700 298 11 23 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 6 inputting and Outpuiting Trace Data Example PC 16 Output the A memory data in BINARY 0 to 340 ISET IFC ISET REN Executes interface clear and remote enabling DIM TR 701 PRINT 8 DL2 TPC DTG Sets the negative detector and the trace accuracy for 0 to 340 PRINT 98 TBA Specifies the memory A for the binary output 50 WBYTE amp HS3F amp H5F amp HSE amp H48 Releases the listener and addresses PC9801 to listener 30 and this analyzer to talker 8 60 70 FOR 1 0 TO 700 80 RBYTE UP LO Repeats data reading for every upper byte and lower byte corresponding to 701 points 90 UP 256 LO 100 PRINT TR l 110 NEXT 120 WBYTE amp H3F amp H5F Releases the listener and talker 130 END Result Tr 0 312 Tr 1 2319 Tr 699 208 Tr 700 211 Example PC 17 Input data to the memory A in ASCII 0 to 340 m o 10 REN Executes interface clear and remote enabling 20 A 0 ST23 14 100 30 PRINT 8 TPC AB TAA Specifies the memory
69. ca gt mmy re gt re m o Integer Integer gt n mo m me lt UU m 11 41 Feb 25 98 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker Function Listener code Remarks _Output format Correction data selection mum Ce w AR AA m m gt eee m mie ma am Gum cO s M m mo m r r or a dmi MO gt X oem IIIJ IL 4A Dos cam aes o AUAM m o9 am mum
70. e e pe y x 1 PROTOCOL Select to output not output the Xon Xoff signal to the RS 232 51 port When RMT is selected the Xon Xoff signal is output to the RS 232 port Select RMT when you want to control this unit with the controller personal computer through the RS 232 port When CPY is selected the Xon Xoff signal is not output to the RS 232 port Select CPY when you want to copy the data to the printer through the RS 232 port e od e SE 096 7 8 5 CPU check function SHIFT CONFIG 6 NEXT 1 Press the keys in the left order Selects to perform or not perform CPU check at power on The initial setting is ON ON CPU check ROM RAM check and display of the version of this unit is performed Therefore some time is necessary to start up this unit OFF CPU check of this unit is omitted The minimum initialization is performed Message Initialize is displayed there When the unit is turned to ON and OFF over and over again select CPU CHK OFF The system can be set up in a short time CAUTION When the action of this unit is abnormal perform the CPU check again 7 70a Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function initialization Function This page has been intentionally left blank 7 70b Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MA
71. i s kHz SHES RS 7 dBI Co Mars 4 PHS demodulation mode screen Vertical 8 scales RO O o e 7 160 ID trigger d 85 5 ones UP setting code DOWN Demodulation code of signal CS ID periodicity specified by ID marker ID trigger and ID marker code displays ID trigger TR 510 Cer Selecting ID or SYNC CS ID for the trigger inverts the display marker MK 4 CO csi T shows down and up _ When it matches with trigger code the display is inverted 3 0 Apr 1 96 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION List display 7 Right aligned Left aligned L Trigger conditions set ID code Up or Down Demodulation code Cursor line is an object of trigger setting UP DOWN LEVEL Inthe case of DISP IDI ON When PS ID is detected Code after PS ID When PS ID is not detected Code after CS ID SA P 5 5 iis REDE _ _ 5 2228 BEAS fs Apr 1 96 3 3 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION DISP CRC ERR OFF When error is detected code is not displayed is displayed B DISP CRC ERR Even when CRC error is detected code display is per formed is displayed at the end of the code to show CRC error 3 4 Apr 1 96 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 4 Measurement example This chapter provides an explanation of PHS ID demodulation funct
72. lt 2 0dB 9kHz to 2 2GHz INPUT 20 C to 30 C referenced to 30MHz after self calibration Calibration signal accuracy 20dBm 0 3dB e F gain error lt 0 5dB after self calibration Scale fidelity accuracy after self calibration LOG 1 5dB 90dB 1 098 0 0 2dB 1dB 5 of reference level IA IA IA LIN Input attenuator lt 1 0dB 100kHz to 2GHz 20 to 50dB settings referenced 1 5dB 9kHz to 2 2GHz to 10dB e Resolution bandwidth switching lt 1 0dB at reference bandwidth 3MHz error after self calibration 5 Sweep Sweep time 50ms to 1000s and manual sweep lt 55 Trigger FREE RUN SINGLE VIDEO EXT TV 13 34 Jun 10 97 6 Demodulation e Spectrum demodulation Modulation type Audio output 7 Input Output e RF input Connector Impedance Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON 10MHz reference input Connector Impedance Input range Video output Connector Impedance Amplitude 750 terminator External trigger input Connector Impedance Trigger level Gate input Connector Impedance Sweep stop Sweep continue Phone output Connector Power output AM FM RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 5 U4342 4342PHS Specifications speaker and phone jack with volume control adjustable N type female 500 nominal VSWR lt 1 5 100kHz to 2GHz VSWR x 2 0 9kHz
73. to 22 36V Preamplifier ON Log 84dBm to 5dBm 0 1dB step Linear 14 11 to 707 1mV e input attenuator range 0 to 5098 1098 step 13 32 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 5 U4342 4342PHS Specitications 3 Dynamic Range e Display average noise level Preamplifier OFF ii7dBm 2 7f GHz dB RBW 1kHz VBW 10Hz INPUT Odb frequency 1MHz or more Preamplifier ON 132dBm 3 3f GHz dB RBW 1kHz VBW 10Hz INPUT frequency 1MHz or more e 1dB gain compression Preamplifier OFF 10dBm mixer input level Frequency 10MHz or more Preamplifier ON 40dBm HF input level Frequency 10MHz or more je Spurious response Preamplifier OFF 2nd harmonic distortion lt 704 30dBm input ATT 0 dB frequency gt 10MHz 3rd order inter modulation lt 70dB 30dBm input distortion INPUT OdB frequency gt 10MHz e Residual response Preamplifier OFF 100dBm INPUT OdB INPUT 500 terminated frequency gt 1MHz Preamplifier ON lt 1159 INPUT OdB INPUT 500 terminated frequency gt 1MHz 13 33 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 5 U4342 4342PHS Specifications 4 Amplitude Accuracy e Frequency response Preamplifier OFF lt 1 0dB 100kHz to 2GHz lt 2 0dB 9kHz to 2 2GHz INPUT 10dB 20 C to 30 C referenced to 30MHz after automatic calibration Preamplifier ON lt 1 0dB 100kHz to 2GHz
74. xm oom Es NENNEN EN NN EB 4 4 iii 10 DIM 30 20 OUTPUT 701 HD1 30 OUTPUT 701 CF 40 ENTER 701 A 50 END Result 00001 234567 9 7 Output the unit state i Scc 10 OUTPUT 701 UN 20 ENTEH 701 A 30 END Result 2 dBxvV gt Example 8 Output the marker frequency and level am E NNNM 10 OUTPUT 701 20 ENTER 701 Mf M1 30 END Result Mf 1 8E 9 1 65 15 Example 9 Output the frequency offset Mo OUTPUT 20 ENTER 701 On Frq 30 END Result 1 Frq 1 23E 6 Example 10 Using NEXT PEAK read the first 10 signal peak levels starting at the second peak rrr 10 DIM M1 9 20 OUTPUT 701 PS 30 FOR 150 TO 9 40 OUTPUT 701
75. 2 5 1 Power supply conditions 2 6 2 Connecting the AC DC adapter to the analyzer 2 6 3 Power DIU CADOS he d REED A 2 7 2 4 4 DC Power Supply Operation 2 7 1 DC power supply requirements len 2 7 2 Connecting a DC supply to the analyzer 2 7 3 Checking the Use ascites hee pada ee Ho eee oboe eee 2 8 PIN eee aia i echo ee 3 1 3 1 SENOS quus koe ee oe ee 3 1 S URON Fane We eh ek a 3 1 9122 Meal FANG 3 5 31 3 LOD 1 23 93e EUR amp P306 Rep ean C TETTE 3 7 C 1 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table of Contents 3 2 04341 series dedos paul dos ares d Ada 3 10 POM IID 3 10 TEL TTE 3 14 S453 FOD PANEN wd raaa ard ee th 3 16 93 U4942 SONOS E ERR A Cu HE dios 3 19 di 3 19 Meal Peel 3 23 TOD FANSI aoc nd ba Scd 3 23 4 EASY USE INSTRUCTIONS 4 1 POWBTE UD 4 1 t Installing the battery 4 1 2 TF rnind on die 4 2 4 2 Measurement Start to Fini
76. 20 dg Trace WRITE mode Pies TTC ee uc iens MR Trace B VIEW mode Figure 7 7 WRITE and VIEW trace modes 7 19 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 2 TRACE Functions Go to the MAX HOLD mode Not available for the B trace On each sweep compare the new data for each horizontal frequency point with the previous data Store and display the level with the larger value Thus the display accumulates the maximum values for each point in the time series When this key is pressed again or the the softkey T WRITE 1 is pressed the MAX HOLD mode be canceled CAUTION Selecting this mode automatically forces the POS detector mode 2 Trace B modes TRACE Display the trace B memory setup menu Copy the trace A data to the trace B memory and enable the VIEW B mode to display the data in D Display the data stored in the B memory as trace B Erase the trace B data from the display The trace B data is kept until the d key is pressed again Go into the WRITE mode In this mode the new data from each sweep both updates the B trace memory and is displayed on the screen at the save time Return to the previous menu 7 20 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 2 TRACE Functions 7 2 2 Averaging Mode Trace A Only Averaging can be used t
77. 50kHz to 2 4GHz ZERO lt 5 SPAN gt 100kHz Frequency stability Residual FM Drift e Sideband noise Resolution bandwidth 3dB Range Bandwidth range accuracy lt 3kHz p p 100ms 10kHz Frequency is fixed 30 minutes after power ON Sweep time 50ms to 5s temperature is fixed lt 100dBc Hz 20kHz offset 1kHz to 3MHz 1 3 sequence lt 20 1kHz to 1 5 25 3MHz lt 15 1 60dB 9kHz 120kHz Selectivity Bandwidth 6dB Video bandwidth 10Hz to 2 1 10 sequence 13 39 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 6 U4342N Specitications 2 Amplitude Range e Measurement range e Maximum input level Preamplifier OFF 1304 to Average indicated noise level 1344 Input ATT gt 10dB 50V DC max 12048 Input ATT 0dB 50V DC max Preamplifier ON Display range Log 10 x 10div 10 5 2 1 dB div 1096 div of reference level 40dB 5dB div Linear QP Log Reference level range Preamplifier OFF Log 46 to 150dB V 0 1dB step Linear 199 5 to 31 62V Preamplifier ON Log 2648 to 115dB V 0 1dB step Linear 19 95 V to iV Input attenuator range 0 to 50dB 10dB step 13 40 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 6 U4342N
78. Environment temperature Operating temperature 0 50 Non operating temperature 20 C to 60 Relative humidity RH 85 or less Power supply External DC input Connector XLR 4 pin Input range 10V to 16 V Power consumption during DC operation 50W max During AC adapter is used Automatically selections between 100 VAC and 220 VAC During 100 VAC operation Voltage 100 V to 120 V Power consumption 110 V max Frequency 50 60 Hz During 220 VAC operation Voltage 220 V to 240 V Power consumption 110 max Frequency 50 60 Hz Mass Approx 6 8 kg Without carrying belt accessory battery and option Dimensions Approx 148 height 291 wide 330 depth mm Excluding the projecting legs connector etc External memory Memory card 2 slot upper panel Connector JEIDA Ver4 1 PCMCIA Rel 2 0 13 6 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 1 U4941 4941PHS Specifications 9 PHS ID Demodulator function 04941 5 only Receiving signal Radio access form TDMA TDD Modulation form 4 shift QPSK Transmission speed 384Kbit s Signal Channel The configuration of the logical control channel marks conforms to RCR STD 28 Range of level measurement Heceiving performance SWP 400 ms or less in level measurement Preamplifier OFF Input 10 dB 52dB V to 107dB4V Preamplifier ON Input ATT 2 0 dB 16dB V to 67dBuV Sweep trigger mode Free run VIDEO and ID
79. If the initialization is not required push 5 25 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use The following explain the Memory Card Initialization Menu Screen shown in Figure 5 24 DRIVE BATTERY WRT PROTECT ATTRIB MEM SIZE COMMON MEM SIZE Memory type Indicates a memory card drive to be initialized Indicates a battery information in memory card GOOD Normal LOW Battery is dead to exchange it BAD Battery is waste Indicates a memory card write protect ON OFF condition ON t Indicates a memory write protected condition OFF Indicates a memory card write enabled condition Indicates an attribute memory information See type The memory card comprising a common memory and an attribute memory and including card attribute information device information tuple attribute memory information common memory information can be used Or the memory card comprising only a common memory can be used Attribute memory size Indicates a common memory See type Only the type HAM BKUP can be used Common memory size Size to be used 64 KB 128 256 KB 512 KB 1 MB 2 MB Common memory SRAM Attribute memory Any of SRAM EPROM MASKHOM EEPROM OTPROM or a flash memory or none CAUTION 1 When the CONFIRM key is pressed on the initialization menu and the CANCEL key is pressed during the initialization the init
80. SPA T Eh MHz 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz Figure 7 17 setting Figure 7 18 LOW setting 738 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 3 Marker Section Functions 7 3 3 MARKER Marker to Move the current marker data frequency level etc to the input data for some other function SHIFT Set the center frequency to be the active marker frequency MKR9REF Set the reference level to be the active marker level uum Set the frequency span to be the Amarker frequency Set the center frequency step size to be the active marker frequency Set the center frequency step size to be the Amarker frequency Display the following next menu Set the center frequency to be the Amarker frequency Set the center marker step size to be the active marker frequency Set the marker step size to be the Amarker frequency When MNL is selected the step frequency of marker point can be specified by using step keys When AUTO is selected the step frequency indicates 1 div on the horizontal axis Return to the previous menu 7 34 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 3 Marker Section Functions 7 3 4 Marker OFF Erase all markers from the display if there are any marker related or dependent functions active set them OFF to disable them SHIFT OFF Functions which will be turned off are Counter Noise Hz Marker pause Sound Signal track
81. Window OFF Center position X Frequency Frequency Center position Y Level Window width Frequency Frequency Window height Level gt eee eee eee Start frequency Frequency Measurement Window Frequency ver mu w ee gt gt End frequency Frequency Frequency em ARRA m m co m Rm m 4 aam Upper ievel Lower level WDOLOW WLL gt gt Aou omm NE NENEJg ndis psu IN m Mo NM Jd am e y na o a GO NG Judgment Note The center frequency position Y and the measurement window height can be input using the step keys and the data knob only 11 49 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker request Function Listener code Remarks Code Outputformat IA n v d EG Trace detection D ma c We EMCDET
82. a data table edit display such as shown in Figure 7 48 will appear Enter the frequency or time and then the level for each point as each pair is entered that data point is defined in the table The data points are read from the table in ascending order of frequency or time REF 10 0 dBm SPAN 10 00 MHz VBW 10 KHz SWP 58 ms Figure 7 48 Table edit mode T INSERT When ON is set a new empty line is put into the table and data values zd ON OFF i prompted for The entire data entry process can be done in this mode if you desire a prompt for each entry gt gt 2 Mh 4 n n Z4 CHANGE 1 Switch the cursor between frequency or time and level data fields 7 86 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 13 Utility Functions T CONFIRM Confirm the destruction of the table 20 em m Arten MA d mm um Only for limit line tables Copy the currently displayed limit line data to the other limit line table uu A XR NOE M eA 2 e m E CONFIRM Confirm overwriting the opposite data table gt m e CANCEL 1 Cancel the copy request and return to the table edit menu RETURN Return to the previous menu veis 1 7
83. dition sorted 4 SELECT NL om D S Selects TIME LEVEL Selects to perform the measurement contentiously with 10 list dis played The selected items are ON OFF SELECT NEL M NE LL Selects ON OFF When an error arises at CRC check the code display becomes for OFF setting For ON setting the error code is displayed as it is In order to identify the code correct is added after PS ID code 4 SELECT Selects ON OFF All the information of 62 bits after the control format CS ID is displayed LECT SE o ett Selects ON OFF Apr 1 96 1 96 ID Filter UW PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION Sets up the display conditions of measured ID code Only IDs which match to the display conditions can be displayed This mode has no relation to left aligned or right aligned Input method of ID filter ID filter input is performed in bits The display is aiso in bits Regardless 1 and 0 it is displayed When 1 or 0 is specified the specified bit data the bit patterns of measured codes and the matching codes are displayed in the list Key assignment C E 0 9 0 9 A CENTER E D D REFLEVEL E E MENU a START neris Input mode BIN HEX The cursor moves in bits to specify BIN with 1 O or keys The cursor moves in 4 bits to specify HEX with O to F or keys Key operation SELECT g gt T
84. kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 50 3TH jib kHz VBW i10 kHz SWP 5D ms 8 2 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 8 2 Display of TV Monitor Screen PICTURE Key 8 2 Display of TV Monitor Screen PICTURE Key 1 TV monitor screen PICTURE When key is pressed spectrum screen changes to TV monitor screen by PICTURE pressing again spectrum screen returns Note Using an external video monitor on video COMP output allows to have always measuring analyzer s screen On TV monitor screen in the channel input mode the channel received on the screen and the possible impossible to input channel are displayed on the top left Fig 8 2 If the channel input mode is not selected press key When the channel input cannot be done as Fig 8 2 b press key key key If there is no channel number to be applied as Fig 8 2 no channel number is displayed Can input channel b Cannot input channel There is no channel number number Press one to be applied of these keys CENTER START or STOP Figure 8 2 Indications and input of channel number On TV monitor screen the sweep mode is set to manual 8 3 Jun 10 97 2 3 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 8 2 Display of TV Monitor Screen PICTURE Key Note e When channel is input the marker is moved to the picture frequency of input channel automatically Auto tuning is executed to the audio frequency too But
85. leakage power is displayed Move the marker to see the leakage power at different channels When OFF is selected the graph is erased CAUTION The ACP GRAPH function cannot be operated when the measurement bandwidth is not specified Set the Center Frequency to be the current marker frequency Handy for getting the carrier frequency to the measurement reference frequency i e the center of the display Enable to move the marker with ACP softmenu being displayed Pressing this key displays the frequency in the active marker area and sets the marker point using the numeric key and units keys the step keys or the data knob Qi Power Measurement MEAS2 Selects the power measurement The power measurement is used to calculate the power from the on screen signal The power measurement of a wide band modulated wave can be carried out Correction of RBW is also executed So execute PBW in the CAL menu item Measures the power in the specified band in the window Executes operations of the window span and RBW from the average power value in the window and calculates the sum total 7 48 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 5 User Defined Functions Measures the sum total of the power in the entire measurement span Executes operations of the measurement span and RBW from the average power value and calculates the sum total Measures the average power in the entire measurement Span Converts
86. m es c o mm M ee Sound mode 1 ON AM 2 ON FM Sound ON AM or FM Sound ON AM Sound ON FM Sound OFF Display line DL 7 OFF ON Level it Header DLB DLM DLU DLE dBpW DLP V DLV W 1 DLW Display ON Display line OFF 11 40 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Lower byte Talker request Function Listener code Remarks 8 Code Output format Header n m No idi oi uu aas gt m C i e o A RA mm m a GEM oe abb m A averaging start stop pause continue 1 time continue Detection mode sample eee positive ________ A Normaltize A Normalize ON A Normalize OFF Correction data save A instant normalize gt write VIEW blank normalize A DL A gt gt Upper byte 1 max hold C amp gt gt gt bra HO a m pe p u a o WM UM ee ee
87. modulation accuracy 83 62 LIN 169 5 mV ATT 10dB SPAN 500 0 kHz SWP d O 65 Figure 7 29 AM modulation wave spectrum Linear scale Obtain the AM modulation accuracy same as the procedure D and display it with unit on the marker area See Figure 7 26 When putting the horizontal axis into linear scale and the vertical axis into time domain AM 68 58 LIN REF 31 95 ATT 1 400 00 RBW MHz Figure 7 30 AM modulation accuracy measurement in time domain AMarker is set as shown in Figure 7 30 and the AM modulation accuracy can be obtained by moving the Amarker in the modulation wave peak level and the active marker in the small level The obtained AM modulation accuracy is displayed on the marker area with unit See Figure 6 20 7 46 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section 4 Occupied bandwidth OBW measurement MEAS2 Finds the occupied bandwidth of the signal being displayed on the screen The results are shown in the marker display area for the occupied bandwidth OBW and the occupied band carrier frequency Fc the band center frequency See 6 5 Occupied Bandwidth OBW Measurement for the measurement method 5 Adjacent channel leakage power ACP measurement MEAS2 Bring up the adjacent channel leakage power measurement menu See 6 6 Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement for the me
88. n Pressing this key select PAUSE during averaging will pause the operation The current averaging count will be seen at the top left of the display Pressing again select CONT will continue the averaging from the point at which it was paused When CONT is set even after the desired averaging count has been reached averaging will be repeated continuously using algorithm 2 for updating the data 1n the 1 single mode as soon as the desired averaging count has been reached the analyzer will automatically leave the averaging and go to the VIEW mode Averaging algorithms Current averaging count N Averaging count specified Yn Trace data for nth average Averaged data for nth average Averaged data for n 1th average Sigma Sum of all the data up to the nth sweep N 1 Ya 4 N Selects to execute averaging the sample detection mode or in the positive peak detection mode 7 22 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 2 TRACE Functions 7 2 3 Calculation Modes Display the calculation and normalize modes menu t Exchange the contents of the A trace A and B trace B memories The new memory contents become the difference between the original A memory or the sweep data and the B memory That is if trace is in the VIEW or BLANK mode then the difference is taken between the A and B memories and the result stored in But if trace is in
89. with unit on the marker area For example when a Amarker is 100 mV and an active marker is 10 mV 10 96 is displayed 7 26 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 3 Marker Section Functions 543 _ 91 09 mv 1 0000000 GHz 9 kHz VBW 100 0 Figure 7 12 AMarker level display Multi Marker In this mode a maximum of six markers can be displayed This enables simultaneous measurement of the frequency and level at multiple points One of the six markers always becomes an active marker which can be moved by the numeric keys STEP key and DATA KNOB key OFF 3T MUT wkm e r a Displays the menu for selecting up to six markers gt gt ZT MKR 20220 i 5550 MKR OFF keys Each time this key teat is pressed the marker No in the menu is incremented by 1 up to 6 and returns to 1 m m BT WIR ON Displays the marker corresponding to the number selected by om Den AMD i 1 vbi 1 5 Pees d marker No in the 7 27 Mar 1 97 DEMENS the ea e oo ES ET dise ll ee ee ee ee ee RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 3 Marker Section Functions
90. 0 Disable connection time out 600 CONTROL Sc 17 0 Disable nonactivity time out 610 CONTROL Sc 18 40 Lost Carrier 400 ms 620 CONTROL Sc 19 10 Transmit time out 105 630 CONTROL Sc 20 15 Set Transmit speed 19200 640 CONTROL Sc 21 15 Set Receive speed 19200 650 CONTROL Sc 22 0 Set protocol handshake to non 660 CONTROL Sc 28 38 Set H W handshake type 670 CONTROL Sc 24 2 680 CONTROL Sc 28 2 1 Set EOL chra NO 690 CONTROL Sc 29 13 Set CR code 700 CONTROL Sc 30 10 Set LF code 710 CONTROL Sc 34 3 Set DATA LENGTH 8 720 CONTROL Sc 35 0 Set STOP BIT TO 1 BIT 730 CONTROL Sc 36 0 Set PARITY TO NON 740 CONTROL Sc 37 0 Set CHAR INTERVAL 750 RETURN 760 770 5 65 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function 5 5 10 Exceptional Processing If any of the following conditions arises in the system it will suspend the communication at that time and perform the following as exceptional processing Conditions Processing Condition Processing Condition Processing Condition Processing The next character is not received within 5 seconds of the last received character during message receiving from the controller before receiving the delimiter character string The system cancels that message and generates a break signal It will use the next received character as the start of message During message transmission to the
91. 0 59 after self calibration Scale fidelity accuracy after self calibration LOG 5 1 5dB 90dB lt t1 0dB 10dB lt 0 2dB 1dB 5 5 LIN of reference level input attenuator lt 1 0dB 100kHz to 2GHz 20 to 50dB settings referenced lt 1 5dB 9kHz to 2 2GHz to 10dB Resolution bandwidth switching lt 1 0dB at reference bandwidth 3MHz error after self calibration 5 Sweep Sweep time 50ms to 1000s and manual sweep Accuracy lt 5 e Trigger mode FREE RUN SINGLE VIDEO EXT TV 13 42 Jun 10 97 6 Demodulation e Spectrum demodulation Modulation type Audio output 7 Input Output e RF input Connector Impedance Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON 10MHz reference input Connector Impedance Input range Video output Connector Impedance Amplitude 750 terminator External trigger input Connector Impedance Trigger level Gate input Connector Impedance Sweep stop Sweep continue Phone output Connector Power output RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 6 U4342N Specifications AM FM speaker and phone jack with volume control adjustable N type female 750 nominal VSWR x 1 5 100kHz to 2GHz VSWR lt 2 0 9kHz to 2 2GHz INPUT ATT 10dB VSWR 2 1 10MHz to 2GHz INPUT ATT zOdB female rear panel 50Q nominal 8dBm to 16dBm BNC female rear panel 750 nominal AC coupled Approx 1Vp p 750 termin
92. 00 494 00 to 502 00 502 00 to 510 00 510 00 to 518 00 518 00 to 526 00 526 00 to 534 00 534 00 to 542 00 542 00 to 550 00 550 00 to 558 00 558 00 to 566 00 566 00 to 574 00 574 00 to 582 00 9 49 Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table cont d Analyzer s Channel Frequency range Picture frequency Sound frequency _ channel MHz MHz 582 00 to 590 00 e 590 00 to 598 00 37 37 598 00 to 606 00 38 38 606 00 to 614 00 39 39 614 00 to 622 00 40 40 622 00 to 630 00 41 41 630 00 to 638 00 42 42 638 00 to 646 00 43 43 646 00 to 654 00 44 44 654 00 to 662 00 45 45 662 00 to 670 00 46 46 670 00 to 678 00 47 47 678 00 to 686 00 48 48 686 00 to 694 00 49 49 694 00 to 702 00 50 50 702 00 to 710 00 51 51 710 00 to 718 00 52 52 718 00 to 726 00 53 53 726 00 to 734 00 54 54 734 00 to 742 00 55 55 742 00 to 750 00 56 56 750 00 to 758 00 57 57 758 00 to 766 00 58 58 766 00 to 774 00 59 59 774 00 to 782 00 60 60 782 00 to 790 00 61 61 790 00 to 798 00 62 62 798 00 to 806 00 63 63 806 00 to 814 00 64 64 814 00 to 822 00 65 65 822 00 to 830 00 66 66 830 00 to 838 00 67 67 838 00 to 846 00 68 68 846 00 to 854 00 69 69 854 00 to 862 00 9 50 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table 9 Table 9 41 Channel table of CATV west Europe Analyzer S Sanne Frequen v range Pic
93. 1 Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Common to Measurements Average display noise level This is a measure of the maximum input sensitivity The input sensitivity is related to the noise internally generated by the analyzer itself and depends on the resolution bandwidth used Normally it is determined by the average noise level of the analyzer at its narrowest resolution bandwidth it determines the dynamic range lower limit The average display noise level is shown in table 6 2 Table 6 2 Average display noise level Awg psp ay AAEE U4941N 4341N 4342N Remarks noise level U4941PHS 4342PHS Preamplifier OFF 117 dBm 2 7f GHz dB 8 dBuV 2 71 GHz RBW 1khz VBW 10 Hz 0 dB and frequency 132 dBm 3 3f GHz dB 23 dB V 3 31 1 or more 1 dB gain compression point This is a measure of the linear input range When the level of the signal input to the mixer is increased above a certain value the mixer starts to saturate From that point on the mixer output IF signal no longer tracks the input signal amplitude result is that the level displayed on the screen drops below what it should be The input level at which there is a 1 dB decline compression from the ideal response characteristic is defined to be the 1 dB gain compression point Preamplifier ON GHz dB Output level Ideal Input Output response characteristic Actual input Output response characteris
94. 2 MUR S m 7 27 9 Signal sssri eV e 7 28 4 Noise measurement mode 7 28 5 Marker level display switching at display 7 29 6 Marker movement between trace B 7 30 7 2 Peak ow eae dde de d 7 31 1 Peak search menu T 7 31 2 Amplitude condition setting for NEXT PEAK search 7 32 3 Modifying the peak search level 7 33 7223 MARKER Maker TO RACER ER d 7 34 34 Marker OFF Rea eee dote cg 7 35 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section DORT 7 36 TAT MEASI FUNCIONS lt lt 232 EH d uS ad GS eR COP 7 36 1 HUOM SCNSHIVG ou ug eae ce beoe ade eb o ed 7 36 2 Freguent y COURIC d ec oen aos e ORE RC Ret RUE Ge 7 37 3 Delay sweep function 7 38 4 Peak list Tuncllon eats eura T 4a 7 402 MEAS2 FUNCIONS Y Ora C RU ee bcp 7 42 1 X dB down measurement 7 42 2 Third order intermodulation distortion measurement 7 44 3 Measuring an AM modulation accuracy 7 45 4 Occupied bandwidth OBW measurement 7 47 5 Adjacent channel leakage power
95. 23 Apr 1 96 CS RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 1035 98 to 1062 98 1074 34 to 1101 34 1112 70 to 1139 70 1151 06 to 1178 06 1189 42 to 1216 42 1227 78 to 1254 78 1266 14 to 1293 14 1304 50 to 1331 50 9 5 TV Channel Table Table 9 11 Channel table of BS in Japan Analyzer s Shanna Frequency range Center frequency channel MHz MHz 1049 48 1087 84 1126 20 1164 56 1202 92 1241 28 1279 64 1318 00 V ITYPE1 For JCSAT communication local oscillation 11 3 GHz vertically polarized Waves 954 75 to 981 75 984 75 to 1011 75 1014 75 to 1041 75 1044 75 to 1071 75 1074 75 to 1101 75 1104 75 to 1131 75 1134 75 to 1161 75 1164 75 to 1191 75 1194 75 to 1221 75 1224 75 to 1251 75 1254 75 to 1281 75 1284 75 to 1311 75 1314 75 to 1341 75 1344 75 to 1371 75 1374 75 to 1401 75 1404 75 to 1431 75 9 24 Table 9 12 Channel table of CS in Japan 1 Center frequency MHz 968 25 998 25 1028 25 1058 25 1088 25 1118 25 1148 25 1178 25 1208 25 1238 25 1268 25 1298 25 1328 25 1358 25 1388 25 1418 25 Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table 2 For JCSAT communication local oscillation 10 873 GHz vertically polarized Waves 1831 75 to 1858 75 Table 9 13 Channel table of CS in D idis nd 5 Frequency range Center frequency channel MHz MHz 1381 75 to 1408 75 141
96. 24 10 7 7 61 8 1 Feb 9 99 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Alphabetical Index O Reading back from a memory card 5 31 Occupied Bandwidth OBW Rear Panel 3 6 Measurement 6 32 3 15 Occupied Bandwidth A 3 Recall Function 5 31 Operating Environment Conditions 2 2 7 61 Operation and explanation 8 10 Reference Level 7 4 Option Configuration 1 4 Reference Level Display Accuracy A 2 LEVEL KOY RE x 3 1 P 3 10 PANGS ou an oae see Fed ce ee 3 1 3 19 Panel KeyS 2 1585 eee 4 6 l i PASS FAIL Function D 7 89 Relation between lower limit and upper 8 8 Peak list function 7 41a limit of frequency bandwidth 7 31 Helationship between input signal level 8 1 Peripheral Equipment 1 6 ida MEL E Residual FM prm EXC A 2 PICTURE key 8 3 8 5 Residual response ju Poner Output Setup ygs Petohonbendwidh o 6 E 2 1 RS 232 Interface Communication 7 70 RS 232 Remote Control Function 5 36 Power measurement 7 48 RS 232 Remote Power OFF Function 7 69 Programming Examples 5 48 Power plug 2 7 Power supply choices 2 4 Power supply conditions 2 6 S Bowen e 3 2 Satellite Broadcast Signal C N 3
97. 3 17 dBm 0 1 dBm _ 10dB 20 dB 100 6000 MHz SPAN 113 7 RBW 3 kHz 1 kHz 80 Figure 7 15 Next peak search execution Thus the target waveform for the next peak search as a AY can be set Bos using the amplitude value div 7 32 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 3 Marker Section Functions AY setting The waveform B increases from the point 0 and decreases from the highest priority point peak to the Peak point point If the value for AY is set even much smaller than the Rise level 5 rise fall levels the waveform will be an object for the next peak search If the waveform amplitude data to be measured is much larger than the level of AY which has been set the waveform data is always an object for peak search Figure 7 16 AY setting 3 Modifying the peak search level F ALL UP Modify the reference level of the next peak search with the display line i3 Select ALL to search the entire waveform data with the next peak search Initial state Select UP to search the level above the display line with the next peak search see Figure 7 17 and LOW for the level below see Figure 7 18 400 311 MHz 1 84 dB 10dB id e 409 3 398 883 MHz 24 23 REF 0 0 dBm 400 080 MHz
98. 3 7 show the location of each numbered item further details and explanations will be found in the indicated sections We Oo LCD display Displays the waveforms and data in color Also the whole display can be moved Softkey menu display Up to 6 software defined keys can be displayed 5 1 area here key Clears or displays the Softkey menu display Turn off the back light of the screen Softkeys 6 keys the function of each labeled by the 15 1 corresponding softkey menu item INPUT connector 500 connector is used for the U4342 4342PHS 6 1 750 connector is used for the U4342N Both connectors are N type Input signals with frequencies between 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz 27 dBm in the max input level 50 VDC in the ax U4342 4342PHS 134 dBuV 50 VDC in the max U4342N can be analyzed CENTERKey Selects the center frequency input mode EXE Q SPANkey Selects the frequency span input mode 7 1 2 amp REFLEVELKey Selects the reference level input mode Em STARTkey Selects the Sweep starting frequency d Selects menus for setting trigger video 17 1 6 detector Sweep sound and color modes STOP rey Seeds the sweep ending Requency 717 Setup the coupled functions resolution 7 1 5 bandwidth video bandwidth sweep time and attenuator Controls the display waveform trace ho 3 19 Jun
99. 60 5 4 4 7 7 69 8 2 4 2 7 2 7 9 7 7 13 3 2 3 11 3 20 7 49 7 38 9 7 7 10 9 3 7 13 7 13 8 3 9 3 Alphabetical index E EM dub ee A 1 EMG FUNCION ox Re RR 7 80 e TTC TT E 1 Environmental conditions 2 2 Equipment Configuration 1 6 Exceptional Processing 5 66 external DC power cable 2 4 F FAST MOUE 444440 vade 7 62 FM Signal Analysis 6 22 Frequency Counter 7 37 Frequency Measurement 6 10 Frequency Response A 3 Fredu ency SBluD oos 6440s ea 8 4 Frequency Opal ORE A 7 2 Frequency Span Setup 9 13 Front Panel iiei 3 1 3 10 3 19 Function Descriptions 7 1 Function Key Section 5 3 Function of the SHIFT key 4 6 Functions of the Fundamental Keys 7 1 FUSE Suus a ERU c os 2 8 G Gain Compression A 2 Glossary oss betae d d rp ed bote df A 1 GND terminal 2 8 GIB 594 11 1 GPIBAAdd 6SS 11 7 GPIB bus configuration 11 3 GPIB connector pin assignment 11 4 GPIB interface codes 11 6 GPIB Specifications 11 3 H Harmonic Distortion Measurement 6 12 High sensitive 7 36 Higher Harmonic spurious A 4 Feb 9 99 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Alphabetical Index IF Bnadwidth
100. 87 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 13 Utility Functions CAUTION 1 A limit line data table can only contain frequency domain data points or time domain data points they cannot be mixed a single table there are already frequency domain data points and you do try to make a time domain entry the following display will appear ay EF s i and continue with the time domain data entry Even though the limit line display has been enabled if the limit line domain frequency or time is not the same as the current screen display mode then the limit line will not be displayed 7 88 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 13 Utility Functions 7 13 3 PASS FAIL Function Display Trace Go No go Test Function A Go No go test for the display trace can be done using the limit line function 10 0 dBm EE DENEN 3 AN 10 00 MHz E SPAN 10 00 MHz 58 50 ms 50 ms Figure 7 49 PASS FAIL function Figure 7 50 PASS FAIL function Using a single limit line Using both limit lines When only a single limit line is used to establish the pass fail criterion if the spectrum or waveform is always below the limit line then it PASSES otherwise it FAILS When two limit lines are used then the spectrum or waveform PASSES if and ony if it is totally confined between the two limit li
101. 9 1 1 Operation and Explanation Pressing key to light LED the mode is switched to channel input mode On the screen channel inputtable band is displayed ONSE TEST CF 1 2000 GHz SP RBW 3 MHz MHZ Figure 9 5 Channel input mode screen 1 Channel setup LED lights T re Sets the channel inputtable band VHF UHF 17 Sets the channel inputtable band UHF Sets the channel inputtable band CATV Sets the channel inputtable band BS TS Sets the channel inputtable band CS r Displays the next menu 9 4 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 1 Channel Setu V Ke Setting the channel inputtable band USER2 user table setup screen appears Up to four digits of channel number can be set arbitrarily Up to 99 channels are available Set data on the channel number the picture frequency and the frequency range Go to 2 Setting the channel inputtable band USER user table setup screen appears Go to 2 Channel numbers are continuous numbers 1 to 99 Set data on the picture frequency and the frequency range Returns to the previous menu 2 User table setup Saves recalls user table in from the analyzer s memory card Go to n User channel setup screen appears User channel can be input Go to 3 Returns to the previous menu
102. 911 3 MIIA TVNY31X3 5 MIIA _ VOD m Wd gt gl Iu V 9046 L11X3 395 E 809050229096 92909000 7 ra 096909 80909096 995960206 05050 2999592 080200090600 ST 065 St 4 086 8 M3lAVNH3IX3 Never Jails LNOHJ a9 99 505290 o 905050926 090005050 2829 92099500 9050 0909 8000 0909 20 SV 055 Sl o vl 14342 FRONT VIEW 19 9706 EXT20 9802 B U434240PT72 FRONT VIEW 48380 82 ge 2 U4342PHS FRONT VIEW EXT21 9706 A 20000 araa aaa rte rer rt RF INPUT U4342N RF FIELD ANALYZER TG 750 750 2 8 U4342N FRONT VIEW _ 22 9706 _ EXT23 9802 B U4342N OPT72 FRONT VIEW U4342 4342N OPT72 REAR VIEW V 90Z6 SCLX3 SHdZt vn Part 2 PHS ID demodulation function OPERATION MANUAL Part 2 1 Jun 10 97 0 DEMODULATION FUNCTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Products overview 1 1 EE C7 een 1 1 2 Accessory sold lt 2 1 MEN COS OET 2 1 3 Panel ere e DET 3 1 SE c 3 1 3 3
103. 92 7 92 7 94 7 94 8 1 8 3 8 7 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL List of Illustrations No Title Page 10 1 AR CRUS irn 10 5 10 2 Clear Screen c i hh Ihr rn 10 6 10 3 ica ce A ECC a qe e RR 10 7 10 4 Connecting prm 10 8 10 5 Sweep Time for 2 Seconds 10 8 10 6 Measurement of an Insertion Loss 10 9 10 7 Measurement of a Passing Bandwidth 10 10 10 8 Measurement of an Attenuation 10 11 11 1 GPIB bus icontig relloft 11 3 11 2 GPIB cornector pin BSSIQNIMIENE i2 629 sida ee 11 4 11 3 Signal line terminalon lt 2 oue dm Stee deol SCR CE HE RU SERRE ES 11 5 11 4 Relation between screen grid and data points 11 19 1 Se ete 1 2 LOVE XAR Ed ee OS Wes be ee e A 2 A 3 Occupied Bandwidth ea A 3 A 4 SOUMOUS HesbOSB E ate EUER E E deca an 4 5 Noise Sidebasld ez e pu EG imei x A 5 A 6 Bandwidili SelgolivilV xcu aen pd sten te Re Rc Meee UR Ja ad A 6 7 Bandwidth Switching Accuracy 6 8 uM aW bao uA a
104. ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont Talker request Function Listener code F Remarks ul ___ Output format TV Signal NTSC method TVHNT PAL amp SECAM method TVHPS Video signal modulation polarity TVPOL TVPOL External value 0 to 5 0 value 0 to 5 0 EX Real value 0 to 5 0 Trigger slope TRIGSLP NN IBGSPe nb Detector mode 10 Normal 1 Positive Negative Sample Normal KSa Positive DTP DET POS KSb Negative DTG DET NEG amp aam o gt m m m 4 ie dn mo m fee gt Sweep mode 10 Continuous amp full Continuous amp window Manual amp full Manual amp window Single amp fuli Single amp window Continuous Manual 11 39 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker request Function Listener code E Remarks Output format SNGLS SI Window ON WDOSWP ON SDW Window OFF WDOSWP OFF Reset amp Start Take sweep Pause time PAUSE OFF ON Marker pause ON PAUSE ON PU ON PUN Marker pause OFF PAUSE OFF Single amm
105. All Measurements for more information about their meanings etc Displays couple function softmenu When softmenu disappears display by pressing this key enables the active function in order of RBW VBW SWP gt RBW es Each function can be used in the following procedure If the data is changed the manual setting only can be used However SHIFT using the keys each function can be set to AUTO mode Sets the resolution bandwidth RBW manual mode MNL the RBW can be specified to be between 1 kHz and 3 MHz in a 1 8 sequence In AUTO mode an optimal RBW is set depending on the frequency span See Table 7 2 for RBW assignments Sets the video bandwidth VBW In MNL VBW can be set to any of 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz or 3 MHz See Table 7 2 for VBW automatic assignments Sets the sweep time SWP In MNL mode the sweep time can be set between 50 msec and 1000 sec When the frequency span is set to OHz the SWP can be set between 4 5msec and 1000sec inclusive In AUTO mode an appropriate SWP is chosen depending on the frequency span RBW VBW and so forth in such a way as to avoid any measurement error See Table 7 2 for sweep time in AUTO mode 7 6 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL K Nag v 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys no TIG ENS CAUTION When the sweep time is faster than 50msec t
106. EMCDET Normai EMCDET NRM QP OFF ON QP ON QP ON QN E QP OFF QP OFF QF QP BW AUTO QPAUTO 0 AUTO 2 9kHz 3 120kHz QP BW 9kHz Total gain cal Input ATT cal IF step cal RBW switch cal Calibration Log linearity cal AMPTD cal PBW cali 11 50 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker Function Listener code Remarks Output format Unit Header dBm CLB dBmV dBuV CLU dBuVemf CLE dBoW CLP V CLV Calibration signal ON CLN e Xo m ih Mum umm x Um eee i m gt ma y e OFF ON OFF ON 11 51 Apr 20 97 de WEM ME HN i Mdh e pa m f compensation FRCORR ON FC ON FRCORR OFF f compensation ON m Calibration f compensation OFF OFF ON OFF ON CAL compensation CLCORR ON CC ON CCN CLCORR OFF CC OFF CCF CAL compensation ON CAL compensation OFF Printer output HIGH PRNT LOW PSIZE LRG PSIZE SML PCMND PCL PCMND ESC PLOT High resolution Low resolution Large size Low resolution Smali size H
107. GS 6x Eye LEJ 1 Mio Li eo een pee I 1 1 C I i N m Ap ECL CQ Sd EU I tfc Hh Ie 21 2 R N Q T i 1 1 I 1 1 I Lie Lut I tri 22 212 gym gt gt gt mr 10 97 17 A 3 Menu Lists RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL MEM CD SHIFT osque preme mpm i i gt ee 1 4 l 4 J e yp 111 B EE EE 2 O 221 te ict i I gt ou LU E Zug t i fra IL 1 i 1 7 Jun 10 97 18 SHIFT CAL gt A gt 8 CORR CORR 5 4 See section 7 10 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL SHIFT COPY See section 7 9 19 SHIFT LABEL See section 7 11 3 Menu Lists Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 3 Menu Lists A 3 2 Softkey Menu for TV Demosulation Function OPT72 Standard equipment on U4341 series SHIFT PICTURE Ld gt gt 3 BRIGHT
108. ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 6 GPIB This chapter provides a description of GPIB code lists and examples of program etc 6 1 GPIB code list Note The following codes are about PHS ID demodulation functions For other codes see List of GPIB Codes in the operation manual U3641 Series Operation Manual U4941 4341 4342 Series Operation Manual Refer to the manual which you are using Notes for the table in the listener code column shows the function which can input numeric data following to code in the output format column shows that it can output plural data Each AUTO MANUAL in output format column outputs Each ON OFF in output format column outputs I O in the remarks column shows the initial value set after power on shows unsuitable In the output format column unit of frequency and time are used in Hertz Hz and second respectively Mar 15 97 6 1 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 6 1 GPIB code list ON ON OFF OFF TRIGGER 0 FREE RUN 2 VIDEO 8 SYNC CS ID FREE RUN FREE PHS VIDEO VIDEO PHS ID ID SYNC CS ID 8 DELAY SYCDLY SYCDLY SYD SWEEP TIME SWP PHS DISP LINE DL PHS ID LIST IDLIST Refer to Fig 6 1 ID TRIGGER IDTRCI String IDTRCS IDTRCS String IDTRPS IDTRPS String ID LIST IDLIST PHS CHANNEL PHSCH PHSCH Integer PCH CHUNIT 0 Hz
109. Inputs the data of memory B in binary format Opens the RS 232 port without insertion of the binary mode and the line feed character OPEN 0 1 9600 8 1 056000 1 FOR RANDOM AS 1 DIM TR 1500 CONST DLE 16 STX 2 4 Defines control character CONST CR 13 LF 10 PRINT 1 TBB CHRS LF Assumes that data is already set to TR using or TBB PRINT 1 CHR DLE CHRE STX FOR J 0 TO 1401 IF TR J CHR DLE THEN PRINT 1 CHR DLE FORK 0 TO 1 Wait time is required to ensure processing time at SPA NEXT K END IF PRINT 1 TR J FOR 0 TO 1 Wait time is required to ensure processing time at SPA NEXT K NEXT J PRINT 1 CHR DLE CHR EOT Note Set to VIEW mode before program execution When VIEW key is pressed after program execution the input result will be confirmed 5 55 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function 3 Status byte readout function Since Service Request SRQ and Status Byte are GPIB specific functions the HS 232 does not support the same functions However the status byte readout function has been added to the RS 232 as part of normal message exchange When the status byte data are read out by the status byte readout code PLL the system sends out the data as two byte ASCII data Table 5 8 Control codes for status byte Message code Content
110. Limit line data table entry There are two independent limit lines 1 and 2 Each limit line can be defined either in the frequency or time domains The defining tables contain up to 51 data pairs each associating a frequency or time point to a level Frequency points can be from 99 999999999 GHz through 999 999999999 GHz times from 0 to 1000 seconds and levels specified in the range 240 to 100 dBm Level data can also be entered in the same units as the reference level except for the units of V or W There are two modes of accessing the data tables a normal entry mode for the initial table creation and an edit mode for modifying an existing limit line T clus aa E pnm E 30 00 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz cn RBW 100 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 50 ms Figure 7 47 Limit line data entry 7 84 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 13 Utility Functions Limit line menu SHIFT UTIL F DOMAIN Frequency domain PRSE IS Create a limit line I LMT LINE Enable the limit line 1 or 2 and go to data entry mode The data table can be scrolled with the data knob 7 and the step keys Frequency data input points should be absolute or relative data Relative values are with respect to the center frequency Level data input points should be absolute or relative data When the display line is present relative values are with res
111. Measurement MEAS Section 3 Delay sweep function Delay sweep is a function that makes a sweep start after arbitrary time from the time when a sweep trigger signal is generated and is available only at the zero span mode External trigger VIDEO trigger TV V trigger and TV H trigger are used as a trigger signal source Rear panel Analyzer External trigger terminal Trigger signal ievel synchronized with an input signal Signal source Figure 7 20 shows a setup mode in the delay sweep mode Select the trigger signal source in the TRIGGER mode Move a window to a desirable position with delay position and delay sweep time to expand a part of the waveform Figure 7 21 shows the waveform of the time when the window part is expanded by executing delay sweep Refer to the delay sweep setting menu for details of key operations Figure 7 20 Waveform at the setup mode Figure 7 21 Waveform measured with delay The window is moved to a part to be sweep ON The window part is expended expanded 7 38 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section MEAS se DELAY Delay mode is selected and its setup mode appears Setup mode Sets the zero span Displays the window Switches a trigger to VIDEO if the trigger is set to FREE RUN Sets the trigger to one of VIDEO EXT TV H TV V Refer to 7 1 6 1 for details of each trigger Sets
112. Measurement function ID list display CS ID PS ID level and time ID MKR Displays ID of the specified signal in the waveform display mode Cycle measurement Measures synchronizing signal of the specified CS ID iBurst error ratio measurement Number of error slots number of measurements settings Level measurement calculation Median operation function Mean value operation Maximum Minimum value operation 13 7 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 2 U4941N Specifications 13 2 U4941N Specifications 1 Frequency Frequency range 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz Frequency readout accuracy X span accuracy 0 15 x RBW 50 kHz Start Stop CF Marker frequency Count frequency marker Hesolution Count accuracy 1 Hz to 1 kHz marker frequency X frequency reference accuracy 1LSD 5 Hz S N gt 25 dB 50kHz SPAN x 10 MHz RBW gt 100 kHz 2X10 8 Year 1X10 5 0 C to 50 Frequency reference accuracy Frequency span Range Accuracy 50 kHz to 2 4 GHz ZERO lt 5 SPAN gt 100kHz Frequency stability Residual FM Drift 3 kHz p p 100 ms lt 10 kHz Frequency is fixed 30 minutes after power ON Sweep time 50 ms to 5 s temperature is fixed lt 100 dBc Hz 20 kHz offset 1 kHz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence lt 20 1 kHz to 1 MHz lt 25 3 MHz Selectivit
113. Menu explanation Displays reference level frequency softmenu When softmenu disappears display reference level can be set by procedure 1 The level scaling vertical axis can be set to be between 1 dB and 10 dB per division Cycled in a 1 2 5 sequence Levels are indicated in volts The display ranges linearly from 0 V to the reference level Since there is a conversion from an original log scale dB div some slight error can arise The units for the reference level display line and marker level are selected from the following voltage or power menu choices Power menu Voltage menu 3 dBm 104941 4941 57 ER 14341 4342 _ 4 4342PHS level in dBpW ithe initial state dBuV 1U4941N 4341N 4342N level in the initial state VOLT iGo to the voltage UNITS jmenu REF OFS When ON is selected an offset between 0 to 100 0 dB can be added to Domo Merten Bone ON OFF _ 4 the reference level Reference level Displayed Reference level SET Offset level When OFF is selected the offset is removed from the display 7 5 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys 7 1 5 Couple Key CPL The CPL key is used to set the following interrelated items RBW VBW SWP ATT Resolution bandwidth Video bandwidth Sweep time Attenuator Input attenuator See section 6 1 Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Common to
114. NG MNL SWP PHS mode cannot be set because the MANUAL SWEEP mode is Set ERR 316 NG MNL SWP Power measurement cannot be executed because the MANUAL SWEEP mode is set ERR 320 NG ON MANUAL SWEEP function cannot be executed because the COUNTER operation mode is selected ERR 321 NG CNTR ON SIGNAL TRACK function cannot be executed because the COUNTER operation mode is selected NG SIG dB DOWN function cannot be executed because the SIGNAL TRACK is in progress OBW and ACP functions cannot be executed because the MANUAL SWEEP mode is selected ERR 312 Delay sweep mode cannot be selected because the MANUAL ERR 330 NG SIG TRK Continuous peak search function cannot be executed because the SIGNAL TRACK is in progress ERR 331 A 25 Feb 25 98 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 4 List of Massages cont d Description Error code Message dB DOWN function cannot be executed because the NOISE Hz mode is selected ERH 332 NG N Hz MD Continuous peak search function cannot be executed because the NOISE Hz mode is selected ERR 333 NG N Hz MD The AVERAGE mode cannot be executed because SIGNAL TRACK is being executed ERR 336 NG SIG 339 NO PEAK The peak list function cannot be executed because no waveform peak exists ERH 340 NO PEAK 3D harmonic wave distortion cannot be obtained because the desired pea
115. NXP 50 OUTPUT 701 ML 60 ENTER 701 M1 I 70 NEXT I 80 END M1 1 M1 9 70 26 Result M1 0 55 01 11 16 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 5 Query Syntax Talker 9801 series programming examples GPIB address 8 Example PC 9 Output the maker level Numerical variable 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 8 HDO Sets the header OFF 30 PRINT 8 ML Marker level 40 PRINT 8 ML Reads the marker level 50 PRINT MARKER LEVEL ML Outputs results on the display 60 END Result MARKER LEVEL 16 22 Example PC 1 0 Output the center frequency Character variable YOISETIFCISETREN I 20 PRINT 8 HD1 Sets the header ON 30 PRINT 98 CF 40 INPUT 98 CF Reads the center frequency 50 PRINT CF Outputs results on the display 60 END Result CF 000025 000000E 6 Example PC 11 Output the unit of the level and the level rA EENSE EE SE NM B EMEN xiii E LE o 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 98 HD1 Sets the header ON 30 PRINT 8 RE 40 INPUT 8 RES Reads the reference level 50 PRINT 8 UN 60 INPUT 8 UN Reads the unit of the level 70 PRINT RES UN Outputs results on the display 80 END Result REB 000000 0E
116. POLL 8 S Read status byte into variable s S AND 8 0 THEN GOTO LOOP Loop till 1 comes up at the third bit PRINT 8 Read measurement result INPUT 8 PWR END To perform measurement of maximum minimum values ISET IFC ISET REN PRINT 8 HDO Header OFF PRINT Clear status byte PRINT 8 ON set measurement mode of burst error to ON PRINT 88 IDMS 20ENT set measurement number of times to 20 LOOP POLL 8 S Read status byte into variable s IF 5 AND 8 0 THEN LOOP Loop till 1 comes up at the third bit PRINT 48 Read measurement result INPUT 8 END read ID of ID marker Refer to Fig 6 2 for the output format To read ID list Refer to Fig 6 11 for the output format 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 ISET IFC ISET REN PRINT 88 IDMK SENT Move ID marker to the fifth ID waveform PRINT Q88 IDMK Read ID of ID marker PRINT 88 ONOFF ER IP IDS END ISET IFC ISET REN PRINT 8 S2 Clear status byte LOOP POLL 8 IF 5 AND 4 0 THEN LOOP Loop tili 1 comes up at the second bit PRINT 8 IDLIST Read ID list READID INPUT 08 ER UP IDS LEVEL TIM Read ID data for 1 slot IF ER 5 THEN GOTO READID When ER becomes to 5 the data ends END Mar 15 97 6 9 Specifications of performance This chapter provides a de
117. Power measurement cannot be executed because the PHS mode is set Delay sweep mode cannot be set because the SYNC CS ID trigger is set ERR 705 SYNC CS ID ERR 706 SYNC CS ID Zoom mode cannot be set because the SYNC 5 trigger is set ERH 707 NG SYNC SYNC CS ID cannot be set because the ID cycle is not measured ERR 708 NG SYNC ID measurement cannot be started because the ID cycle is not measured ERR 709 ID MEAS ON Trigger cannot be changed because the ID measurement function IS set ID MEAS ON Sweep time cannot be changed because the ID measurement function is set ERR 711 NOT FOUND There is no PHS channel that matches with the ID trigger ERR 712 I NG ID MKR ID marker cannot be set because the ID measurement function is set EHH 710 A 30 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 4 List of Massages cont d ERR714 NG PHS MD The multi marker list cannot be displayed because now is in the PHS mode ERR 715 NG PHS MD Peak list cannot be displayed because now is in the PHS mode ERR 731 NG PEAK LST PHS mode cannot be set because now is in the peak list mode ERR 732 NG PEAK LST Others than the single sweep cannot be set because now is in the peak list mode ERR 733 NG PEAK LST Functions using the marker cannot be executed because now is in the peak list mode ERR 734 PEAK LST TV monitor screen cannot be set because now is
118. RETURN Returns to the previous menu screen TER Measurements of BRST ER MEDIAN AVG PWR and MAX MIN are performed to CS ID DOWN which is set to trigger Trigger mode is switched to SYNC CS ID automatically Start of setting the number of measurement and measuring Setting each measurement to ON starts measurement with the setting value which has already been set The setting value is changed with ten key and Cs 1 step and key After the setting start measurement Press START STOP to stop the measurement in the dle Pressing START STOP in the stop state starts again Maximum setting value ERR 999 MEDIAN 300 AVG PWR 300 MAX MIN 300 5 14 m Apr 1 96 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION CENTER lt 1 96 Center frequency can be set with frequency and channel carrier Hz CH Switches input unit to Hz and CH Displays 1 to 77CH frequency assignment table s Scans signal in order of channel When demodulation signal is found it stops at the channel Pressing AUTO SCAN again restarts the measurement Setting for measurement RBW ee 300kHz ive 400ms TRIGGER FREE RUN Switch to HI SENS mode if necessary Measurement start channel It depends on center frequency input mode Hz CH Hz Starts from 1 ch CH Starts from present setting channel 1 ch When signal is detected it stops at the channel 5 15 PHS
119. RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 2 dB Conversion Formulas A 2 dB Conversion Formulas Definitions OdBV 1 Vrms YdBV 20log 57 2 XmW OdBm ImW YdBm 1010 4 Iu Vrms 20108 TV TE OdBpw YdBpw lOlog IpW Conversion formulas If R 50 0 75 Q dBm 13dB dBV dBm 114 dBuvV dBm 107dB dBm 109dB dBuVemf dBm 113dB dBuVemf dBm 115dB dBpw dBm 90dB dBpw dBm 90dB Examples Converting 1mV into dBuV 20log ny 20log 10 60dBuV Converting OdBm into OdBm 107dB 107dBu V R 500 OdBm 109dB 109dBu Y R 750 Converting 60dBi V into dBm 60dBuV 107dB 47dBm R 500 60dBuV 109dB 49dBm R 750 Converting 10V m into dBu V m 20log 19 _ 140dBuV m lu V m Relationship between dBm and Watt 50dBm 40dBm 30dBm 20dBm 10dBm 0dBm 0dBm 20dBm 30dBm 100W 100mW 01mW 0 001mW 8 Feb 9 99 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 3 Menu Lists A 3 Menu Lists Softkey Menu A 3 1 i REQ m eee eee a 1 1 gt SCOTI e gt i lt t a 1555 LL ON a i I Zl
120. RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 1 Channel Setup TV Key 3 The case when the frequency corresponding to the specified channel is different from the present setup value If the picture center frequency best value of lower limit best value of upper limit of the specified channel is different from the present setup center frequency START STOP frequency displays a message in the active area as Fig 9 3 shows to indicate that the present setup frequency is different D Set the present setup CENTER CH 1 91 25 MHz channel 1CH Center frequency 91 25MHz Picture frequency Channel Set the frequency input CENTER mode to input center 93 0 MHz frequency 93 0MHz Switch to Channel input CENTER CH mode 1 Last Setup Because the present setup center frequency is different from the picture frequency of channel 1 The present setup frequency is 93 0MHz Set the setup channel 1CH CENTER CH 1 91 25 MHz Figure 9 3 Difference between the present setup value and the displayed value 4 The case when no channel is set in user mode Displays a message in the active area to indicate that the user channel is not setup Fig 9 4 shows the example User channel is not setup Use editor to setup the CENTER CH picture frequency and the frequency bandwidth No Setup Figure 9 4 Display when user table is not set 9 3 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 1 Channel Setu V Ke
121. RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 4 U4341N Specifications 8 General specifications e Environment temperature Operating temperature Relative humidity Non operating temperature 0 C to 50 C RH 85 or less 20 C to 60 C e Power supply External DC input Connector XLR 4 Input range 10V to 16V Automatically selections between 100VAC and 220VAC Voltage 100V to 120V Frequency 50 60Hz Voltage 220V to 240V Frequency 50 60Hz During DC operation 55W max During AC adapter is used 120VA max AC adapter is 300VA max by load Approx 6 8kg Without option accessory carrying belt and battery Approx 148 height X 291 wide 330 depth mm Excluding the projecting legs connector etc During AC adapter is used During 100VAC operation During 220 VAC operation Power consumption Dimensions External memory Memory card 2 slot upper panel Connector JEIDA Ver 4 1 PCMCIA Rev 2 0 13 30 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 5 U4342 4342PHS Specifications 13 5 U4342 4342PHS Specifications 1 Frequency e Frequency range 9kHz to 2 2GHz span X span accuracy 0 15 x RBW SOkHz e Frequency readout accuracy Start Stop CF Marker frequency Count frequency marker Resolution Count accuracy iHz to 1kHz marker f
122. Selects ON OFF 9 ZELLE By BIN HEX setting the cursor is moved horizontally in 1 or 4 bits v EREE The cursor is moved vertically Slects UW up down to be shown in ID list SELECT NONE etr Selects UP DOWN or UP amp DOWN 5 9 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION AUTO AUTO Performs the measurement based on the set up measurement conditions and saves the results into memory card 1 CANCEL Cancels auto measurement start Hegisters the setting conditions to perform auto measurement The setting conditions specify a file saved in the memory card The set ting number to be registered is up to 9 Registers a memory card to the setting condition register DELETE Clears the setting condition register 5 xdv m specifies a drive of card having a file to be registered sl RETURN Returns to the previous screen Key operation v Specifies the register number 2 ZEILE Specifies the file in memory card CARDDRV Specifies the memory card drive to save data After the measurement saves the data into the specified drive Specify the items and forms to save at SAVE ITEM in SAVE menu In saving file names from FILEO001 to FILE9999 are created automat ically 5 10 Apr 1 96 PHS ID E FUNCTION _ 5 2 Soft menu configuration REF 67 0 PRD 0 000S AUTO Pressing C makes a state of waiting for RCL No as t
123. Specitications 3 Dynamic Range Display average noise level Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON 1dB gain compression Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON Spurious response Preamplifier OFF 2nd harmonic distortion 3rd order inter modulation distortion Residual response Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON 80B V 2 7f GHz dB RBW 1kHz VBW 10Hz INPUT ATT OdB frequency 1MHz or more 23dB V 3 3f GHz dB RBW 1kHz VBW 10Hz INPUT ATT OdB frequency 1MHz or more gt 100dByV mixer input level Frequency 10MHz or more gt 70 HF input level Frequency 10MHz or more lt 70dB 78dByV input INPUT OdB frequency gt 10 2 lt 70dB 78 V input INPUT OdB frequency gt 10MHz lt 1098 INPUT ATT OdB INPUT 750 terminated frequency gt 1MHz lt 5dByuV INPUT OdB INPUT 750 terminated frequency gt 1MHz 13 41 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 6 U4342N Specitications 4 Amplitude Accuracy e Frequency response Preamplifier OFF lt 1 0dB 100kHz to 2GHz lt 2 0dB 9kHz to 2 2GHz INPUT 10dB 20 C to 30 C referenced to 30MHz after automatic calibration Preamplifier ON lt 1 0 100kHz to 2GHz lt t 2 0dB 9kHz to 2 2GHz INPUT 098 20 C to 30 C referenced to 30MHz after self calibration Calibration signal accuracy 90 5dB 4V 0 IF gain error lt
124. U4342N Specifications 9 General Specifications e Environment temperature Operating temperature Non operating temperature Helative humidity 0 C to 50 C 209 to 60 C 85 less Power supply External DC input Connector XLH 4 pin Input range 10V to 16V Power consumption during DC operation During AC adapter is used During 100 VAC operation 50W max Automatically selections between 100VAC and 200VAC Voltage 100V to 120V Power consumption 110V max Frequency 50 60Hz Voltage 220V to 240V Power consumption 110VA max Frequency 50 60Hz During 220 VAC operation Mass le Dimensions External memory Memory card Approx 6 8kg Without option accessory carrying belt and battery Approx 148 height X 291 wide 330 depth mm Excluding the projecting legs connector etc 2 slot upper panel Connector JEIDA Ver4 1 PCMCIA Rev 2 0 or later 13 45 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 1 Glossary APPENDIX A 1 Glossary IF Bandwidth The spectrum analyzer uses band pass filter BPF to analyze the frequency components contained in _ the input signal The 3dB bandwidth of the is called the IF band See Figure A 1 a The BPF characteristics should be set according to the sweep width and the sweep speed used for the waveform This spectrum a
125. Window horizontal axis direction and window sweep setup SHIFT MW T m A erii eI 4 5 wer mw Ru monum ches Display the measurement window softmenu When Softmenu disappears display display the measurement window Pushing the following keys each time to display alternately the window frequency and the window width and enables to input Locate the window position according to the horizontal direction Enter the frequency or time data and using the numeric key and units keys the A step keys or the data knob QV See Figure 7 53 Reduce the horizontal axis width of the window AX Enter the frequency or time data and using the numeric key and units keys the keys or the data knob See Figure 7 54 Figure 7 53 Window position Figure 7 54 Window width movement XX increase decrease gt Toggle the window START STOP frequency or Time data When START is selected window START frequency or Time and STOP for window STOP frequency or time can be set Enter the frequency or time data and using the numeric key and units keys the step keys or the data knob 7 92 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 14 Measurement Window Function Toggle the sweep window sweep inside the measurement window When WDO is set sweep only inside the mea
126. a video trigger Sets an external trigger Selects the polarity of an external trigger signal Sets a TV H trigger Sets TV V trigger Selects NTSC system as a signal Selects PAL amp SECAM system as a TV signal Selects picture modulation polarity Heturns to the previous menu Nx mcm A JJ go 7 et aute uta atat v a mee a n n in af e a anh at a aua a et a ea ata atte ehe us I Eee Ma SES y RETURN Returns to the previous setting utere ut a M a 7 39 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section Set the the window to a desirable position by using ten keys unit keys 5 The window is displayed when delay sweep is set to OFF Even if the window is outside the screen the internal data is set Delay position The window moves with its delay sweep time fixed e Resolution depends on the sweep time and can be set up to 50ns unit by using the ten keys its setting range extends 50ns to 1 65 Default value 50ns ee gt lt c c
127. adjust the span visible MKR gt From the operation of the key we now have that the marker frequency is the p carrier frequency fc and its level is the carrier level Pc dB 9 the Amarker be positioned at the 1st sideband frequency location then the Amarker display gives the sideband frequency fag and its level Psg dB gt s tt W 52 C M ote arat tutae and then use the data knob C to adjust to the sideband peak Now using the results of steps and the following formulae will give the modulation index m and the frequency shift SB og EB FOE 20 fm fc Afpeak m X fm 6 27 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements MK as 56 0 kHz 24 29 REF 10 1 dBm iQ0dB ATT 10 dB SPAN 200 0 Mic SWP 140 Figure 6 29 FM signal with small modulation index m 6 28 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements 6 4 3 Measuring Pulse Modulated Signais The spectrum analyzer can analyze pulse modulated waveforms displaying the equivalent fundamental and higher harmonics that compose the pulse A pulse modulated waveform such as seen on the time axis in Figure 6 30 a when transformed to the frequency axis has a spectrum such as shown in Figure 6 30 b with a carrier frequency Fc in the center of a spectral envelope
128. analyzer Check to be sure the memory card is not in use Drive Lamp is always lit on yellow before operating the Eject Buttons to remove cards from the analyzer CAUTION The Drive Lamp will be lit on red whenever the memory card is being accessed by the analyzer Never push the ejector and extract a card while the drive lamp is lit on red If card should be removed while the access lamp was lit on red the data in the card cannot be assured and may be destroyed Memory card initialization New or unused memory cards should always be initialized before use Take the Write Protect off of the card to be initialized WARNING If memory card containing data is reinitialized all data will be destroyed Inser ry card Insert the memory SHIFT MEM CD Select the active drive by pressing ee Press ph 5 24 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use itor 1 DRIVE GOOD PROTECT OFF y ATTRIB MEM EEPROM SOANGEUS SIZE 8 KB Mysia d 4 COMMON MEM RAM BKUP 2032 MHz 5 SIZE 1024 KB P 50 ms Figure 5 24 Memory card initialization menu screen Ss f CYNIEIDN 1 The screen shown in Figure 5 24 will appear Push x to allow the Keates initialization to proceed
129. any negligent act or omission of the Purchaser or any third party other than Advantest EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN ADVANTEST HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND THE PURCHASER HEREBY WAIVES ALL WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION A ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND B ANY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION AS TO THE VALIDITY SCOPE EFFECTIVENESS OR USEFULNESS OF ANY TECHNOLOGY OR ANY INVENTION THE REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN SHALL BE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE PURCHASER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT ADVANTEST WILL NOT HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO THE PURCHASER FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR REVENUES IN ANY AND ALL CIRCUMSTANCES EVEN IF ADVANTEST HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND WHETHER ARISING OUT OF BREACH OF CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY INDEMNITY CONTRIBUTION OR OTHERWISE TORT INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY INDEMNITY CONTRIBUTION OR OTHERWISE OTHER THAN THE REMEDY FOR THE BREACH OF WARRANTY SET FORTH HEREIN ADVANTEST SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR AND HEREBY DISCLAIMS TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ANY LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES FOR PRODUCT FAILURE OR DEFECT WHETHER ARISING OUT
130. be canceled Select ON to first enter a PAUSE time When ON is selected a marker appears on the screen and the sweep is stopped for PAUSE seconds on the marker position The pause period can be set between 100 ms and 1000 sec with the numeric key and units keys V Le step keys or the data knob C Selecting OFF takes the analyzer out of the marker pause mode CAUTION MK PAUSE does not operate in ZERO SPAN mode 7 11 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys 4 Sound monitor mode setup A marker is displayed on the screen The AM or FM signal can be demodulated at the marker position and the audio signal can be output from an internal speaker CAUTION When the setting of U4341 U4341N is TV monitor screen the TV audio demodulation function takes precedence over the SOUND function Therefore the SOUND function is disabled Select the AM or FM demodulator Set the demodulation time and duration marker appears and the sweep is stopped at the marker point for the demodulation duration selected The duration can be set between 100 ms and 1000 sec with the numeric key and units keys La ter keys or the data knob Disable the sound monitor 7 12 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys 5 Display line setup The display line is a horizontal cursor line that runs across the screen for
131. be executed because the scale Is not set to 10dB div NOP ON TB SIGNAL TRACK function cannot be executed against the trace B TA WRITE SIGNAL TRACK function cannot be executed because the trace is not set to WRITE mode ERR 230 10dB div ERR 300 ERR 301 COUNTER function cannot be executed because the trace is not set to WRITE mode ERR 302 TA WHITE A 24 Mar 1 97 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 4 List of Massages cont d rar code Message ERR 303 BLNK OBW and functions cannot be executed because the trace is set to BLANK mode ERR 304 MD 3D harmonic wave measurement cannot be executed because the BLANK mode is selected ERR 305 MD AM measurement cannot be executed because the BLANK mode is selected ERR 308 NOP IN AVG SIGNAL TRACK function cannot be executed because the AVERAGE mode is in progress ERR 307 TRACE Power measurement cannot be executed because the BLANK mode or the VIEW mode is set to the trace ERR 308 CORR DATA The normalize cannot be turned ON because there is no data in the memory ERR 310 MNL SWP COUNTER function cannot be executed because the MANUAL SWEEP mode is selected ERR 311 NG SWP SIGNAL TRACK function cannot be executed because the MANUAL SWEEP mode is selected NG MNL SWP EHR 313 NG MNL SWP SWEEP mode is selected EHR 315
132. code Remarks Output format Marker display Relative value display Absolute value display ___ Active marker movement Trace A Trace B Marker la mr m 9 m 4 c ho Rio ee Abe o NXRIGHT MKPK NH lue scm c co nh de umo m E EgN gt gt ee m Am c m Peak Search 2 c D 8 e gt lo cw m MEM 49 am c a c JJ EE EE SJ i mer ere Continuously peak Lum iam OMM MR OCHO cau m m Continuously peak Continuously peak ON Continuously peak OFF
133. controller transmission prevention is not canceled from the controller more than 5 seconds between the sending of the last character and the sending of the next character The system suspends the message transmission and is ready for the next transmission reception When the trace data are input the system cannot detect the transmission from the controller for more than 25 seconds while the specified number of bytes for ASCII format or specified number of bytes for binary format has not been reached The system will cancel the input mode for the trace data and is ready for the next transmission reception When messages are received a framing error parity error or overrun error occurs The system will cancel the message and generate a break signal It will use the next received character as the start of the message 5 66 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 1 Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Common to Measurements 6 MEASUREMENT EXAMPLES This chapt r shows how to use the analyzer by explaining example measurement procedures Unless otherwise specified the analyzer is used in measurement examples 6 1 Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Common to All Measurements 6 1 1 Input Frequency Range and Resolution 1 Input signal frequency range The analyzer is capable of analyzing input signals with frequencies ranging from 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz However even for frequencies within this range if the resolution bandwid
134. data is saved B Waveform data B is saved Waveform data are saved Note When trace mode is BLANK waveform data are not saved Limit line Limit line OFF Limit line is not saved 1 Limit line 1 is saved 2 Limit line 2 is saved 1 2 Limit lines 1 2 are saved Normalize t Normalize data OFF Normalize data is not saved ON Normalize data is saved Note When you recall the normalize data you can save it to either the backup memory or the memory the data of the latter is lost when powering off the spectrum analyzer For more information refer to in 7 2 4 Normalize Mode Antenna f Antenna compensated data OFF Antenna compensated data is not saved ON Antenna compensated data is saved IDdist ID list OFF 10 list is not saved ON ID list is saved Note ID list is saved when data exists Savable files number The following shows examples of savable files number in BIN form Use them as a guide in Setup data Setup data Setup data Setup data only T Waveform Waveform A B Waveform Limit 1 59 filos 29 files 16 files 19 files 128 125 71 83 2M 128 128 128 128 saving Note Maximum number of registerable files 128 files 5 30 Feb 25 38 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use b Reading back from a memory card RECALL function e In NORMAL mode SAVE D Push and the screen shown in Fi
135. data is created Return to the previous menu 5 Canceling the data output directed to a printer or a plotter SHIFT CONFIG Cancel the printer plotter output during the print plot is output Note This menu is not shown when the screen data is output to the memory card 7 68 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function Initialization Function 7 8 2 DATE Function Allows setting the date and time The date can be set between January 1 1989 and December 31 2088 including Leap Year dates as well The corresponding day of the week will be automatically determined The time of day can always uses a 24 hour display SHIFT CONFIG Input the year Numeric input digits 1989 to 2088 Input the month Numeric input digits 1 to 12 Input the day of the month Numeric input digits from 1 to the last day of the month Input the hour of the day Numeric input digits from 0 to 23 Input the minute Set the initial value of the seconds item to 00 Numeric input digits from 0 to 59 Display the time Select ON to display the time at the upper left of the screen Select OFF to erase the time 7 8 3 Power OFF Function The analyzer makes possible the VO port GPIB and RS 232 hardware block power OFF to enable the continuous operation for batteries SHIFT CONFIG Toggle port hardware block power ON OFF When ON is selected VO port can be
136. data to be saved can be changed e Select a format of data to be saved e Addition and cancellation of the current setup conditions How to change mee the ENT to an item to select with the knob 9 and press to change ON or OFF etc of the item 5 28 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use Initial values Figure 5 26 of the save conditions and items of the selection are as follows Figure 5 26 Initial value of save conditions Data format File type BIN Saves data in the internal code CSV Saves data in Comma Separated Value form Tabular format Note When the CSV format is selected items which can be saved gets fewer Examples are shown in Part 2 A 2 Memory card CSV type Setup data Setup data Trace Waveform data Refer to 5 5 6 2 Input Output of trace data Limit line Limit line Data as is on the screen is saved ID list ID list Data as is on the screen is saved CAUTION 1 Files which were saved in CSV type cannot be recalled 2 When the files which were saved in CSV type are shown SHOW FILE only the file name the size the time and the label are displayed Setup Setup data Setup conditions of display screen OFF Setup data is not saved ON Setup data is saved 5 29 Apr 20 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use Waveform data OFF Waveform data is not saved Waveform
137. demodulation Modulation type AM FM Audio output Speaker and phone jack with volume control adjustable e TV demodulation Demodulation type Video AM positive negative color system NTSC PAL SECAM Sound FM AM Demodulation output Video sound screen speaker and phone jack with volume control adjustable 13 19 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 3 U4341 Specifications 7 input Output le RF input Connector Impedance Preamplifier OFF N type female 500 nominal VSWR x 1 5 100kHz to 2GHz VSWR x 2 0 9kHz to 2 2GHz INPUT gt 100 VSWR x 2 1 10MHz to 2GHz INPUT ATT gt OdB Preamplifier ON 10 MHz reference input Connactor Impedance Input range BNC female rear panel 500 nominal 8dBm to 169 Video output Connector impedance Amplitude 750 termination BNC female rear panel 750 nominal AC coupled Approx 1Vp p 750 termination composite video signal External trigger input Connector Impedance Trigger level female rear panel 10kQ nominal DC coupled TTL level Gate input Connector BNC female rear panel Impedance 10kQ nominal Sweep stop during TTL level low level Sweep continue during TTL level high level Phone output Connector Power output Subminiature monophonic 3 6 mm jack front panel 0
138. device Depending on the plotter model there will be other things that need to be set up besides the address please consult the plotter manual for the necessary details Figure 5 7 shows the set up for use with A4 size paper on listen only mode on H9833 ADVANTEST product DIP switch DIP switch DSW 1 DSW2 JL 2 Z ag 2 d C2 al 2 E 4 Ej 5 fa 6 a 7 i 8 8 m N Q DIP switch location Figure 5 7 Plotter DIP switch settings 3 Plotter output procedure Output is directed to the plotter with the CONFIG function and the COPY function does the actual output D PLOTTER output selection SHIFT CONFIG When the plotter has been selected at the output devices where the screen data 1 sent 5 7 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data PN Plotter configuration window MKR 400 008 SHIFT CONFIG 8 1 PLOTTER REF 0 0 1048 M TYPE _ Pushing p xl PLOTTER 1 wit bring up the screen shown in Figure 5 8 The top of the display shows the currently selected configuration the lower portion of the screen shows item to be modified marker with a symbol Plotter type selection Pushing the 1 PLOTTER causes the selection to cycle through the five possible plotter types in Table 5 1 Note Select plotte
139. eae de aes 11 33 Measure 11 35 Reference Level 11 36 Coupled rsrs r9 arai PR Be e RC 11 38 SI Gee ee ee 11 38 rr 11 41 GPIB Se LULA mE dt EE 11 42 DeftinitiOl udo CI DE ee Hen He Aat ue Ded 11 42 Racal 11 42 cou re 11 43 PIOS doen ee 11 44 uu ute aca Ru RAE DE Joe Uca c cot CAP d a sube 11 44 Peak Sade uuu icr E E E qd ue pose Oke 11 47 uua acute ec OI QR 11 48 Measurement WIndOW 11 49 ENG ck eee he de 11 50 wie pua o 11 50 10 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table of Contents S PC ee eRe Ee 11 51 CONNIE ee EA 11 52 55 opos ud rie a 11 53 Memory Cal de 11 55 e eed EC 11 55 AREE TOT TITIUS 11 56 Tace RT 11 57 TA Channel 11 57 TV DemodulalOl seta cece tle he 11 58
140. ensure the instrument is stable and secure Ensure the instrument is stable Pay special attention not to fall Figure 3 Storage Position The classification of the transient over voltage which exists typically in the main power supply and the pollution degree is defined by 61010 and described below Impulse withstand voltage over voltage category IT defined by TEC60364 4 443 Pollution Degree 2 Types of Power Cable Replace any references to the power cable type according to the following table with the appropriate power cable Lype for your country Plue confieuration Standards Rating color Model number S and length Option number PSE Japan Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law UL United States of America CSA Canada CEE DEMKO VDE KEMA CEBEC OVE FIMKO SEMKO Europe Denmark Norway Germany The Netherlands Belgium Austria Finland Sweden SEV Switzerland SAA Australia New Zealand BS United Kingdom CCC China 125 Vat7A Black 2 m 6 fD 125Vat7A Black 2 6 ft 250 V at6 A Gray 2 m 6 250 V at6A Gray 2 m 6 ft 250 Vat 6 2 m 6 fD 250 V at6A Black 2 m 6 ft 250 at 10 Black 2 m 6 Straight Angled Straight Angled Straight Angled Straight Angled Straight Angled Straight Angled Straight Angled 01402 A01412 A01403 Optio
141. et Output location selection TWO DIGIUIGS caso ix a Output location selection four X dc dusk ede ela wank LACUS SOROR Switching the output location between AUTO and MANUAL 56 ose eS eh ERE IRS ORR eed OES a RR Dae Printer connection diagram Exampie of the analyzer and HP2225AJ COMECON obe obo RACE Printer address selection dip switch Printer connection diagram Example of the analyzer and VP 600 connection RS 232 cable connection diagram for the direct connection RS 232 cable connection diagram for the connection using a serial to paralle CONVOI ee BS ae ee a owas Video printer connection diagram Momon quaeque awe BARE ETS Ree ed Memory card insertion and extraction Memory card initialization menu screen SAVE function MONU 26 624 tears 3E 3 CP ea Deo A ee a Initial value of save conditions RECALL function menu in NORMAL mode RECALL DEFINE MNU uas Connection to personal computer Cable connection diagram Window screen for communication port sett
142. fixed tuned receiver to make measurements in the Time Domain Conversely when the modulation frequency is high the modulation frequency can be determined from the sideband frequencies Finally for small modulation index m less than 0 8 or so m can be determined from the relation between the carrier level and the level of the first sideband frequency 6 22 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL en ee 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements 1 505 0 8 0 44 Ere 8 653 14 93 Carrier wave 5 520 11 79 fm 50 kHz m 5 6 b Carrier amplitude as a fm X m 112 kHz function of the modulation a FM signal spectrum index Display waveform d REN FM signal spectrum c FM signal being slope detected to show the modulation signal frn Figure 6 24 FM signal analysis 6 23 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements 1 Example analysis of an FM signal with low frequency modulation Set the center frequency to the carrier frequency the frequency span to zero and the resolution bandwidth to greater than three times the modulation frequency 4 ee gt e Sec and use the ES step keys set the desired RBW Q Setthe trigger mode to video trigger and the reference level to the peak level aate Mere Ls s e rtis and then use the data knob adjust the trigg
143. from the present setup value 9 3 4 The case when no channel is set in user mode 9 3 9 1 1 Operation and Explanation 9 4 1 Ghannel SQUID OC ae Re e SN E d 9 4 2 User table setup fae tee ete eae eee ahs eee oie 9 5 3 Userchapnel setup ox cake dao es Seed wee ee 9 6 4 Saving in the memory card and calling from the memory card 9 8 92 Channel Table Allocation voor aee pew ew PN wa MA c 9 11 9 3 Frequency Span Setup gt ree DICT ea Rn 9 13 94 Marker Channel ee ee ORC 9 15 95 TY Channel uuu 9 16 9 5 1 TV Standard Mode a a E oce 9 16 C 8 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table of Contents 9 5 2 Channel Table Title by Band 9 17 9 17 Benes dr donee E ates ap GN eee oe eR ee ae 9 17 SE CAIN niet eee under eara s ee es Mave at E E ce 9 18 BS ee ec ee ati ert ee eae ea 9 18 HONEC ATCP 9 19 9 5 3 Channel Table List by Country 9 20 Cl apan 55 E Bea 9 20 CINA sarioa eid a aa ea 9 31 3 FaSt a edt 9 33 4 sco ee ee ree ee A eee EAR 9 36 GI Lee heh ew Sia de
144. i Return to the previous menu el Delete the file selected by the cursor But before the file is actually deleted a confirmation must be made 1 1 1 Proceed with the deletion Return to the previous menu memm m re E TD Dre Select the active drive in memory card Drive A is the one closest to the front panel of the analyzer Change the already created file name 8 characters For details refer to 7 11 Label Function Select the desired character type among 1 2 83 Insert a space blank in the label Erase the entire label Return to the previous menu 7 60 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 6 Save Recall Functions of Memory Card 7 6 3 Recall Function Recall the data saved in the memory card and restore the analyzer state to the condition it had when the save was made FAST and NORMAL modes of the recall function can be switched In FAST mode once the setting conditions are registered to the recall register the setting can be recalled only by specifying the register number 1 In NORMAL mode SAVE Execute the RECALL Function You can find out what a saved file contains See 7 6 1 Memory Card Apply WRITE PROTECT to the selected file See 7 6 1 Save Function When ON is selec
145. in the peak list mode Peak list cannot be displayed because the TV monitor screen ERR 900 NO LOCK DET ERR 901 OVERLOAD Center frequency setting cannot be performed correctly ERR 750 NG PICTURE Overloaded signals were input 31 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Alphabetical index ALPHABETICAL INDEX A AMARKER E 11 1 dB gain compression point A uui aea EU S aes AC DC adapter AC Operation AC power supply cable Accessory ACP POINT ACP GRAPH Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement Adjacent spurious Adjustment of TV monitor screen AM Signal Analysis Analyzer Control Key Functions Analyzer Features and Specifications Annotation ANT C Antenna Factor Correction ATT AUTO Average display noise level Averaging Mode y 7 3 amp d E 839 E E A y E E C E F E E FP p n E u u e 2 om U E E E h 89 F NW C d E E n 4 4 8 9 8 s s a E Bandwidth Accuracy Bandwidth Selectivity Bandwidth Switching Accuracy BASIC Sample Programs Battery Operation Battery Check Function BLANK mode
146. is circumscribed within 8 dBm to 16 dBm Also set to use the external device for the 10 MHz signal source of the analyzer SHIFT CONFIG Press in order and set the 10M REF to EXT See 7 8 5 6 11 1 95 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL gt 6 3 Level Measurement 6 3 Level Measurement The U4941 4941PHS 4341 4342 4342PHS is used at the input impedance of 50 dBm unit and the U4941N 4341N 4342N is of 75 Q unit 6 3 4 Harmonic Distortion Measurement Consider a measurement when the second order harmonic distortion level is small Front panel U4941 Through connection Figure 6 12 Connection of second order harmonic distortion measurement 6 12 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 3 Level Measurement 1 First measure the level of the fundamental frequency component from the signal generator by making the direct connection of Figure 6 12 by passing the high pass filter MKR 399 90 MHz 2 65 dBm 0 0 dBm 1048 ATT 20 dB 400 00 SPAN 10 00 MHz RBW 300 100 SWP 50 ms Figure 6 13 Measuring the fundamental frequency component amplitude cy the following T sec dBm and the fundamental frequency level can be read as the marker level displayed at the top left of the screen Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 3 Level Measurement 2 Next insert a 400 MHz high pass filter H P F i
147. kHz SWP d00 ms 0 10 920 380 40 B0 T0 80 Figure 6 22 AM modulation accuracy dB Figure 6 23 Sideband level 6 21 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 8 4 Modulation Signal Measurements 6 4 2 FM Signal Analysis FM signals are most commonly analyzed to find the carrier frequency fc the frequency of the modulation signal fm frequency shift Afpeak the modulation index m or the occupied bandwidth The modulation index m is given by Afpeak fm It is known that for modulation indexes of 2 4 5 6 8 6 the FM carrier disappears So if the modulation frequency is known by searching for carrier minimums we can determine either the modulation index m or the frequency shift See Figures 6 24 a and b Just from looking at the complex spectrum of an FM signal it is not practical to try to determine what the modulation signal was But is if fairly easy to see the modulation by causing a variation in the system frequency response to the various component frequencies in the FM signal Usually one would use an FM Discriminator circuit to do this sort of demodulation but the spectrum analyzer can do Slope Detection of the modulation by using the slope of the IF BandPass Filter B P F The resulting detected signal can then be displayed Figure 6 24 When the modulation frequency is low by setting the horizontal axis frequency SPAN to zero the spectrum analyzer can be used as a
148. knob 2 to adjust the sweep time to see a full modulation cycle 6 19 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements Use the AM modulation frequency function to measure the AM modulation accuracy MEAS2 The AM modulation SECUN is displayed in the marker area See Figure 6 20 The modulation frequency can be found by using the Amarker to measure the distance between modulation peaks the period The modulation frequency is just the inverse of the period the next peak OFF In this condition i select the the display 65 65 LIN 31 95 4 a 400 00 MHz SPAN 0 9 KHz RAW 3 MAL ANBW 23 MHz SWP 50 ms SPAN E Hz VBEW 3 SWP Figure 6 20 modulation index Figure 6 21 Modulation frequency of an AM signal 6 20 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements 2 Measurement of an AM signal with high frequency modulation and small modulation index D Set the center frequency to the AM carrier frequency and the frequency span for a clear display of the sidebands C Co Co cad 2 Sec SPAN and use the 7 Lo step keys to adjust the span to be greater than twice and less than 10 times the modulation frequency Use the AM modulation frequency function to measure the AM modulation accuracy MEAS2 SPAN 500 0 kHz
149. level display Preamplifier display ON TVTUNE ON OFF TVTUNE OFF 11 58 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker request Function Listener code Remarks Output format Tracking generator ON OFF gt e mm Tracking generator output levei He ma X c hd m OR Tracking Generator n NN Tracking Generator ADJ AUTO MANUAL TGADJA TGADJM m o I m n wm wer Dan Delimiter CR lt gt LF EOLE CR LF LF lt gt mA m Service request gt gt c deed Interruption ON Interruption OFF Status clear Service request mask Decimal corresponding to SRQ bit 11 59 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes Talker reque
150. making level comparisons It can be set between the reference level and the lowest level with the numeric key and units keys Le step keys or the data knob 27 In the OFF setting the display line disappears from the display 6 Display color setup 4 Select any one of display colors from 1 to 4 or five types of display colors defined by user Select the designated color type 1 Initial default mode Display the color using the designated color type 1 Display the color using the designated color type 2 This type is best suited for using outdoors Display the color using the designated color type 3 Display the color using the designated color type 4 optimum color for image at monochrome printer outputting Display the color defined by user For the definition of display color refer to the procedure 7 described later Heturn to the previous menu 7 13 Feb 25 98 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys 7 Definition of display color User can define the display color appropriately Select the parameter to be changed see Table 7 3 and control the color with 3 original colors RGB Press the keys in order the color definition window screen see Figure 7 4 is displayed f D JEM CORR UN MES C amm a
151. memory cards meeting the JEIDA Ver 4 1 and the PCMCIA Release 2 0 specifications 1 1 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 1 1 Qutline of the Analyzer Feature list D Small in size and mass Dimensions Approx 148 height X 291 width X 330 depth mm Mass Approx 6 8 kg Three power supply sources Power supply choices are battery AC DC Adapter or an external DC supply The battery pack is capable of one and a half hours of continuous operation Note that a PROPAC14 battery is used in full charge state and normal temperature and the 1 port block power of the analyzer is turned OFF and the intensity is minimum state 6 inch color LCD display allowing a 100 dB scale display By adopting a 6 color LCD for the display unit color displays are possible Further for the first time in this class of instruments a full 100 dB scale can be presented in a single display Preamplifier The preamplifier which is equipped with the gain of 20dB or more in the frequency range of 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz The U4944 series can be measured at high sensibility of 130 dBm or more RBW 1 kHz VBW 10 Hz ATT 0 dB Slots for two IC Memory Cards Up to 2 memory cards can be used simultaneously to hold data etc IC memory cards were originally proposed by memory manufacturers but standardization is being advanced by the Japan Electronic Industry Development Association and the Electronics Industry Association in the US Fo
152. o C 9 40 Oy KORG perian UPPER 9 41 7 ene abb ade I eue See as 9 43 8G MAlAVSIA 9 43 _ 9 43 IO WES EULODB 9 49 10 TRACKING GENERATOR FUNCTION Standard equipment 24349 5 Re ee 10 1 10 1 Usage of Tracking Generator 10 1 10 2 How to Normalize a Frequency Characteristic with Reference to a DISP LNG nudus Eco a ee SHEER UR HEU orat dt 10 3 10 3 Measurement Example of a Filters Damping Property 10 5 1 Normalizing the Measurement System 10 5 2 Starting Measurement 10 7 10 4 Handling Precautions of Tracking Generator 10 12 1 DYNAMIC bebe 10 12 2 Time Response du x Ld id 10 12 3 Overvoltage Protection of TG OUTPUT Connector 10 13 4 Output Level Overshooting at TG Turns on 10 13 10 5 Function Description ERROR CE a 10 14 TOM CAINS ELTE es 11 1 tt Ovenew OMN GPIB quus cacao 11 1 C 9 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table of Contents GPIB SDecIDICallOriS ce ue are ORE ak be ee en 1
153. of CS in Japan 2 2 2 9 25 9 14 Channel table of CS in Japan V SOUND 9 25 9 15 Channel table of CS in Japan 9 26 9 16 Channel table of CS in Japan 9 27 9 17 Channel table of CS in Japan H TV 9 27 9 18 Channel table of CS in Japan SCC 9 28 9 19 Channel table of CS in Japan SCC V TYPE2 9 28 9 20 Channel table of CS in Japan SCC V TV 9 29 9 21 Channel table of CS in Japan SCC 1 9 29 9 22 Channel table of CS in Japan SCC H TYPE2 9 30 9 23 Channel table of VAF in China iud xk med Ree 9 31 9 24 Channel table of UHF in ER Si oS Oe he 9 31 9 25 Channel table of east Europe 9 33 9 26 Channel table of UHF in east Europe 9 33 9 27 Channel table of in east Europe 9 35 9 28 Channel table of VHF France 9 36 9 29 Channel table of UHF in France 9 36 9 30 Channel table of CATV CCETT in France 9 38 9 31 Channel table
154. of VHF China China East Europe East Europe France France Italy Italy Japan Japan Singapore Singapore i Malaysia U S A West Europe 2 UHF China China East Europe East Europe France France Japan Japan U S A U S A West Europe West Europe Note Countries corresponding to table 1 Bulgaria Czechoslovakia Hungary Poland Rumania and old Soviet Union Countries corresponding to table 2 Austria Denmark old East Germany Finland Greece Holland Spain Sweden Switzerland and old West Germany 9 17 Apr 1 96 3 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table Table 9 5 Channel table of CATV East Europe France West Europe East Europe France CCETT France TELECOM Japan Korea U S A West Europe Note Countries corresponding to table 1 BS Bulgaria Czechoslovakia Hungary Poland Rumania and old Soviet Union Countries corresponding to table 2 Austria Denmark old East Germany Finland Greece Holland Spain Sweden Switzerland and old West Germany Table 9 6 Channel table of BS 9 18 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table CS Table 9 7 Channe table of CS JCSAT V TYPE1 V1 For JCSAT communication local oscillation 11 3 GHz vertically polarized waves For JCSAT communication local oscillation 10 873 GHz vertically p
155. poll the status register Table 11 4 Service ON OFF codes Enables the SHQ function Disables the SRQ function This is the default setting Clears the status register Table 11 5 Status did bit prune Turns ON when UNCAL occurs Turns ON when calibration is complete Turns ON when a sweep is complete Turns ON when the specified number of averagings is complete Turns ON when plot output is complete Turns ON when an error is found in the GPIB code or a mode error occurs SYNTAX ERR Turns ON when bits 0 through 5 or 7 when a service request is transmitted S0 Table 11 5 lists the assignments of the bits in the status register When any of the following conditions occurs the corresponding status bit turns ON and the controller can determine the analyzer s status by polling the status register 11 26 Apr 1 96 _ FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 7 Service Request SRQ HP200 and 300 series programming examples GPIB address 1 Example HP 15 Read the average end 10 OUTPUT 701 S2 20 OUTPUT 701 AG 30GZ 30 SPOLL 701 40 IF BIT S 3 1 THEN 30 50 DISP AVG END 60 END 10 OUTPUT 701 SI 20 OUTPUT 701 S2 30 OUTPUT 701 SR 40 S SPOLL 701 50 IF BIT S 2 1 THEN 40 60 PRINT SWEEP END 70 GOTO 20 80 END SRQ is not enabled oma a p me emer ves cree ee M Ay lh eT er cee ll
156. same as SWP in CPL menu E Switches display non display of the display line function is the same as DSP LINE ON OFF of MENU key Displaying the display line the signals under the level are not dis played in the list E temas amp amp bEATETUNPSApIU 5 6 Apr 1 96 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 5 2 Soft menu configuration zs UP Sets measurement conditions and display conditions for trigger ID set ting and ID list creation Method of SETUP operating eu ium due Corpus uu 227222 2 Museu RA EE 925 Figure 5 5 List setup menu TRIGGER ID Decides valid invalid of the code set as a trigger condition Combination of Ci CS ID PS ID and up down can be specified SELECT Selects ON OFF and UP DOWN Ca eat Selects Cl CS PS or UW CAUTION When SYNC CS ID is selected in trigger mode this mode is set to down i CS When SYNC CS ID is released the previous setting is restored Apr 1 96 5 7 CS ID Align Sort Cont Meas Disp CRC ERR Disp ID 5 8 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION CS ID code 42 bits is displayed with hexadecimal 11 digits Then selects the display of left aligned or right aligned SELECT asee Selects LEFT RIGHT Selects a way of ID list display order The selected items are time order and level order When outputting GPIB SAVE to the outside it is output with the con
157. screen are not clearly visible 12 1 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 12 1 in Case a Problem Like This Should Occur cont d Analyzer is in GPIB Remote End any GPIB control programs Control mode that may be running and return to local control with the LCL key Put a memory card conforming to the JEIDA Spec Ver 4 or 4 1 into one of the two drive slots Memory card has WRITE Set the WRITE PROTECT to be PROTECT ON u OFF Address specification error Change the address of the printer or plotter to make it agree with the address set in the hard copy configuration Check the GPIB cable routing and connections for bad contact Check the GPIB cable routing and connections for bad contact Check over the use of GPIB commands in the program response to key pushes Memory Card is not inserted correctly SAVE or RECALL does not work Data is not being stored in the memory card PRINTER or PLOTTER doesn t work GPIB cable 1 not connected properly GPIB cable is not connected properly Remote control doesn t work GPIB operation bad Improper GPIB in the control 12 2 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 1 U4941 4941PHS Specifications 13 SPECIFICATIONS 13 1 U4941 4941PHS Specifications 1 Frequency Frequency range 9 k
158. showing the relative difference between the frequency and level of the normal marker and the Amarker 7 25 Apr 1 96 e oe XL o 1 1 1 1 1 94 MKR Denn ON OFE 1 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 3 Marker Section Functions Data input for the frequency difference between the two markers can be made with the numeric key the v step keys and the data knob Doing so the Amarker becomes fixed and the normal marker moves away from it by the specified frequency difference Active maker can be moved XX Fixed maker location is locked Active marker and fixed marker Store the current Amarker frequency and level and fix the marker at that position on the screen Then even if the center frequency or reference level is changed the next time this function is turned on the stored marker data will be displayed as reference data for the frequency and level See Figure 7 11 Select ON to display the reciprocal of the Amarker data This function is useful for finding the modulation frequency of a signal being viewed in zero span mode When vertical axis represents linear scale show the voltage comparison in the active marker level depending on the Amarker level
159. shows what should be shipped with your analyzer If anything has been damaged or if something is missing please contact the sales and support Offices Addresses and telephone numbers are listed at the end of this manual m 2 1 Standard accessories Part name Model TEM Remarks Ud941N il4341 U4341N U4342N 4841PHS 4342PHS Power supply cable Power fuse N BNC conversion adapter C15 type conversion adapter NC BNC type BA A165 conversion adapter Memory card 09507 64k byte SRAM U4941 4941PHS U4341 U4342 4342PHS only 04941 U4341N U4342N only Carrying belt Operation manual or English this manual Japanese or English Quick guide Ju4941SERIES Q Note When ordering additional accessories please be sure to specify the Model ADVANTEST provides the power cables for each country See yellow page of Table of Power Options at this manual 2 1 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 22 Operating Environmental Conditions 2 2 Operating Environmental Conditions Since this analyzer was designed for use in outdoor settings Even so if it is used in situations that are outside the limits indicated below then you may not be able to obtain completely satisfactory performance And if it is used in a really unreasonable environment the operational lifetime of t
160. ten keys and the function keys Use numeric keys for 0 to 9 of hexadecimal The function keys are assigned to as follows C C9 C 288 ID LIST ID TRG amp SET JE A Enter Keys Press one of them 5 00860 o0 CS ID Align in the case of RIGHT C3C2C2CoC2 Gas ade Gi Tospecify a signal from the measurement screen with ID marker and to trigger ID code of the signal Display marker with BR fore Move the cursor with v and specify the signal The signal ID code is displayed as shown in the figure MKR ID code of the marker is set to ID trigger wif IDTRG 1 96 4 5 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION s u OT re 6 Return to PHS menu screen 6 RETURN 7 Select ID in the trigger selection mode PHS 2l EA CAUTION When the specified base station triggers Sync CS ID trigger can be used as well Sync CS ID trigger is kept on at the base station cycle even if trigger cannot be detected because of the specified base station signal level down or interference 4 6 Apr 1 96 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 4 3 To measure burst error rate of the specified base station 1 Setfrequency or channel AM Hz CH Default Hz 2 Select ON pre amp according to the input level o ON OFF Default OFF 3 Input the specified base station PHS T ID LIST OL m a
161. the IF AMP calibration An error was detected in the RBW SWITCH calibration 22 LINEAR ERR 104 An error was detected in the LOG LINEARITY calibration ERR 105 MAG An error was detected in the MAG SWITCH calibration ERR 106 GAIN 110 An error was detected in the TOTAL GAIN calibration FREQ CORR cannot be switched ON because FREQ CORR data broken invalid CORR DAT Compensation data is not guaranteed because the total of frequency compensation value frequency corr antenna corr is out of limits 7div ERR 111 CORR DAT The automatic adjustment of TG ADJ cannot be executed because TG output signal is not detected 120 ERR 121 TG ADJ MKR CF function cannot be executed because the zero span ERR 200 SPAN 0 3 mode is selected ERR 201 NG SPAN O AMKR SPAN function cannot be executed because the zero span mode is selected ERR 202 SPAN 0 MKR CF STEP function cannot be executed because the zero span mode is selected ERR 203 NG SPAN 0 gt STEP function cannot be executed because the zero span mode is selected ERR 204 NG SPAN 0 AMKR CF function cannot be executed because the zero span mode is selected 205 NG SPAN 0 FIXEDAMKR function cannot be executed because the zero span mode is selected TG OUTPUT An error occurs in the automatic ad
162. the data dBm of all points displayed into the antilogarithm of the power dimension and calculates the average Measures the peak power Moves the marker to the peak and calculates the power Selects the position of displaying the measurement result UP LOW e RETURN Returns to the previous menu 7 5 User Defined Functions Figure 7 31 Location of the user defined key on the front panel 7 49 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 5 User Defined Functions This function allows the user to modify the functions menu items that appear on any of the softkey menus or to define the User softkey menu The number of key pushes to achieve frequent tasks can be greatly reduced by moving menu selections to higher priority locations or by assigning them to one of the user defined softkeys SHIFT DEFINE Pressing brings up the following display Center D Soft grou 3SF1 Step g SF Frequen oF 43 SF 5 SFB Center Frequency XX gt 1 Center 2 CF Step 3 Frequen Q Soft member ju RUE Stop Pf 4 Full i 9 Lero SP Last 5 Figure 7 32 User defined display Soft group The top half of the screen displays the current softkey menu assignments for the function keys SF1 to SF6 Q Soft member The bottom half of the screen presents the member functions from the softkey menus that can be reassigned 1 Menu explanation SHI
163. the frequency span is the AUTO value of VBW is the 1 kHz that appears across from RBW 3kHz in the table 7 7 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys 7 1 6 Menu Key The key is used to set up the following TRIGGER Trigger mode TRACE DET Trace detector mode SWEEP MODE Sweep mode SOUND Sound monitor mode DSPLINE Display line setting COLOR Display color setting 1 Trigger mode setup Display the trigger mode menu J a wj WONG n 4 Enable an internal free running sweep mode Initial state ODE Calls up the TV trigger submenu Trigger on the vertical synchronous signal of a TV video signal Trigger on the horizontal synchronous signal of a TV video signal The line number at which the trigger occurs can be adjusted with the numeric key and units keys the vA step keys or the data knob 5 Select the NTSC method as TV signals Initial setting Select the PAL amp SECAM method as TV signals ER a Select the TV signal video modulation polarity Return to the main trigger mode menu ER n asa um amm m um oc m m m m m m m m O NS 7 8 Apr 1 96 vu Se Mono 5 p thes On n RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANU
164. the printer before you begin to use it 5 16 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data Printer address Set the printer GPIB address via its rear panel dip switches sure to set the corresponding talk listen only mode in the analyzer or the same address in both the dip switches and the analyzer configuration menu Printer Rear Panel HP2225AJ Lith M eI DIP switch layout enlarged i Set to LISTEN ONLY when the U4941 is in TALK ONLY m mimus SRQ EN prese ALWAYS 1 A2 At ii Set to the address 01 when the output device address is specified ADRS 01 mode SRQ EN Md ALWAYS manuna AS 4 A3 2 Al Figure 5 20 Printer address selection dip switch 5 17 Apr 20 97 ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data 2 RS 232 output D Connection to the ESC P capable printer To print out the data in the ESC P Epson Standard Code for Printer form connect the _ analyzer to a printer by using an RS 232 connector Printers that can be connected to the analyzer are shown in Table 5 5 Connect the printer as shown in Figure 5 20a If the printer does not have RS 232 connector use a commercial serial to parallel converter Table 5 5 List of printers that can be used
165. the range from 105dBuV to 740B V The input impedance of U4342 4342PHS is 500 The input impedance of U4342N is 750 1 5 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 1 2 Equipment Configuration 1 2 Equipment Configuration 1 2 1 Standard Configuration The standard configuration for the analyzer is shown in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Standard configuration Specification Mainframe of 4941 U4941PHS U4941N U4341 U4341N 04342 U4342PHS or U4342N RF Field Analyzer Standard Refer to Table 2 1 1 2 2 Accessory and Peripheral Equipment Option Table 1 2 Accessory and peripheral equipment IC card 2M bytes Battery Charger Corresponds to JEIDA IC Memory Card Guideline Ver 4 1 Manufacturer Anton Bauer POWER CHARGER Note Refer to ADVANTEST catalogue for 750 500 conversion adapter and conversion connector eic 1 6 Jun 10 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 2 1 Checking Accessories 2 BEFORE USING THE FIRST TIME This chapter covers the original steps in setting up the analyzer and powering it up Necessary precautions are also pointed out Please read it before you use the analyzer the first time 2 1 Checking Accessories D Check that there is no external damage apparent sure that all of the standard accessories and the proper quantities are there Table 2 1
166. the reference level When the unit is volt or watt it is displayed 7 41a Mar 1 97 Number of peaks ae ww eH ee eee eee eww ewww See ws ree ee eee eee eee eee eee ee a 4a a ala Va ala Va rata state RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section Q The display of dB div is changed as follows a 10dB div 20dB div b 5dB div gt 10dB div 2dB div gt 4dB div d 1dB div 2dB div The setting range of PEAK A Y div is changed as follows 0 1 to 10 0 0 05 to 5 0 1 When this key is pressed the single sweep is executed After the sweep is completed the number of peaks detected and the result of the sweep are displayed in a list Then the peak list is set to the active condition Refer to Figure 7 25b The peak list can be moved by using the step key and the data knob 2048 Luny 23 0 0 CF 80 0 MHz 100 0 MHz BW 1 UI MES Active cursor 3 CE lt Figure 7 25b Single Sweep Note When you set other data entry state the active cursor disappears If you want to display the active cursor again execute the single sweep or press the PEAK LIST key 7 A1b Mar 1 97 BILIST SORT 511 i 1 i 1 1 F I 1 i
167. time domain measurements but with a spectrum analyzer accuses of 0 02 are possible When the modulation index is above 1096 best accuracy can be obtained by making the measurement with LINEAR scaling For modulation indexes below 10 better measurement accuracy can be achieved by selecting LOG scales The analyzer is newly added an AM modulation accuracy function Using this new function an easy operation can be made to obtain an AM modulation accuracy Emax Emin bass x 100 m 5 100 mE b AM signal seen in frequency domain Emax a AM signal seen in time domain Figure 6 19 AM signal measurement 6 18 Apr 1 96 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL E 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements 1 Measurement of an AM signal with low frequency modulation and large modulation accuracy index m D Display the signal to be measured 400 MHz carrier freq and set its peak level to the reference level Sec dBm Put the horizontal axis into the time domain mode Zero span and the vertical axis LINEAR mode SPAN F 4 and use the 4 La keys to adjust the RBW 0 Move the reference level to the peak level of the signal and use the data knob E to adjust the reference to the signal peak Set the Trigger mode to Video Trigger and the sweep time to an appropriate value step keys and the data
168. to 2 2GHz INPUT ATT z 10dB VSWR lt 2 1 10MHz to 2GHz INPUT ATT gt 0 female rear panel 500 nominal 8dBm to 16dBm BNC female rear panel 750 nominal AC coupled Approx 1Vp p 750 terminator composite video signal BNC female rear panel 10kQ nominal DC coupled TTL level BNC female rear panel 10k nominal during TTL level low level during TTL level high level Subminiature monophonic jack front panel 0 2 watt max 80 nominal 13 35 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 5 U4342 4342PHS Specifications cont d GPIB Plotter IEEE 488 bus connector Supports R9833 7470 HP7475A HP7440A HP75504A 682 XA Printer HP2225AJ e RS 232 D SUB 9 pin rear panel Printer BJ 10 VP 600 MJ400 HP505J e Power input Battery mounter adapted Advantest AC DC adapter Model A08364 Automatically selections between 100VAC and 200VAC Antonbauer Inc PROPAC14 battery nominal 60WH 8 Tracking Generator Frequency range e Output level Accuracy output level Frequency characteristic 100kHz to 2 2GHz at 30MHz 10dBm 20 to 30 0 to 31dBm lt 0 7dB 100kHz to 1GHz lt 1 5dB 100kHz to 2 2GHz 1dB 100kHz to 1GHz 2dB 100 2 to 2 2GHz at 10dBm reference e TG leakage Output impedance in 1dB steps 0 5dB
169. to 72 00 72 00 to 78 00 76 00 to 82 00 82 00 to 88 00 90 00 to 96 00 96 00 to 102 00 102 00 to 108 00 108 00 to 114 00 114 00 to 120 00 120 00 to 126 00 126 00 to 132 00 132 00 to 138 00 138 00 to 144 00 144 00 to 150 00 150 00 to 156 00 156 00 to 162 00 162 00 to 168 00 168 00 to 174 00 174 00 to 180 00 180 00 to 186 00 186 00 to 192 00 192 00 to 198 00 198 00 to 204 00 204 00 to 210 00 210 00 to 216 00 216 00 to 222 00 222 00 to 228 00 228 00 to 234 00 234 00 to 240 00 240 00 to 246 00 246 00 to 252 00 252 00 to 258 00 258 00 to 264 00 9 46 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Tabie cont d channel MHz MHz MHz 264 00 to 270 00 269 75 270 00 to 276 00 276 00 to 282 00 282 00 to 288 00 288 00 to 294 00 294 00 to 300 00 300 00 to 306 00 306 00 to 312 00 312 00 to 318 00 318 00 to 324 00 324 00 to 330 00 330 00 to 336 00 336 00 to 342 00 342 00 to 348 00 848 00 to 354 00 354 00 to 360 00 360 00 to 366 00 366 00 to 372 00 372 00 to 378 00 378 00 to 384 00 384 00 to 390 00 390 00 to 396 00 396 00 to 402 00 402 00 to 408 00 408 00 to 414 00 414 00 to 420 00 420 00 to 426 00 426 00 to 432 00 432 00 to 438 00 438 00 to 444 00 9 47 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Tabie cont d Analyzer 5 Frequency range Picture frequency Sound fre
170. to remove the fundamental frequency from the input signal Supposing that the fundamental could have been removed the maximum input sensibility can be used to measure the signal source distortion since only the distortion level of the signal source is input But even in that case it is necessary to consider the effects of the residual response on the measurement In order to obtain the largest dynamic range in normal signal analysis it is necessary to set the reference level to be at the maximum peak level of the input signal 6 9 Jun 10 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 2 Frequency Measurement 6 2 Frequency Measurement There are two methods for making a frequency measurement the normal marker and the frequency counter mode method In this section the frequency measurement is performed when the signal source is approximately 30 MHz 6 2 1 Normal Marker Frequency Measurement Pressing the following keys B NORMAL M MARKER Ce Co _ dBm af Sec sew 9C o Je gt gives a result such as Figure 6 10 The marker frequency is displayed at the top 40 00 MHz left of the screen and that is our measurement 30 00 5 RBW 100 kHz VBW 100 kHz SWP 50 ms result Figure 6 10 Normal marker 6 10 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 2 Frequency Measurement 6 2 2 Marker Frequency Counter Mode Frequency Measurement Make marker frequency m
171. ud quede epis o A 7 F 6 Feb 9 99 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL List of Tables LIST OF TABLES No Title Page 1 1 Standard configuration 1 6 1 2 Accessory and peripheral equipment n n n n 1 6 2 1 Sandar acCcBSSOlIBS 2 1 2 2 AC power requirements 2 6 2 3 Analyzer DC power requirements 2 B 5 1 List of plotters that can be used with the analyzer 5 6 5 2 Plot 5 9 5 3 Table dSld bea a pork Sales KORE RE 5 9 5 4 Plotter pen assignments ELSE eee eas 5 15 5 5 List of printers that can be used with the analyzer ESC P language 5 18 5 6 Memory card specifications 09507 409508 09509 5 35 5 7 Signal names of serial input output interfaces 5 40 5 8 Conirol codes Tor status DVIO 2 34 Vct E x RC Nn 5 56 5 9 Staus byte Monna aa s daos RIGEN EE dedo oed ao dioit Ro a E Y e 5 56 5 10 Control codes for status byte Va 5 59 6 1 Maximum input level a E A 5 4 5 2 Average display noise level 6 5 6 3 1 dB gain compression Frequency 10 MHz or more 6 6
172. used When OFF is selected I O port cannot be used Return to the previous menu CAUTION Using the power OFF function the function that is set to OFF cannot be used To use it again set the function to ON 7 59 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function initialization Function 7 8 4 RS 232 Interface Communication Port Setup The analyzer can be remotely controlled remote control function by an RS 232 interface See 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function for more information about the connection method of the analyzer and the remote control function SHIFT CONFIG Press the keys in the left order The window screen for the communication port setup is displayed and each parameter setup can be conducted Setup the transfer speed baud rate Default value 9600 bps Setup the data length Default value 7 bits Setup the stop bit length Default value 1 bit Setup the parity bit type Default value Non Specify the data flow control method Default value Hard wired handshake Display the following menu Setup the interval time of each character space when the analyzer sends data Default value 0 msec Set the communication port to be an open state Initial state Set the communication port to be a close state Initial state 7 70 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function initialization Function
173. will be found in the indicated sections eee Lights when memory card is in Lights when memory card Aisinuse memory ee Ai is in use Drive ilii Lights when memory card B is in use ES Push button to eject memory card B Memory is inserted here Memory card B is inserted here Drive eject Push button to eject memory card A CAUTION DO NOT PRESS THE EJECT BUTTON WHILE THE DRIVE LAMP IS RED LIGHT Knob to control the light for display by turning 7 1 6 with it pushed forward Knob to control the sound level from the AM FM detector with it pulled When not changing volume and intensity use the knob with it inserted Ear phone connector For use with 80 headset ear phone for the AM FM detector Option list Options numbers are listed here 8 Volume and Intensity 3 7 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 1 U4941 series CAUTION INSIDE ENTRY BY TRAINED SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING NEVER USE THE UNSPECIFIED POWER SUPPLY OR BATTERY BEFORE CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING POWER PACK MAKE SURE THAT THE INSTRUMENT POWER IS TURNED OFF Battery or AC DC Releases the catch on the battery or AC DC 2 4 adapter detachment adapter so that it can be removed from the lever adapter 3 8 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPER
174. 0 0110 Right aligned 90 2 4 6 8 1 5 1 Setfrequency or channel UNIT When left aligned Hz CH Default Hz LSB is0 4 8 C When right aligned MSB is 0 1 2 3 2 Select ON pre amp according to the input level MEAS1 C HI SENS ON OFF Default OFF 3 Enter into PHS mode PHS 4 Setect an input format of the specified base station and a list display format o LIST SETUP Q Trigger ID OFF A PS OFF UW DOWN Trigger ID Move the cursor with Cont Meas Disp CRC ERR Disp ID 1 ID Filter W Move it with Select it with SELECT 1 96 4 3 5 DEMODULATION FUNCTION Select an input and a display format 2 CS IDAlign LEFT or RIGHT Sort TIME LEVEL Cont Meas Onor OFF Disp ERR On or OFF Disp ID OFF ID Filter gt OFF UW UP or DOWN or UP amp DOWN Hefer to page 5 7 for details Return to PHS menu screen with 6 RETURN 5 Input the specified base station number PHS ID LIST There are 3 ways to input it select ID from the measured results list display in the list to trigger Move the cursor to a base station to specify with v Cursor line LIST Pressing 1 ERG sets ID shown in the cursor line to trigger 4 4 Apr 1 96 ips E DEMODULATION FUNCTION To input with the
175. 0 0 11 17 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 5 Query Syntax Talker Example PC 12 Execute 6 dB down then output the frequency and level more than one 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 8 HDO Sets the header OFF 30 8 CF30MZ SP20MZ Sets the center frequency and the frequency span 40 PRINT 38 TS PS MKBW6DB XDB After one sweep executes peak search and 6 dB down 50 PRINT 98 MFL Reads the marker frequency and level at a time 60 INPUT G8 MF ML 70 PRINT MARKER FREQ MF MARKER LEVEL 80 END Result MARKER FREQ 400000 LEVEL 1 16 Example PC 13 Execute OBW and output the operation results 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 8 HDO Sets the header OFF 30 8 OBW Executes OBW 40 PRINT 8 OBW Percentage occupied band width carrier frequency 50 INPUT 28 PER OBW FC 60 PRINT OBW OBW Fe FC 70 END Result OBW 9996 171000 Fc 2 503E 07 Example PC 14 Output the level of the maximum peak the second and third peaks of the signal JG ff a o o ee id ISET IFC ISET REN PRINT 8 HDO ML Sets the header OFF PRINT 8 PS INPUT 98 A Reads the peak level PRINT 8 NXP INPUT 8 B Reads the second pea
176. 0 00 560 00 to 566 00 566 00 to 572 00 572 00 to 578 00 578 00 to 584 00 584 00 to 590 00 590 00 to 596 00 596 00 to 602 00 602 00 to 608 00 608 00 to 614 00 614 00 to 620 00 620 00 to 625 00 626 00 to 632 00 632 00 to 638 00 638 00 to 644 00 644 00 to 650 00 650 00 to 656 00 656 00 to 662 00 662 00 to 668 00 668 00 to 674 00 674 00 to 680 00 680 00 to 686 00 686 00 to 692 00 9 44 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table cont d Analyzer s Channel range Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz 692 00 to 698 00 698 00 to 704 00 704 00 to 710 00 710 00 to 716 00 716 00 to 722 00 722 00 to 728 00 728 00 to 734 00 734 00 to 740 00 740 00 to 746 00 746 00 to 752 00 752 00 to 758 00 758 00 to 764 00 764 00 to 770 00 770 00 to 776 00 776 00 to 782 00 782 00 to 788 00 788 00 to 794 00 794 00 to 800 00 800 00 to 806 00 806 00 to 812 00 812 00 to 818 00 818 00 to 824 00 824 00 to 830 00 830 00 to 836 00 836 00 to 842 00 842 00 to 848 00 848 00 to 854 00 854 00 to 860 00 860 00 to 866 00 866 00 to 872 00 872 00 to 878 00 878 00 to 884 00 884 00 to 890 00 9 45 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table Table 9 38 Ghani table of CATV in U S A Analyzer s Channel cu range Picture frequency Sound frequency _ channel MHz MHz MHz 54 00 to 60 00 60 00 to 66 00 66 00
177. 0 dB VSWR x 2 1 10 MHz to 2 GHz INPUT 20 dB Preamplifier ON 10 MHz reference input Connector impedance Input range BNC female rear panel 500 nominal 8 to 16 dBm Video output Connector impedance Amplitude 750 termination BNC female rear panel 750 nominal AC coupled Approx 1Vp p 750 termination composite video signal External trigger input Connector Impedance Trigger level BNC female rear panel 10 nominal DC coupled TTL level je Gate input Connector BNC female rear panel Impedance 10 nominal Sweep stop during TTL level low level Sweep continue during TTL level high level Phone output Connector Power output Subminiature monophonic 3 6 mm jack front panel 0 2 watt max 80 nominal IEEE 488 bus connector Supports R9833 HP7470A HP7475A HP7440A 7550 682 XA HP2225AJ e GPIB Plotter Printer e RS 232 Printer D SUB 9 pin rear panel BJ 10 VP 600 MJ400 HP505J 13 5 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 1 U4941 4941PHS Specifications cont d e Power input Battery mounter adapted Advantest AC DC adapter Model 08364 Automatically selections between 100 VAC and 200 VAC Antonbauer Inc PROPAC14 battery nominal 60WH 8 General specifications
178. 0 to 223 00 223 00 to 230 00 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E 6 7 G 8 H 9 H1 10 H2 9 40 Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table 6 Korea CATV Table 9 33 Channel table of CATV in Korea Analyzer s 5 Frequency range Picture mem Sound Peaieney channel MHz MHz 54 00 to 60 00 60 00 to 66 00 66 00 to 72 00 76 00 to 82 00 82 00 to 88 00 120 00 to 126 00 126 00 to 132 00 132 00 to 138 00 138 00 to 144 00 144 00 to 150 00 150 00 to 156 00 156 00 to 162 00 162 00 to 168 00 168 00 to 174 00 174 00 to 180 00 180 00 to 186 00 186 00 to 192 00 192 00 to 198 00 198 00 to 204 00 204 00 to 210 00 210 00 to 216 00 216 00 to 222 00 222 00 to 228 00 228 00 to 234 00 234 00 to 240 00 240 00 to 246 00 246 00 to 252 00 252 00 to 258 00 258 00 to 264 00 264 00 to 270 00 270 00 to 276 00 276 00 to 282 00 282 00 to 288 00 288 00 to 294 00 294 00 to 300 00 300 00 to 306 00 306 00 to 312 00 9 41 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table cont d Analyzer s Frequency range Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz MHz 39 312 00 to 318 00 318 00 to 324 00 324 00 to 330 00 330 00 to 336 00 336 00 to 342 00 342 00 to 348 00 348 00 to 354 00 354 00 to 360 00 360 00 to 366 00 366 00 to 372 00 372 00 to 378 00 378 00 to 384 00 384 00 to 390 00 390 00 to 396 00 396 00 to 402 00 402 00
179. 00 to 216 00 216 00 to 222 00 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 X 7 8 8 9 9 UHF Table 9 9 Channel table of 470 00 10 476 00 476 00 to 482 00 482 00 to 488 00 488 00 494 00 494 00 10 500 00 500 00 to 506 00 506 00 10 512 00 512 00 to 518 00 518 00 to 524 00 524 00 to 530 00 530 00 to 536 00 536 00 to 542 00 542 00 to 548 00 9 20 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table cont d Pictu re frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz MHz 548 00 to 554 00 554 00 to 560 00 560 00 to 566 00 566 00 to 572 00 572 00 to 578 00 578 00 to 584 00 584 00 to 590 00 590 00 to 596 00 596 00 to 602 00 602 00 to 608 00 608 00 to 614 00 614 00 to 620 00 620 00 to 626 00 626 00 to 632 00 632 00 to 638 00 638 00 to 644 00 644 00 to 650 00 650 00 to 656 00 656 00 to 662 00 662 00 to 668 00 668 00 to 674 00 674 00 to 680 00 680 00 to 686 00 686 00 to 692 00 692 00 to 698 00 698 00 to 704 00 704 00 to 710 00 710 00 to 716 00 716 00 to 722 00 722 00 to 728 00 728 00 to 734 00 734 00 to 740 00 740 00 to 746 00 746 00 to 752 00 752 00 to 758 00 758 00 to 764 00 764 00 to 770 00 9 21 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table Table 9 10 Channel table of CATV in Japan Analyzer S Channel Frequency range Picture frequency Sound frequency
180. 098 30dBm input distortion INPUT OdB frequency gt 10MHz Residual response Preamplifier OFF lt 100dBm INPUT 00 INPUT 500 terminated frequency gt 1MHz Preamplifier ON lt 115dBm INPUT ATT 0dB INPUT 500 terminated frequency gt 1 2 13 17 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 3 U4341 Specifications 4 Amplitude accuracy Frequency response Preamplifier OFF lt 1 0dB 100kHz to 2GHz lt 2 0dB 9kHz to 2 2GHz INPUT ATT 10dB 20 to 30 referenced to 30MHz after self calibration Preamplifier ON lt 1 0dB 100kHz to 2GHz lt 2 0dB 9kHz to 2 2GHz INPUT OdB 20 to 30 C referenced to 30MHz after self calibration Calibration signal accuracy 20dBm 0 3dB IF gain error lt 0 5dB after self calibration Scale fidelity accuracy after self calibration 5dB 90dB LOG OdB 10dB 2 1 LIN of reference level input attenuator 1 0dB 100kHz to 2GHz 20 to 50 dB settings referenced 1 5dB 9kHz to 2 2GHz to 10 dB Resolution bandwidth switching lt 1 0dB at reference bandwidth 3MHz error after self calibration 5 Sweep 50ms to 1000s and manual sweep 4 5ms to 1000s ZERO SPAN lt 5 FREE RUN SINGLE VIDEO EXT TV e Sweep time Accuracy e Trigger mode 13 18 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 3 U4341 Specifications 6 Demodulation Spectrum
181. 1 CH UNIT Hz CHUNFH UNIT CH CHUNCH AUTO SCAN ATSCAN 6 2 Apr 1 96 ID LIST SETUP TRIGGER ID CS PS CS amp PS Cl amp CS Cl amp PS Cl amp CS amp PS UW Disp CRC ERR Disp ID Filter ID LIST SETUP DEFAULT _ Apr 1 96 TICS TIPS TICSPS TICICS 5 IDLEFT IDRIGHT IDTIME IDLVL IDCRC ON IDCRC OFF IDI ON IDI OFF IDFLTR ON IDFLTR OFF IDFLCI IDFLCS IDFLPS IDUP IDDN IDUPDN TRIDUW IDALIGN IDSORT IDCRC IDI IDFLTR IDFLCI IDFLCS IDFLPS IDFLBIN IDFLHEX IDUW PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION CS amp PS CI amp CS CI amp PS CI amp CS amp PS UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT 0 TIME 1 LEVEL ON OFF ON OFF String String string 0 UP 1 DOWN 2 UP amp DOWN 6 1 GPIB code list PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION ID Marker ON IDMK ON OFF IDMK OFF ID Mkr ID Trig IDMTOTR Zoom Mode t ZMMD ON ZMMD ON OFF ZMMD OFF Zoom Position ZMPOS ZMPOS Time Zoom ZOOM ON OFF ZOOM ON ZOOM OFF Refer to Fig 6 2 ZMMD ON OFF MAX MIN ON MAXMS ON OFF 5 OFF MAXMS ON OFF MAXMIN Level Level AVG PWR ON OFF Median ON OFF Burst Error ON OFF Measurement number of times Measurement start Measurement stop CS DOWN cycle APMS ON APMS OFF MEDMS ON MEDMS OFF BSTMS ON BSTMS OFF IDMS MSST MSSP APMS AVGPW
182. 1 3 M OPB US a2 a dace stat quide Ee uda iste dd 11 3 2 CONOCIO 55 eR qp TODO 11 4 ET 11 5 4 Interface FUNCION 11 6 11 3 Initializing the Analyzer 11 7 11 3 1 Setting the Analyzer s GPIB Address 11 7 11 3 2 Defining the Delimiter PPP 11 7 11 4 Command Syntax Listener 11 8 HP200 and 300 series programming examples 11 10 PC9801 series programming examples 11 11 11 5 Quen Syntax Taken Re v ees ed 11 14 HP200 and 300 series programming examples 11 16 PC9801 series programming examples 11 17 11 6 Inputting and Outputting Trace Data 11 19 HP200 and 300 series programming examples 11 22 PC9801 series programming examples 11 23 117 Service Request SRO 25a doe CR To CORR 11 26 HP200 and 300 series programming examples 11 27 PC9801 series programming examples 11 28 11 8 Setup Example of TV Channel Function OPT72 OPT78 Standard equipment on U4341 series 11 31 11 9 GPIB Command Codes 11 32 i e n RR AREE ee 11 32
183. 1 75 to 1438 75 1441 75 to 1468 75 1471 75 to 1498 75 1501 75 to 1528 75 1531 75 to 1558 75 1561 75 to 1588 75 1591 75 to 1618 75 1621 75 to 1648 75 1651 75 to 1678 75 1681 75 to 1708 75 1711 75 to 1738 75 1741 75 to 1768 75 1771 75 to 1798 75 1801 75 to 1828 75 V TYPE2 1395 25 1425 25 1455 25 1485 25 1515 25 1545 25 1575 25 1605 25 1635 25 1665 25 1695 25 1725 25 1755 25 1785 25 1815 25 1845 25 V SOUND For JCSAT broadcast local oscillation 11 2 GHz vertically polarized waves Table 9 14 Channel table of CS in Japan V SOUND Analyzer s Transponder No Frequency range Center frequency channel Channel MHz MHz 6 23 J 6 1384 75 to 1411 75 1398 25 25 J 8 1414 78 to 1441 75 1428 25 9 25 Apr 1 96 ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table H TYPE1 For JCSAT communication local oscillation 11 3 GHz horizontally polarized Waves Table 9 15 Channel table of CS in npa Analyzer S i a Frequency range channel MHz 969 75 to 996 75 999 75 to 1026 75 1029 75 to 1056 75 1059 75 to 1086 75 1089 75 to 1116 75 1119 75 to 1146 75 1149 75 to 1176 75 1179 75 to 1206 75 1209 75 to 1236 75 1239 75 to 1266 75 1269 75 to 1296 75 1299 75 to 1326 75 1329 75 to 1356 75 1359 75 to 1386 75 1389 75 to 1416 75 9 26 frequency 1403 25 1419 75 to 1446 75
184. 1 dB div 1096 div of reference level 40 dB 5 dB div Linear QP Log e Reference level range Preamplifier OFF Log 64 dBm to 40 dBm 0 1 dB step Linear 141 1 22 36 V Preamplifier ON Log 84 dBm to 5 dBm 0 1 dB step Linear 14 11 to 707 1 mV e input attenuator range to 50 dB 10 dB step 13 2 10 97 3 Dynamic range Display average noise level Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON 1 dB gain compression Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON Spurious response Preamplifier OFF 2nd harmonic distortion 3rd order inter modulation distortion Residual response Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 1 U4941 4941PHS Specifications 117 dBm 2 7f GHz dB RBW 1 kHz VBW 10 Hz INPUT ATT 0 dB frequency 1 MHz or more 132 dBm 3 3f GHz dB RBW 1 kHz VBW 10 Hz INPUT ATT 0 cB frequency 1 MHz or more 10 dBm mixer input level Frequency 10 MHz or more 40 dBm HF input level Frequency 10 MHz or more lt 70dB 30 dBm input INPUT ATT 0 dB frequency gt 10 MHz lt 70dB 30 dBm input INPUT ATT 0 dB frequency gt 10 MHz 100 dBm INPUT ATT 0 dB INPUT 500 terminated frequency gt 1 MHz lt 115 dBm INPUT ATT 0 dB INPUT 500 terminated frequency gt 1 MHz 13 3 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 1 U4941 4941PHS Specifications 4
185. 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 3 U4342 series cont d USER key Calls up a user defined function Enter a user 7 5 DEFINE key defined function Recall a setup mode and waveform stored in a SHIFT USER memory card Store the current setup and RCL key SAVE key waveform data to a memory card 0 to local control from remote control Set the E GPIB device address 5 1 SHIFT RCL Tum the power on off Selects the ON OFF of the incorporated preamplifier the counter function and so on Selects ADJ OBW dB down third order inter modulation distortion measurement and so on Enter the shift mode Multiple function keys LED lights when in the shift mode Display the marker on screen Hide the marker OFF key SHIFT MKR Move the marker to the peak level displayed Move current marker point values to another function such as center frequency etc MKR key SHIFT PEAK Return the analyzer to initial conditions Lights when the analyzer is being remotely controlled LCL key ADRS key SHIFT LCL A key Increment or decrement input data step key Dial to fine adjust input data data knob NUMERIC key pad Extended function keys Input digits from 0 to 89 and decimal point Used in combination with the shift k
186. 10 CP D check 1UNCHON uoa ere Fx bs dod cR EROR RC Ee ew 7 70a 7 8 6 Switching External Internal of 10 MHz Frequency Reference Source 7 71 7 8 7 LOCK UNLOCK Function at the Zero Span Mode 7 71 T8 8 Batom Chock FUNCION aseo dep XE AUR AC enn 7 72 79 CODY FUNGUON s ar de RU REIR Da AEG 7 74 1 Printer plotter memory card output execution 7 74 2 Printer plotter output cancellation 7 74a 7 10 C alibralion FUNCION 5555 nc 7 75 1 CaliBralonm tems uae SU A EH s 7 75 2 Calibration 2 7 76 7 14 Label Function 43 ueri CREER IRE iets es 7 78 1 Labeling Procedure sm pro ee Se oooh aO ROC RUE 7 78 2 I EaDeL mp 2204425 dI b A eR REOR d dicen dee 7 79 7 12 EMC Function Standard equipment U4941 series U4342 series 7 80 FAO AU FUNCIONS eee ae eee aes 7 82 7 13 1 Antenna Factor Correction 0 eee eee 7 82 Limit Line FUNCION Co CU ERR seas 7 84 1 Limit line data table entry 7 84 7 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table of Contents Be melli 7 85 3 Limit Line data table creation 7 86 7 13 3 PASS FAIL Function Displ
187. 11 Measurement 6 41 Save Function 5 27 3 20 4 2 7 59 Preamplifier CE LL NS Preamplifier 7 4 3 20 Preset Function 7 63 7 53 Printer Output 5 16 Saving in the memory card 9 8 Printer Output Setup d 7 65 Screen Display Annotation 5 5 14 battery 2 5 Screen grid and data points 11 19 Second order harmonic distortion 6 7 Q Service Request SRQ 11 26 Quasi Peak Value Measurements A 3 Service request ON OFF codes 11 26 Query Syntax Talker 9 14 Setting the center frequency 4 8 Setting the frequency span 4 8 R Setting the reference level 4 9 ROW basic cac wa 6 1 HOL KOW 3 2 3 11 3 20 7 53 I A Jun 10 97 Setup example Shipping Signal line termination Signal track mode Softkeys E n 4 d 4 A E c 8 3 a E Softkey menu screen Some handy functions Sound monitor mode setup SPAN key 4 8 d 9 SPECIFICATIONS Spurious Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Commo
188. 123 456E 6 This shows that the center frequency is 123 456MHz Example Level HHHA DDDDDDDDE D CR LF TTT T 1 T 123 4 5 6 Maximum data size from 1 through 5 is 16 bytes the units specified by UNIT used Example Sending the query ML might return the response MLB 00056 23E 0 This shows a marker level of 56 23dBm Time HHA DDDDE D CRLF TITT i 123 4 5 6 Maximum data size from 1 through 5 is 11 bytes the unit is seconds Example Sending the query SW might return SW 0500E 3 showing a sweep time of 500 msec Constant DDDD CRLF or DDDD D T T 4 6 Example Output the ON OFF state Output the number of averagings 1 0 128 11 15 Apr 1 96 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 5 Query Syntax Talker HP200 and 300 series programming examples GPIB address 1 Example 5 Output the marker frequency ma ma mre le xi lii 4 10 OUTPUT 701 MF 20 ENTER 701 30 END su
189. 13 Feb 9 99 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table A 3 4 Tracking Generator Function Standard equipment on LIA 342 SONOS ink ese de eai e NE EO OU MCII MM PIPER FA Listo Massages es ALPHABETICAL INDEX Sada epa dps EXTERINAL VIEW pionit ee eee a gs e D4941 EXTERNAL VIEW EE IDEE FEES m U4941PHS EXTERNAL VIEW PELO RI EXTERNAE VIEW OR REOR oe ied e ar 14941 FRONT VIEW U4941PHS FRONT VIEW U4941N FRONT VIEW ee Oi ee UA941 4941N U4342 4342N REAR VIEW UAO941PHS 4342PHS REAR VIEW A 14941 series U4342 series TOP VIEW 4647 EXTERNAL VIEW U4341N EXTERNAL VIEW 4344 FRONT VIEW lt 24 beet D bes eR eod dca UASAIN FRONT VEW 74341 series REAR VIEW ener a U4341 series TOP VIEW EXTERNAL VIEW 22 23s eb ea ee U4342PHS EXTERNAL VIEW CC U4342N EXTERNAL VIEW A342 FRONT VIEW Eta C ERR 14342 OPT72 FRONT VIEW Rh m I cns U4342PHS FRONT VIEW U4342N FRONT VIEW
190. 163 50 163 50 to 175 50 175 50 to 187 50 187 50 to 199 50 199 50 to 211 50 211 50 to 223 50 223 50 to 235 50 235 50 to 247 50 247 50 to 259 50 259 50 to 271 50 271 50 to 283 50 283 50 to 295 50 295 50 to 307 50 B C D J K L M N O p Q 9 38 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table Table 9 31 Channel table of CATV in France Analyzer s Cham Frequency range Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz 118 75 to 126 75 126 75 to 134 75 134 75 to 142 75 142 75 to 150 75 150 75 to 158 75 158 75 to 166 75 166 75 to 174 75 222 75 to 230 75 230 75 to 238 75 238 75 to 246 75 246 75 to 254 75 254 75 to 262 75 262 75 to 270 75 270 75 to 278 75 278 75 to 286 75 286 75 to 294 75 294 75 to 302 75 302 00 to 314 00 314 00 to 326 00 326 00 to 338 00 338 00 to 350 00 350 00 to 362 00 362 00 to 374 00 374 00 to 386 00 386 00 to 398 00 398 00 to 410 00 410 00 to 422 00 422 00 to 434 00 434 00 to 446 00 446 00 to 458 00 458 00 to 470 00 9 39 1 95 AF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table b VHF Table 9 32 table of VHF in Italy 8 Chang Frequency range Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz _ MHz MHz 52 50 to 59 50 61 00 to 68 00 81 00 to 88 00 174 00 to 181 00 182 50 to 189 50 191 00 to 198 00 200 00 to 207 00 209 00 to 215 00 216 0
191. 1680 00 1720 00 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table 2 China VHF Table 9 23 Channel ante of VHF in China Analyzer Frequency range Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz MHz 48 50 to 56 50 56 50 to 64 50 64 50 to 72 50 76 00 to 84 00 84 00 to 92 00 167 00 to 175 00 175 00 to 183 00 183 00 to 191 00 191 00 to 199 00 199 00 to 207 00 207 00 to 215 00 215 00 to 223 00 o OON h o Table 9 24 Channel table of UHF in China 470 00 to 478 00 478 00 to 486 00 486 00 to 494 00 494 00 to 502 00 502 00 to 510 00 510 00 to 518 00 518 00 to 526 00 526 00 to 534 00 534 00 to 542 00 542 00 to 550 00 550 00 to 558 00 558 00 to 566 00 606 00 to 614 00 9 31 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Tabie cont d Analyzer S Channel Frequency range Picture frequency Sonna frequency channel MHz MHz MHz 614 00 to 622 o0 622 00 to 630 00 630 00 to 638 00 638 00 to 646 00 646 00 to 654 00 654 00 to 662 00 662 00 to 670 00 670 00 to 678 00 678 00 to 686 00 686 00 to 694 00 694 00 to 702 00 702 00 to 710 00 710 00 to 718 00 718 00 to 726 00 726 00 to 734 00 734 00 to 742 00 742 00 to 750 00 750 00 to 758 00 758 00 to 766 00 766 00 to 774 00 774 00 to 782 00 782 00 to 790 00 790 00 to 798 00 798 00 to 806 00 806 00 to 814 00 814 00 t
192. 2 watt max 80 nominal TV picture demodulation output Connector Impedance Amplitude BNC female rear panel 750 nominal DC coupled Approx 1Vp p 750 termination 13 20 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 3 U4341 Specifications cont d TV sound demodulation output Connector Impedance Pin female rear panel 1kQ nominal AC coupled TV picture signal input Connector impedance Input level BNC female rear panel 750 nominal AC coupled Approx 1Vp p TV sound signal input Connector Impedance GPIB Plotter Pin female rear panel 1kQ nominal AC coupled IEEE 488 bus connector Supports R9833 7470 HP7475A HP7440A 755 682 XA HP2225AJ Printer D SUB 9 pin rear panel BJ 10 VP 600 MJ400 HP505J RS 232 Printer Power input Battery mounter adapted Advantest AC DC adapter Model 08364 Automatically selections between 100VAC and 220VAC Anton Bauer Inc PROPAC14 battery nominal GOWH 13 21 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 3 U4341 Specifications 8 General specifications Environment Operating temperature Relative humidity Non operating temperature e Power supply External DC input During AC adapter is used During 100VAC operation During 220VAC operation Power consumption le Dimensions External memory Mem
193. 3 MHz e Vertical display linearity LOG scales 10 dB div 5 dB div 2 dB div and 1 dB div e Error in switching from LOG 10 dB div to 1 dB div e Error in switching the IF STEP Amp e Error in switching the input attenuator e PBW noise power bandwidth SHIFT CAL To execute the calibration of six items other than PBW push SHIFT CAL To calibrate an individual item push one to be calibrated 1 1 Always let the analyzer warm up for 30 minutes or more before calibration 2 The internal calibration signal is automatically routed and switched inside the unit 7 75 Apr 1 96 2 Calibration Menu SHIFT CAL 4 Mer lt es 0 4 IDOL 4 o Cum Come CX 20552526 ata aal e ete ou Xy RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 10 Calibration Function Carry out the internal calibration of items other than PBW When the calibration is complete switch to the CAL CORR ON mode so that the compensation data will be used in future measurements Measure the absolute level error using a resolution bandwidth of 300 kHz scaling 1 dB div Calibration signal level 20 dBm Six items calibration can be carried out individua
194. 32 PK LIST TITLE Background color for peak list Multi marker list title 33 PK LIST DATA Background color for peak list Multi marker list data Ico i MULTI MARKER Multi marker color 7 16 Mar 1 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys Display the adjustable parameter Display the color combined with RGB Displays the scale of B color in graph Displays the scale of G color in graph Displays the scale of color in graph Displays the scale of color in numeral 0 to 15 Displays the active condition of RGB Color setting window Figure 7 5 Color setting window 7 17 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 2 TRACE Functions 7 2 TRACE Functions Figure 7 6 Trace key and its front panel location The analyzer provides two trace memories and B The A B trace memory has two modes in WRITE mode the new data from each sweep writes over the data from the previous sweep In the VIEW mode the data representing a spectrum or waveform can be held and displayed If wave form data is stored to the B memory then various waveform comparisons become available The trace display is composed of an array of display points 701 horizontally in each line and 341 lines in all The Input RF signal first goes through the RF IF section then either a LOG or L
195. 32 remote programming differs from GPIB remote programming as follows 1 Command codes D GPIB codes not supported D Delimiter control DLO DL1 DL2 DL4 interrupt S0 51 Command added for RS 232 remote programming Panel key lock control KLK KUK Status byte read out PLL 2 Panel control The following specifications are used for the execution of RS 232 remote programming When GPIB remote programming is executed the remote lamp on the panel lights up automatically inhibiting local operation Remote lamp does not light up 2 Local operation should not be inhibited until the KLK command is sent out Ifthe KLK command inhibits local operation the operation should not be automatically canceled unless it is not canceled by the KUK command If the local operation is ended while it is not canceled using the command after it has been inhibited the LOL or IP command can cancel it 5 47 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function 5 5 6 RS 232 Remote Programming Examples This subsection uses examples of actual programming to describe how to use the RS 232 remote control functions Note that all the programs used in this subsection use Microsoft s Quick BASIC Several sample programs use NEC s N88 BASIC and Hewlet Packard s HP BASIC shown in 5 5 9 1 How to use the serial I O Sample program 1 Example 1 Master resets the an
196. 4 Measurement example 4 1 4 1 measure the up and down levels of 12 chs 1898 45 MHz 4 1 4 2 ID trigger at a specified base station 4 3 4 3 To measure burst error rate of the specified base station 4 7 4 4 display the list of base stations of specified users ID codes 4 8 Explanation of Functions E 5 1 er 5 1 9 2 Soft menu configuration 5 2 D GPIB ee 6 1 c 6 1 6 2 6 5 6 3 Status list RT 6 6 6 4 Examples of program 6 7 7 Specifications 7 1 1 PHS carrier frequency assignment A 1 2_ Memory CSV A 2 dic uud PEE A 5 A 4 Display message list E EE 6 15 97 1 oe ED Title Page 2 1 PACCOSS ONO m 2 2 5 1 PHS SCR OM 5 2 5 2 Bi Rega ecd REO 5 3 53 5 4 5 4 NED re Tdi 5 5 5 5 List setup menu
197. 5 bandwidth video bandwidth sweep time and TRACE key E i 45 U r x lt Softey menu display Up to 6 software defined keys can be displayed 5 1 area here frequencies between 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz 27 REF LEVEL key Selects the reference level input mode 744 attenuator CLR key Clears or displays the Softkey menu display 51 Turn off the back light of the screen dBm in the max input level 50 VDC in the Selects menus for setting trigger video Controls the display waveform trace 172 3 10 Jun 10 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 2 U4341 series cont d USER key Calls up a user defined function Enter a user defined function DEFINE key SHIFT USER RCL key Recall a setup mode and waveform stored in a memory card Store the current setup and waveform data to a memory card SAVE key SHIFT RCL POWER switch MEAS1 key MEAS2 key SHIFT key Turn the power on off Selects the ON OFF of the incorporated preamplifier the counter function and so on Selects an ADJ OBW dB down third order inter modulation distortion measurement and so on e Enter the shift mode Multiple function keys 8 LED lights when in the shift mode Display the marker screen Hide the marker S SHIFT MKR PEAK key key SHIFT PEAK
198. 6 4 Spurious response Ree eR OTR Eee a a 6 8 6 5 Hosid al 76600066 eee 6 9 7 1 Reference level setting range 7 4 7 2 AUTO settings for RBW VBW SWP for various SPAN ranges 7 7 7 3 Color taplo 7 16 7 4 Factory initial SeluD 15 2 eas ac ee es Mie eee ya wei 7 63 7 5 CISPR measurement specification for 7 81 9 1 TV mode and scan lino number 9 16 9 2 TV Standard THOU uiuo ad o exu d oic bi CO DUE de oe 9 16 9 3 Channel VHF ux rry prese 9 17 9 4 Channel table o DHF is e ERE CART 9 17 9 5 Channel table Of ORM WO e 9 18 1 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL List of Tables NO _ Title Page 9 6 Channel fable Or BS Ask aue YEAR CC 9 18 9 7 Channel CS vie ia d AEG Qe ee ee 9 19 9 8 Chanel table of in Japati REX OEC ec 9 20 9 9 Ghanneltable of UHF aad aue rd Uo 9 20 9 10 Channel table of CATV qmi 9 22 9 11 Channel table of BS in Japan i42 EY eae RR 9 24 9 12 Channel table of in Japan ViTYPE1 ssi ex Ek 9 24 9 13 Channel table
199. 9 Cannot store a file due to many files ERR 510 Card is full Cannot write a data because the memory card capacity is full ERR 511 Band file name Incorrect file name was specified ERR 512 Card type Cannot copy a data due to the unmatched memory card unmatched ERR 513 Bad file Incorrect file descriptor was specified descriptor ERR 514 File already Same filename already exists exists Permission Permission denied file was accessed denied Card format Memory card format is different type unknown File check sum The check sum data cannot be accessed error ERR 515 ERR 516 ERR 517 ID code of memory card cannot be matched ID code unmatched ERR 518 A 29 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 4 List of Massages contd ERR 519 File type File type to be recalled differs unmatched Printer was already operated EAR 60s NO AGT DEV aue fo nortandstare 2HANDSHAKE Handshake error was detected during printer output ERR 611 ERR 700 PHS MD Linear scale cannot be set because the PHS mode is set MANUAL SWEEP cannot be executed because the PHS mode 1 set ERR 701 NG PHS MD NG PHS MD Limit line cannot be displayed because the PHS mode is set ERR 702 NG PHS MD Measurement window cannot be displayed because the PHS mode ERR 703 is set ERR 704 NG PHS MD
200. 90dB 0dB 10dB 20B 1dB of reference level 1 0dB 100kHz to 2GHz 1 5dB 9kHz to 2 2GHz lt 1 08B at reference bandwidth 50ms to 1000s and manual sweep 4 5ms to 1000s ZERO SPAN lt 5 FREE RUN SINGLE VIDEO EXT TV 13 26 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 4 U4341N Specitications 6 Demodulation Spectrum demodulation Modulation type AM FM Audio output Speaker and phone jack with volume contro adjustable e TV demodulation Demodulation type Video AM positive negative color system NTSC PAL SECAM Sound FM AM Demodulation output Video sound screen speaker and phone jack with volume control adjustabie 43 27 Apr 1 96 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 4 U4341N Specifications 7 Input Output e RF input Connector Impedance Preamplifier OFF N type female 750 nominal VSWR x 1 5 100kHz to 2GHz VSWR x 2 0 9kHz to 2 2GHz INPUT ATT gt 10dB VSWR lt 2 1 10MHz to 2GHz INPUT ATT zOdB Preamplifier ON 10 MHz reference input Connector Impedance Input range BNC female rear panel 50Q nominal 8dBm 16dBm Video output Connector Impedance Amplitude 750 termination BNC female rear panel 750 nominal AC coupled Approx 1Vp p 750 termination composite video signal Externa trigger input Connector Impedance Trigger level
201. 98 IP 30 PRINT 8 SP10MZ MFL 40 FORi 0 30 50 PRINT 8 CF MZ 60 PRINT 28 TS TS PS 70 INPUT 8 MF ML 80 PRINT CF EMZ FREQ MF LEVEL 90 BEEP 100 NEXT 110 END Example 24 Read the peak list sessi nd eo dll did 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 8 MND OFF Header OFF 30 PRINT 8 PKLSTON Peak list ON 40 PRINT 98 PKLVL1OENT Sorting the data in decreasing order of the level The number of peak is 10 50 PRINT Q8 S2 Clear status byte 60 8 SI PKL Single sweep 70 SPOLL 80 POLL 8 S 90 IF S AND 4 0 THEN GOTO SPOLL Wait sweep end 100 PRINT 8 PKN Read the number of peak 110 8 N 120 PRINT 8 PEAKLIST Read the peak list 130 FOR I2 1 TON 140 INPUT 8 FREQ LEVEL 150 NEXT 160 END 11 30 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 8 Setup Example of TV Channel Function 11 8 Setup Example of TV Channel Function OPT72 OPT78 Standard equipment 174341 series GPIB code setup example of TV channel function is shown as follows The sample program uses N88 BASIC produced by NEC Corporation Example 1 Channel setup 1 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 8 TVMD ON 30 PR
202. A for the ASCII input Accuracy of 0 to 340 40 FOR 1 0 700 50 INT SIN A 170 170 60 A A ST 70 PRINT 8 N 80 NEXT I 90 PRINT Q98 N AV A VIEW 100 END 11 24 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 6 inputting and Outputting Trace Data Example PC 18 Input data to the memory A in BINARY 0 to 340 eee eee eee ie ee eee ee ee ee ar a A a ma a 10 ISET IFC ISET REN Executes interface clear and remote enabling 20 DIM DT 701 30 0 57 3 14 100 40 FOR 1 0 700 50 INT COS A 70 170 Creates the transferring data 60 A A ST 70 NEXT 80 PRINT 8 TPC AB CWA TBA Specifies the memory A for the binary input 0 to 340 90 FOR 1 0 TO 699 100 WBYTE INT DT I 256 DT I MOD 256 Transfers data for every upper byte and lower byte 110 NEXT 120 WBYTE INT DT 700 256 DT 700 MOD 256 Outputs the signal together with the net data 130 8 AV A VIEW 140 END 11 25 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 7 Service Request SRQ 11 7 Service Request SRQ The service request function prompts the controller and other devices in the GPIB system to check the analyzer s state by polling the status register Table 9 4 lists the codes used to enable and disable the SRQ function and to clear the status register When SRQ is disabled the controller can still
203. AL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys Set the trigger point at the level indicated by the on screen marker When this mode is selected a symbol appears on the left side of the display to mark the current video trigger level The level can be set with the numeric key and units keys the La ster keys or the data knob 9 Taking the full scale vertical axis to be 100 the trigger level is shown as a percentage in the display active area Figure 7 3 shows a waveform with a video trigger REF 7 4390 mV _ N 0 0 kHz SPAN 90 ms Figure 7 3 Using a VIDEO trigger to display a waveform Use an external trigger to control the sweep The trigger signal applied to the rear panel EXT TRIG connector should be a TTL signal Either the High to Low transition falling edge or the Low to High rising edge can be chosen for triggering Select the polarity of the external signal used for triggering selects the rising edge selects the falling edge for the trigger point 7 9 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys Detector mode setup 1 ees 1 i 1 9294 Beann rar pte Mas ua RACE DET j e Displays the trace detector mode menu The display shows alternately the positive and negative peak detected values Initial state Se
204. ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 3 Freguency Span Setu 9 3 Frequency Span Setup Operation and explanation Pressing key in channel input mode the menu for TV mode is displayed When TV key LED is lighting tet SSHAUTO MNL n C o e oe p o o p o o CHANNEL gt lt By executing the full span function in channel input mode the best span value can be got from minimum lower limit and maximum upper limit according to the specified country and the band to set up span The frequency is fixed with the center frequency and acts as sync receiver The horizontal axis at this time is the time domain And the setup resolution of center frequency is set up according to the resolution bandwidth which has been set up Frequency span is set up at the previous span value When the span is wrongly set up it s useful to return to the previous span value or to set up two spans mutually to use This function is effective only when the center channel is input Fig 9 8 shows the setup example AUTO When the center channel is input with this mode sets up the frequency span with the best value of frequency bandwidth for 1CH and sets the center of the specified channel bandwidth as the center frequency When the selected band is in user mode the best value of lower limit upper limit is set up for the frequency span for 1CH Note Span may be modifi
205. ATION MANUAL 10 5 Function Description 10 5 Function Description Pressing this key powers the tracking generator LED lights up to show the tracking generator is on Pressing this key makes it possible to set the output level of the tracking generator with the ten keys plus the unit keys the vA keys or the knob C Press this key corrects a tracking error an error to generate from the difference between the output frequency of the tracking generator and the tuning frequency of the spectrum analyzer part on condition that RBW is 120kHz or less 4 5o TA o s Dn ate ama m BT uu S INE 2 SOPOT 595 4 Pressing this key makes it possible to correct a tracking error with the ten keys plus the unit keys the keys or the knob D LCD displays DA data of TG frequency adjustment Press this key powers the tracking generator off 10 14 Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 1 Overview of the GPIB 1 GPIB 11 1 Overview of the GPIB You can control the analyzer with any remote controller or computer that uses an IEEE Standard 488 1978 GPIB interface This enables you to run the analyzer remotely and to use the analyzer to run fully or partially automated tests 1 The analyzer s GPIB is fully compatible with any product that meets the IEEE 488 1978 standard The GPIB bus all
206. ATION MANUAL 3 1 U4941 series f 4m 91 eros poema Ba Eide ine Nc deu ee co a Aubl ae Du adc PL 295 7914 ED and K Xue Figure 3 3 panel 04941 series 3 9 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 2 U4341 series ____ ae a e __ 3 2 14341 series 3 2 1 Front Panel Figure 3 4 show the location of each numbered item further details and explanations will be found in the indicated sections LCD display Displays the waveforms and data in color Also 5 2 the whole display can be moved NEN MN Selects the sweep starting frequency D Softkeys 6 keys the function of each labeled by the 5 1 corresponding softkey menu item INPUT connector 500 connector is used for the U4341 750 6 1 connector is used for the U4341N Both connectors are N type Input signals with max 04341 134 50 VDC in the max U4341N can be analyzed CENTER key Selects the center frequency input mode SPAN key Selects the frequency span input mode MENU key 7 1 6 detector sweep sound and color modes STOP key Selects the sweep ending frequency mide Setup the coupled functions resolution 7 1
207. Amplitude accuracy e Frequency response Preamplifier OFF lt 1 0 dB 100 kHz to 2 lt 2 0 dB 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz INPUT ATT 10 dB 20 to 30 referenced to 30 MHz after self calibration Preamplifier ON lt 1 0 dB 100 kHz to 2 GHz lt 2 0 dB 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz INPUT 0 dB 20 C to 30 C referenced to 30 MHz after self calibration Calibration signal accuracy 20 dBm 0 3 dB IF gain error lt 0 5 dB after self calibration Scale fidelity accuracy after self calibration LOG 1 5 dB 90 dB 1 0 dB 10 0 2 dB 1 dB 5 5 of reference level s lt LIN lt Input attenuator lt 1 0 dB 100 kHz to 2 GHz 20 to 50 dB settings referenced lt 1 5 dB 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz to 10 dB Resolution bandwidth switching lt 1 0 dB at reference bandwidth 3 MHz error after self calibration 5 Sweep eep time 50 ms to 1000 s and manual sweep ccurac 5 Trigger mode __ FREE RUN SINGLE VIDEO EXT TV le Sw 6 Demodulation e Spectrum demodulation Modulation type Audio output AM FM Speaker and phone jack with volume control adjustable 13 4 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 1 U4941 4941PHS Specifications 7 Input Output e RF input Connector Impedance Preamplifier OFF N type female 500 nominal VSWR x 1 5 100 kHz to 2 GHz VSWR x 2 0 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz INPUT ATT 21
208. B ITTRCAB 3 Waveform data Limit line Limit line OFF ITLMTOF ITLMT 0 OFF Limit line 1 ITLMTA 1 Limit line 1 Limit line 2 ITLMTB 2 Limit lino 2 Limit line 1 2 ITLMTAB 3 Limit line 1 2 Normalize ON OFF ITNORM OFF ITNORM D OFF ITNORMON 1 ON Antenna compensation table ON OFF ITANT OFF 0 OFF ITANT ON 1 ON LIST ON OFF ITIDLST OFF ITIDLST 10 OFF ITIDLST ON 1 ON Setting of CSV type Setup ON OFF ITCSSET OFF ITCSSET 0 OFF ITCSSET ON 1 ON Waveform data Waveform data OFF ITCSTRCOF ITCSTRC 0 OFF Waveform data A ITCSTRCA 1 Waveform data A Waveform data B ITCSTRCB 2 Waveform data B Waveform data A B ITCSTRCAB 3 Waveform data A B Note 1 When recalling or saving data input the characters using a slash immediately before and after the listener code Up to 8 characters are available For example input RECALL A FILE0001 when recalling the data 11 43 11 9 GPIB Command Codes RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker request Function Listener code Remake Output format Limit line Limit line OFF ITCSLMTOF OFF Limit line 1 ITCSLMTA 1 Limit line 1 Limit line 2 ITCSEMTB Limit line 2 Limit line 1 2 ITCSLMTAB Limit line 1 2 LIST ON OFF ITCSIDLST OFF IITCSIDLST ITCSIDLST ON lGWentdieA CbRA Current drive B 0 Header MLB dBm
209. BACK GROUND Background color other than scale A N 10 DISPLAY LINE Display line color 11 SCALE amp DL Color mixed with scale line and display line 12 LIMIT LINE Limit line color 13 TRIGGER LEVEL Arrow color for trigger level 14 ANNOT CHAR Standard character color center frequency frequency span etc 15 MARKER DATA Marker data character color 16 ACTIVE DATA Active data character color SOFTMENU WINDOW _ Background color for software menu 18 SOFTMENU NUMBER Number character color of software menu 19 SOFTMENU CHAR Standard character color of software menu 20 SOFTMENU ACT CHAR Active character color of software menu 21 SOFTMENU NUM BACK Background color for number character of software menu 22 MARKER DATA BACK Background color for marker data character 23 COUPLE DATA BACK Character background color at manual setting of couple data 24 MEAS WINDOW Measurement window color 25 MEAS W FRAME Measurement window frame color 26 WAVE A amp MW Waveform A color in measurement window 27 WAVE B amp MW Waveform B color in measurement window 28 WAVE A amp B amp MW Color mixed with waveform A and B in measurement window 29 EDITOR WINDOW Editor window color 30 DELAY WINDOW Delay sweep window color 31 i SCALE amp DW Color mixed with delay sweep window and scale
210. Burst Signal Spectra 7 25 5 5 2 4 2 6 2 4 2 5 2 5 2 1 1 6 6 34 6 34 6 34 4 8 5 6 18 5 1 1 1 5 5 7 56 7 82 6 3 9 13 6 5 7 21 6 A 6 6 5 63 2 5 7 72 7 19 6 45 Calculation Modes 7 23 calling from the memory card 9 8 Carrying ball 2 1 Calibration Function 7 75 Center channel setup example n Japan uy s 6 xe de es 9 14 Center Frequency 7 2 CENTER key 3 1 3 10 3 19 7 2 Channel input mode screen 9 4 Channel number display screen 9 15 Channel setup 8 4 9 4 9 31 Channel table allocation 9 11 Channel table in China 9 31 Channel table in east Europe 9 33 Channel table in France 9 36 Channel table in Italy 9 40 Channel table in Japan 9 20 Channel table in Korea 9 41 Channel table in Malaysia 9 43 Channel table in Singapore 9 43 Channel table in U S A 9 43 Channel table in west Europe 9 49 Channel Table List by Country 9 20 Channel table of BS 9 18 Channel table of CATV 9 18 Channel table of CS 9 19 Channel table of VHF 9 17 Channel table of UHF 9 17 Channel Table Title by Band 9 7 Checking Accessories 2 1 CISPR measurement specificati
211. C Adapter connection is similar to the battery See section 2 4 Before turning the power on for full details on power supplies 4 1 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 4 1 Initial Power u 2 Turning on the power Now that the battery is in place the front panel power switch can be used to turn the analyzer on Front panel U4941 The LED inside the power switch should light when power is ON and go off when it is OFF Figure 4 2 Power ON OFF After you turn the power on the following screens should appear briefly before entering the default initial operational mode ADVANTEST should appear in the center of the Big display n B The analyzer is doing a self check while this display is present 14841 RF Field Analyzer 4 2 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL MN 41 initial Power up list of the installed options should appear The first time the analyzer is turned on this display will appear the analyzer is in the measurement mode setup at the factory before shipment In normal operation the analyzer will return to the settings current when it was last turned off and the display will be modified accordingly pO OMNEM PRESET ld can be used at any time to return to the 1 2400 MHz 3 MHz SWP 50 ms factory configuration Display in the initial factory ship setup
212. C1 X abs right DBABSH Measure 2 c cA A GU Re o e EE Jg Hai X dB execution state 0 Relative 1 Absolute Left 2 Absolute Right Continuously dB down OFF ON Continuously dB down ON CDB ON Continuously dB down OFF CDB OFF gt nmm curd xm Su NM S NN Jd eh Hh OE ee m e c in AM modulation ratio Operation vaiue Two calculated results are output continuously IF OBW Frequency Frequency IF Level Level 11 35 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Taiker request Function Listener code Remarks 1 Output format Average count PWTM PWAVG ON PWAVG OFF Integer 1 to 999 Average power ON Unit Header dBm P
213. D p eo eee Uses E eui 13 34 5 J DemodulatiOn 4354 6 ope 13 35 7 Input m Ee Red ea 13 35 8 Tracking Generator 13 36 9 General specifications 13 37 _ 10 PHS ID Demodulation function U4342PHS only 13 38 13 6 U4342N Specifications 13 39 1 FTOQGUGNGY neuer out de Rc Ron NL 13 39 2 Amplitude rane 13 40 3 Dame range uacua 33308 o eR Faroe USC Grant 13 41 4 Amplitude accuracy cuenta soci Ego bard CN ee ou ee ee RA RA 13 42 NER c Ac 13 42 5 DemodgulatiOn lt lt ex ary i ach Eos 13 43 7 Input OUIDUE uud re dep 13 43 Tracking Generator UT a a rdc ob 13 44 9 General specifications 13 45 C 12 Jun 10 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table of Contents AW 1 Ad MOSSY RTT TTC A 1 A 2 dB Conversion Formulas 8 AS MENU iste Hees Dax ad a Ea 9 Sonkey Menu 32x 9 KOV SEC ESSI ak eee NS 9 SPAN KOV Bardo epe sre A 9 START c 9 11 4l DE A 9 RE
214. DOMAIN is selected ERR 365 ERR 366 ERR 367 F DOMAIN Limit line having F DOMAIN data cannot be displayed because the T DOMAIN is selected ERR 369 LMT LINE ON PHS mode cannot be set because the limit line is displayed NG DELAY SWP cannot be set to AUTO because Delay sweep mode is selected NG DELAY MD SWP cannot be set to MANUAL because Delay sweep mode is selected NG DELAY MD iWindow sweep mode cannot be selected because Delay sweep mode is selected ERR 370 ERH 371 ERR 372 ERR 375 NG POWER Power measurement result becomes over the scale NG POWER ERR 376 MANUAL SWEEP cannot be executed because power measurement mode is set NG POWER AVERAGE mode cannot be set because power measurement is selected NG FAST SWP Trace detector cannot be set except sampling detector because sweep time is selected 40ms or less ERR 377 380 27 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 4 List of Massages cont d ERR 400 NO CARD SAVE and HECALL functions cannot be executed because no memory card is installed Memory card error due to out of the JEIDA Ver 4 1 standard Kiama card error to out of the JEIDA Ver 4 1 standard Memory card error em mem memory card size ERR 411 NOP CARD Memory card error due to incorrect memory card specification not supported ERR 412 NOP CARD Memory card error due to incorrect memory car
215. DULATION FUNCTION TV demodulation Function s Softkey Menu TV key TV mode and scan line number TV standard mode TV monitor screen 5 MW o m a o x NW m 0 4941 4941 5 Specifications 4941 Specifications U4341 Specifications U4341N Specifications UA4342 4342PHS Specifications U4342N Specifications Usage of Tracking Generator User channel setup User channel setup screen User Defined Functions USEH key u n MW P o NW B E E M E y p amp amp 4 E E 8 0 BH X amp 4 c W E E Alphabetical index A 20 9 1 9 16 9 16 8 3 13 1 13 8 13 15 13 23 13 31 13 39 10 1 9 6 9 6 7 49 3 2 3 12 7 49 Jun 10 97 User table screen User table setup Utility Functions V A Measurement WOW Video bandwidth VBW Video Printer Output VIEW MOd6 iex dx x Rex VSWR 455554 WP Lu assente xus te eo WRITE mode ZU YIG tuned Oscillator ZOO SAN x22 34 3 93 xx RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Alphabetical Index EAS 6 39 T 6 2 ITA 6 2
216. EAKLIST 11 34 _ Talker request _Output format gt gt gt ee 0 11 9 Command Codes cont d Sweep time Sweep time OFF ON OFF ON e i 4 10 Frequency 1 Level Integer Number of peaks set VO ho c m integer nn lt gt gt gt Frequency Level Same as MF ML Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker request Function Listener code Remarks Output format OBW OBW Percentage operation OBW MF AGP ADJ Operation vaiue Same as ML GRAPH ADG GRAPH OFF ADG OFF Ch Space ADCH Frequency ACP Specified BW ADBS Frequency e p ee EMO 4 bum comam lt mo c X dB down width MKBW X dB down DBDOWN XDB X dB down left DBLEFT XDL X dB down right DBRIGHT XDR X dB relative DBREL DCO X dB abs left DBABSL D
217. ELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table of Contents 13 3 Specifications Re eh ose d 13 15 1 PIGGUGNCY ud X CC toccato Se 13 15 2 Amplitude range Dopo e 13 16 3 Dynamic Tange Ort T 5 ba 13 17 4 Amplitude deculdoy 13 18 othe dien e Ree 13 18 6 DeEMOGUIANOM lt n soe eee ta 13 19 13 20 8 General specifications 13 22 13 4 U4341N SpecifICallOni e 13 23 abaaie ue MUTET 13 23 2 Amplitude range E 13 24 3 DYNAMIC rand qe d P 13 25 4 Amplitude accuracy 13 26 5 2S WOOD Da we ae ws Bo n Rodi y 13 26 6 DemodulallODE ss xsara cee 2 6 T de RC 13 27 7 MP OUMU shina gaan bate ow TITLE 13 28 8 General specifications 13 30 13 5 U4342 4342PHS Specifications _ 13 31 CU 13 31 2 Amplitude range REN E E NE E He eet 13 32 DYNAMIC range int drin Sc td 13 33 4 Amplitude aCCUlACY RH RD XL Roa b Col RC 13 34
218. ERATION MANUAL 4 2 Measurement Start to Finish D Panel keys and softkeys For example try pressing the This is how the actual center frequency is set The Softkey Menu displayed is n c c dh m de m There are 2 items and Softkey Menu the remaining 4 labels are blank since they gt ee currently unused CF STEP If you push the key corresponded to ESAUTO MNL the character color for displayed softmenu is changed In this case the color changed menu is acceptable to the setting value L Softkey menu by CENTER key Function of the SHIFT key SHIFT The is used to execute those functions whose names appear in the BLUE labels SHIFT above the Panel Keys First push the The LED to its left should go Then while in Shift mode press the Panel Keys desired Example Later on in this chapter we will be using the MKR MKR to function SHIFT MKR is executed by pressing and 4 6 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 4 2 Measurement Start to Finish Data input When a Panel Key and Softkey menu item that has an accompanying value isselected the label and current value will first appear at the top left of the display This is called the active display area data input is done while watching the values displayed there
219. FF Press the and then move the marker to the point of interest by turning the data knob Then SHIFT MKR 900 011 18 87 dBm move the center frequency by pressing 9 MKR REF function This function makes the level of the currently active marker be the reference level Quite useful in setting the spectral peak to the reference Peak to reference level case Press Non peak level to reference case OFF Press the to select the marker and then turn the data knob to move it to the location of interest CF 500 000 MHz SPAN 1 4 RBW 10 kHz VBW 10 5 SHIFT Then finish by pushing we 4 10 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL amp 1 Analyzer Control Key Functions 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Basic analyzer operation display screen data output procedure the use of the memory cards and the remote control function using an RS232 interface will all be explained in this chapter 5 1 Analyzer Control Key Functions The analyzer is operated with Panel key and Softkey Whenever Panel key is pressed a corresponding softkey menu is displayed at the right side of the screen Pressing a softkey corresponding to the softkey menu executes the function CLR E E m Toe DATA SAVE CO ist REL MEAS MEAR COC SHIFT OFF 695 MEM CD eS o c EMO UTI
220. FM signal analysis B C E E E GS FB 9 k oc 4 n 4 A FSF FM signal with low modulation frequency FM signal with high modulation frequency 5 FM signal with small xr REX Cea RR a FM signal with large Afpeak Xa d o aurae ee ee a dito arbe dU FM signal with small modulation index Le eT E abis artus d Pulse modulation OBW measurement hh ME O IM IE S A A yG Aml y y t I 903 34 5 ES X c POINT mode measurement of adjacent channel leakage power ACP GRAPH mode measurement of adjacent channel leakage power NTSC signal 1 Channel NTSC signal 12 Channel y Y G d4 o VHF and UHF channel assignments V A measurement Picture quality vs C N Noise level measurement a bh E B E E E E E E VW aa 9 Carrier signal level measurement F 3
221. FT DEFINE EL REOS The soft group upper half of the screen becomes active Choose items S3 ACTIVE 1 either pushing the panel key or the step keys _ m MEMBER soft member lower half of the screen becomes active Choose ae ae items by either pushing the panel key or the step keys 7 50 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 5 User Defined Functions Causes the menu or function being selected by the arrow in the MEMBER window to be inserted into the GROUP window location pointed to by the arrow there Any submenus are also modified accordingly Delete the group being selected by the arrow gt Display the submenu to initialize the soft group 1 Return the selection in the soft group to its factory default J initial menu i Return all soft group menus to their factory default initial 4 menus Return to the previous menu Son 5 Rats mock Re 2 Example of setting up a user defined key SHIFT DEFINE use the panel keys or the step keys to select the soft group that you want to modify In this case push USER and the display to the left will appear 1 GROUP 1 and then ZAO ACTIVE _3 0 C hob 000 00 COO DOO ctu OMT 353501 mcool Select the soft key for which th
222. Frequency Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes Talker request Function Listener code Remarks _ Frequency Freguency Frequency St i Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency HI SENCE ON HI SENCE OFF Counter OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON COUNT ON CT ON CN ON CNO CN1 CN2 CN3 COUNT OFF CT OFF CN OFF CNF Delay sweep Trigger signal source VIDEO VIDEO DLY EXT DLY TV V TVV DLY TV H TVH DLY TV signal NTSC system TVHNT DLY PAL amp SECAM system TVHPS DLY NE 11 33 1 97 Counter ON Resolution Counter OFF Measure 1 Picture signal modutation polarity Trigger slope D Delay position Delay sweep time Delay sweep ON OFF Sweep time Measure 1 single sweep Peak AY div PSP o Peak range Normal Upper Lower Peak mode In order of frequency In order of level ca c9 E m m m Number of peaks detected Data output RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL TVPLO DLY TVPLO DLY TRIGSLP DL Y TRIGSLP DLY DLYPOS DLYPOS DLYSWPTIM DLYSWPTIM SLYSWP DLYSWP ON DI YSWP OFF SWP DLY 57 PKLSTOFF Pol PKL eas eee m PSN PSU PSL PKL PKLVL gt P
223. Frequency range Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz MHz 470 00 to 478 00 478 00 to 486 00 486 00 to 494 00 494 00 to 502 00 502 00 to 510 00 510 00 to 518 00 518 00 to 526 00 526 00 to 534 00 534 00 to 542 00 542 00 to 550 00 550 00 to 558 00 558 00 to 566 00 566 00 to 574 00 574 00 to 582 00 582 00 to 590 00 590 00 to 598 00 598 00 to 606 00 606 00 to 614 00 614 00 to 622 00 9 36 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table cont d Analyzer Channel range Picture frequency Sound frequency _ channel MHz MHz MHz 622 00 to 630 00 630 00 to 638 00 638 00 to 646 00 646 00 to 654 00 654 00 to 662 00 662 00 to 670 00 670 00 to 678 00 678 00 to 686 00 686 00 to 694 00 694 00 to 702 00 702 00 to 710 00 710 00 to 718 00 718 00 to 726 00 726 00 to 734 00 734 00 to 742 00 742 00 to 750 00 750 00 to 758 00 758 00 to 766 00 766 00 to 774 00 774 00 to 782 00 782 00 to 790 00 790 00 to 798 00 798 00 to 806 00 806 00 to 814 00 814 00 to 822 00 822 00 to 830 00 830 00 to 838 00 838 00 to 846 00 846 00 to 854 00 854 00 to 862 00 9 37 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table Table 9 30 Channel table of CATV CM in France Analyzer S Channel Frequency range Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz 115 50 to 127 50 127 50 to 139 50 139 50 to 151 50 151 50 to
224. H and line feed LF codes Basic format he el Analyzer gt When waveform data are transmitted in binary format the extended transmission format is used The extended format enables 8 bit data to be transmitted transparently Extension format Indicates the Indicates the __ transmission start in transmission ending in the extended format the extended format DLE Data link escape character STX Start text character EOT End of transmission character For the values of these control characters refer to 5 5 8 Control Character Codes List 5 45 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function In this case if the binary data include data with the same codes as the DLE character messages are sometimes ended by mistake For this reason the sending end inserts an excess DLE character for transmission When the receiving end receives the continuous DLE characters it recognizes the excess and ignores it This operation ensures data transparency For an example of data handling of this kind refer to 5 5 6 RS 232 Remote Program Examples Sample Program 2 Ex 14 and 15 Sending end Receiving end DLE Insert Delete 5 46 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function 5 5 5 Differences from GPIB Remote Programming It should be noted that RS 2
225. Hz to 2 2 GHz X span accuracy 0 15 x RBW 50 kHz e Frequency readout accuracy Start Stop CF Marker frequency Count frequency marker Resolution Count accuracy Frequency reference accuracy e Frequency span Hange Accuracy 1 Hz to 1 kHz marker frequency X frequency reference accuracy 1LSD 5 S N z25 dB 50 kHz lt SPAN lt 10 MHz RBW gt 100 kHz 2X10 8 Year 1 10 0 C to 50 2 50 kHz to 2 4 GHz ZERO lt 5 SPAN gt 100kHz Frequency stability Residual FM Drift lt 3 kHz p p 100 ms 10 kHz Frequency is fixed 30 minutes after power ON Sweep time 50 ms to 5 s temperature is fixed 100 dBc Hz 20 kHz offset 1 kHz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence lt 20 1 kHz to 1 MHz 25 3 MHz lt 15 1 60 dB 3 dB 9 kHz 120 kHz Sideband noise Resolution bandwidth 3 dB Hange Bandwidth range accuracy Selectivity Bandwidth 6 dB Video bandwidth 10 Hz to 3 MHz 13 1 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 1 U4941 4941PHS Specifications 2 Amplitude range 20 dBm to Average indicated noise level e Maximum input level Preamplifier OFF 27 dBm Input ATT z 10 dB 50V DC max 13 dBm 50 DC max Preamplifier ON e Display range Log 10 X 10div 10 5 2
226. IEWS Alphabetical order followed by symbols Dimensional drawings of the analyzer front and real panels Preface 1 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Tabie of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 ANALYZER FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 1 1 Outline of the Analyzer 1 1 1 1 94941501608 ke E 1 1 Seres 1 4 Tos SENES eed Hak Hehe eS ES ee ee 1 5 1 2 Equipment Configuration 1 6 1 2 1 Standard Configuration 1 6 1 2 2 Accessory and Peripheral Equipment Option 1 6 2 BEFORE USING THE FIRST TIME 2 1 2 1 Checking Accessories 2 1 2 2 Operating Environmental Conditions 2 2 2 3 Storage Cleaning and Shipping the Analyzer 2 3 1 Storing the analyzer 2 3 2 Cd CSI EE PvE Sk xo ma dida 2 3 3 SDIDDIBO xoc Sce deo ac Enc Ad d CR a Sore RCRUM ear ud 2 3 2 4 Before Turning the Power 2 4 2 4 1 Power Supply Choices 2 4 24 2 Batey Operation iov x ue E 2 5 2 4 3 AC Operation Using the AC DC Adapter
227. INEAR amplifier Next it is detected and then input to an analog to digital converter The digital data is then stored in the trace memory where it can be processed by the CPU and finally displayed 7 2 1 Trace Modes 1 Modes for the A trace memory Does not apply to the B memory TRACE Displays trace mode softmenu When softmenu disappears display the trace A mode is switched to WRITE or VIEW alternately by pressing this key Go into the WHITE mode In this mode the new data from each sweep both updates the A trace memory and is displayed on the screen at the save time 7 18 Mar 1 97 ue au aum oa am cee oma ce ree mere ee re ee a ee eee ae nee en ts te ee ee ee ee en oe oe ata cre RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 2 TRACE Functions Toggle the A trace between VIEW display and BLANK When this is pushed the A trace leaves the normal WRITE mode return to the p o WRITE mode push T WRITE again VIEW mode Bo the Write updating operation and hold and display the contents of the A memory at the instant of the VIEW mode selection BLANK mode Erase the trace data from the display but hold the contents of the A memory at the instant of the BLANK mode selection The trace can be redisplayed by again selecting VIEW mode 0 1 dBm 10dB
228. INT 1 ML INPUT 1 1 1 NEXT 1 Example result M11 1 55 01 11 2 58 22 STOP Communication error processing routine Commerror IF ERR CommTimeOut THEN RetryCount 5 THEN ON ERROR GOTO 0 END IF RetryCount RetryCount 1 PRINT Communication TIME OUT 111 FOR 0 TO 5000 NEXT J PRINT Retry communication RESUME ELSE IF ERR CommBuffOver THEN PRINT Communication buff overflow 11 RESUME END IF 5 60 Apr 1 96 END END RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL PRINT Something Error has been occurred PRINT Error no ERR ON ERROR GOTO 0 IF 5 61 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function cont d Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function 5 5 8 List of Control Character Codes hex Used for header character during binary data transmission Used for delimiter character during binary data transmission Used for delimiter character during ASCH data transmission Used for delimiter character during ASCII data transmission Control character during binary data transmission Start character during X parameter transmission Prevention character during X parameter transmission 5 62 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function 5 5 9 N88 BASIC HP BASIC Sample Programs The following are the sample programs of Ex 8 Ex 10 and Ex 17 which are written in N88 BASIC and Ex 17 in HP BASIC
229. INT 08 40 PRINT 88 CHAUTO 50 PRINT 8 CF TVCH LENT 60 END Set up channel input mode Set up VHF mode Set up channel auto Set up picture frequency 1CH Note center frequency start frequency stop frequency is set up during channel input mode it becomes frequency input mode Example 2 Channel setup I ISET IFC ISET REN PRINT 88 TVMD ON Setup channel input mode PRINT 88 TVVHF Set up VHF mode PRINT 8 FA TVCH 1ENT Set up the lower limit of frequency bandwidth 1CH PRINT 88 FB TVCH SENT Set up the upper limit of frequency bandwidth 3CH END ISET IFC ISET REN PRINT 8 TVMD ON Set up channel input mode PRINT 88 TVUSR Setup USER mode PRINT 88 TVTIT USER TABLE USR Set up table title PRINT 8 TVEDDEL TVEDIN Delete user table and set input status PRINT 08 1 91 25MZ 90 0MZ 96 0MZ Set up picture frequency and frequency range in 1CH PRINT 8 2 97 25MZ 96 0MZ 102 0MZ Set up picture frequency and frequency range in 2CH 80 END 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 8 TVMD ON Set up channel input mode 30 PRINT 8 TVUSR 2 Setup USER2 mode 40 PRINT 8 TVTIT USER 2 TABLE 052 Setup table title 50 PRINT 8 TVEDDEL TVED IN Delete user table and set input state 60 PRINT 8 120 55MZ 50 2 60MZ Setup channel number picture frequency and frequency range 70 PRINT 8 2000 85MZ 800MZ 90MZ Set up channel number picture frequency and frequ
230. Initial Power up Initial setup Initializing tha Analyzer Input Attenuator ATT Input connector 8 8 Y 3 x o c we c s a d c3 3 c 8 input Frequency Hange Label function Label menu LBL LCD display Level Measurement Limit Line Function List of Control Character Codes LIST OF GPIB COMMAND CODES List of Messages NEED REMPLI LOCK UNLOCK Function e 8 gt C m d MARKER Marker Channel Marker OFF Marker ON Marker Section Functions Maximum input level dd X P c n w h gt Bo oO Maximum Input Sensitivity MEAS1 Functions MEAS1 key hh E Ww b MEAS2 Functions MEAS2 key m E F 7 78 7 79 7 54 3 1 3 10 3 19 6 12 7 84 5 62 8 1 23 7 55 7 71 7 34 9 15 7 35 7 25 7 25 6 4 2 2 7 36 3 2 3 11 3 20 7 36 7 38 3 2 3 11 3 20 7 43 Measurement of an Attenuation Measurement of an Insertion LOSS Measurement of a Passing Ba
231. L 9 5 TV Channel Table SCC V TYPE1 For SCC communication local oscillation 11 3GHz vertically polarized waves Table 9 18 Channel table of CS in Japan SCC V TYPE1 Analyzer s Transponder Frequency range Center frequency channel No MHz MHz 1 1 972 00 to 1008 00 990 00 2 2 1012 00 to 1048 00 1030 00 3 3 1052 00 to 1088 00 1070 00 4 4 1092 00 to 1128 00 1110 00 9 5 1132 00 to 1168 00 1150 00 6 6 1172 00 to 1208 00 1190 00 7 7 1212 00 to 1248 00 1230 00 8 8 1252 00 to 1288 00 1270 00 9 9 1292 00 to 1328 00 1310 00 1332 00 to 1368 00 1350 00 1372 00 to 1408 00 1412 00 to 1448 00 1390 00 1430 00 SCC V TYPE2 For SCC communication local oscillation 10 99GHz vertically polarized Waves Table 9 19 Channel table of CS in iid 1282 00 to 1318 00 1322 00 to 1358 00 1362 00 to 1398 00 1402 00 to 1438 00 1442 00 to 1478 00 1482 00 to 1518 00 1522 00 to 1558 00 1562 00 to 1598 00 1602 00 to 1638 00 1642 00 to 1678 00 1682 00 to 1718 00 1722 00 to 1758 00 9 28 SCC V TYPE2 1300 00 1340 00 1380 00 1420 00 1460 00 1500 00 1540 00 1580 00 1620 00 1660 00 1700 00 1740 00 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table SCC V TV For SCC broadcast local oscillation 11 2 GHz vertically polarized waves Table 9 20 Channel table of CS in Span Analyzer s Transponder No range Center frequenc
232. L C 2 3 Figure 5 1 Panel keys and softkeys 5 1 POWER Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 1 Analyzer Controli Key Functions CAUTION In this manual panel key and softkey menu are respectively represented as follows to differentiate each other SHIFT Panel key qe Softkey The many buttons and keys on the analyzer can be divided into three main groups 1 The display section This group is composed of the six sofykey used to select from the softkey menu along with the our key which erases or displays the menu display EX EX Xa E EE D Softkey Sofykey have their labels displayed in the softkey menu along the right hand edge of the LCD display There are six keys corresponding to the six menu choices There are menus to select either of two setting such as color changed menu is acceptable to the setting value In the above example we see the CF STEP function set to the AUTO mode ee 2 5 4 5 Softkey menu on Softkeys on the display panel Figure 5 2 Softkey menu and softkeys 5 2 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 1 Analyzer Control Key Functions Q Clear key e This key clears the softkey menu from the display and then an asterisk is displayed at the upper right of the screen In this mode basic function is possible using the panel keys Refer to Chapter 7 When this key is pressed again th
233. LATION FUNCTION 2 Accessory sold separately This chapter provides an explanation of accessories for PHS ID demodulation function 2 1 Accessories B Antenna for PHS Type 0618 Frequency 1895 to 1918MHz Antenna type 2 x 2 steps collinear Directivity _ Non directivity in a horizontal surface Impedance Nominal impedance 509 V S W H 1 5 or less Gain 4 1dBi Connector for antenna It is used when antenna for PHS is already prepared Type 4XAMOO01 Connector SMA J j Pass losses Under 0 1 dB Magnet stand It is used to fix antenna for PHS to car roof eic Feeder 3 m with NP connector Coaxial flexible cable It is used as an extension cable of antenna A conversion adaptor NP SMAJ is needed for the connection with RF field analyzer Type ICFS358HAA1500 TCF358HAA2000 Connector SMA Cable length 1 5 m 58 1500 2m TCF358HAAA2000 Apr 1 96 2 1 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION Memory card is used to save setting measurement data Type capacity A09507 64KB A09508 256KB A09509 2MB Memory type SRAM Band pass filter It controls unwanted signal level such as television signal 04210 NP NJ Pass losses typ 1 dB 1895 to 1918 2 Conversion adaptor NP TNCJ plug TNC jack NP SMAJ N plug SMA jack Antenna for PHS SUMARIO 1 9GHz bendi Connector for Antenna SMA cable 3 TNCP SMAJ Conversion ad
234. Memory Card 7 6 Save Recall Functions of Memory Card Figure 7 33 Save Recall function keys of the memory card on the front panel Using the memory card the current analyzer setup parameters and spectrum data can be saved or a previously saved set can be read back into the analyzer to restore its condition to the point at which the save was made The file list shown in Figure 7 34 is displayed whenever any of the following key combinations is pressed SHIFT SAVE SAVE SHIFT MEM CD SAVE RECALL Message Area H I Drive A Title File List Figure 7 34 File list display 7 53 Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 6 Save Recali Functions of Memory Card e The top window is for drive A which is the memory card closest to the front of the analyzer The bottom window is for the other memory card drive B i n BICARD DAV key The active drive is toggled with the a AB 1 File selection is made by moving the cursor to the desired file with the step keys and the data knob 7 6 4 Memory Card Functions This function provides the memory card initialization and the copy function using two memory cards SHIFT MEM CD 1 Initialize the memory card in the active drive Confirmation is always 1 1 required so the confirm submenu appears 2 CONFIRM Proceed with the initializatio
235. NUAL 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function initialization Function 7 8 6 Switching External Internal of 10 MHz Frequency Reference Source SHIFT CONFIG 1 Press the keys in the left order S 10M When INT is chosen the internal reference frequency is selected and the 21 EXTANT frequency measurement accuracy will become 1 10 5 0 to 50 2 X 10 When EXT is chosen the external reference frequency connected to the 10 MHz reference frequency signal input terminal of the analyzer rear panel is selected and the reference measurement accuracy is defined by that CAUTION 1 For INT setting disconnect the external reference source from the 10 MHz reference frequency signal input terminal When connecting it spurious error may result 2 For EXT setting use the external reference source output level in the range of 8 dBm to 16 dBm If not set within this range frequency measurement error will be increased 7 8 7 LOCK UNLOCK Function at the Zero Span Mode SHIFT CONFIG Ten B NEXT Press the keys in the left order Selects locking or unlocking the input signal at the zero span mode However the input signal is sure to be locked at the calibration in spite of this function frequency stability of LOCAL signal is improved but the signal purity is degraded This analyzer cannot provide accurate measurement at RBW 1kHz and 3kHz UNLOCK The frequency sta
236. NUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys 7 FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys The seven keys shown in Figure 7 1 are called the Fundamental keys D mE CENTER 8 4 3 R 2 STOP MENU REF LEVEL ant gt Front panel 04941 Figure 7 1 Front panel fundamental keys CENTER Center frequency SPAN Frequency span START STOP Start stop frequency 4 REFLEVEL Reference level CPL Coupled for setting RBW VBW SWP amp ATT MENU Select menus for setting trigger sweep detector AM FM modulation display color Reference Level REF LEVEL Start Frequency gt Stop Frequency START STOP Center Frequency CENTER pe Couple Menu CPL Frequency Span SPAN Figure 7 2 Display legends 7 1 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys 7 1 1 Center Frequency 1 Center frequency setup procedure Frequency range 0 to 2 2 GHz center Numeric key units keys 1 Step keys in stop frequency End 2 Menu explanation Displays center frequency softmenu When softmenu disappears display center frequency is displayed in the active area and can be set by procedure 1 Select MNL to set the center frequency step size AUTO the step size is set to 1 10 of the frequency span When ON is selected a frequency offset 0 to 10 GHz can be set to mod
237. NUAL 3 3 U4342 series f NM NI oe eee DiC 55 c SSA josai 04342 Figure 3 7 Front panel 114342 series 3 22 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 3 04342 series 3 3 2 Rear Panel For the rear panel of U4342 series refer to item 3 1 2 Rear Panel 3 3 3 Top Panel For the top panel of U4342 series refer to item 3 1 3 Top Panel 3 28 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 4 1 initial Power up 4 EASY USE INSTRUCTIONS For first time users from initial power up through measurement completion this chapter provides simple easily understood directions 4 1 Initial Power up Three different power supply options are available for this analyzer battery AC or DC supply Let s assume that we want to use the battery first 1 Installing the battery Begin by attaching a fully charged battery Anton Bauer PROPAC14 to the rear of the analyzer D Align the three prongs on the battery with the corresponding female connection points on the back of the analyzer Battery mounter position PROPAC14 battery Rear Sand U4941 Three connecting prongs face towards the Three receiving connector holes back of the analyzer Figure 4 1 Battery connection Push the battery in and down to complete the electrical connection and mechanical latch You should hear a click sound as the battery locks into place Note The AC D
238. OF BREACH OF CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION NEGLEGENCE STRICT LIABILITY INDEMNITY CONTRIBUTION OR OTHERWISE CUSTOMER SERVICE DESCRIPTION In order to maintain safe and trouble free operation of the Product and to prevent the incurrence of unnecessary costs and expenses Advantest recommends a regular preventive maintenance program under its maintenance agreement Advantest s maintenance agreement provides the Purchaser on site and off site maintenance parts maintenance machinery regular inspections and telephone support and will last a maximum of ten years from the date the delivery of the Product For specific details of the services provided under the maintenance agreement please contact the nearest Advantest office listed at the end of this Operation Manual or Advantest s sales representatives some of the components and parts of this Product have a limited operating life such as electrical and mechanical parts fan motors unit power supply Accordingly these components and parts will have to be replaced on a periodic basis If the operating life of a component or part has expired and such component or part has not been replaced there 15 possibility that the Product will not perform properly Additionally if the operating life of a component or part has expired and continued use of such component or part damages the Product the Product may not be repairable Please contact the nearest Advantest office lis
239. OP as 5 16 C OR gren Ert i p dede E m DC 5 16 2 ERO ACE 5 18 3 Printer output procedure 5 19a 4 Printer output execution and cancellation 5 19b 5223 Memon OUIDUL suae acere n ERE Ram RO ed 5 19c 1 Memory card output procedure 5 19c 2 Memory card output execution 5 19d 534 Video Punter OUIDUL mo a dba Oc E See eo 5 20 1 Connection to a video printer 5 20 2 Video printer output operation 5 20 54 Memory Card USO c ed cs 5 21 5 4 1 Memory Card Related Functions 5 21 1 Memory cards that be used in the analyzer 5 21 2 Memory card insertion and extraction 5 23 3 Memory card initialization 5 24 4 Storage to the memory card Save function 5 27 5 Reading back from a memory card RECALL function 5 31 5 4 2 Memory Card Care and Handling 5 33 1 Backup battery lifetime 5 33 2 Memory card backup procedure 5 33 3 Precautions in using memory cards 5 34 4 Memory Card Specifications 5 35 5 5 R
240. OPERATION MANUAL 7 3 Marker Section Functions Set the reference level to dByvV and calculate the noise level in 4 dBuV V Hz units This key is available for the noise level measurement such as a TV broadcast signals etc 1 i 1 dBuV v Hz i The FIXED Amarker is displayed at the active marker location and the 4 analyzer goes into the Carrier Noise Ratio dBc Hz measurement mode Move the marker to the desired point to be measured using the numeric key and units keys the Lo step keys or the data knob Using the dBc Hz mode an easy operation can be made to obtain a waveform signal When Amarker display is set in advance show the voltage comparison in the Amarker level on that position depending on the Amarker level with unit n e NOISE Hz Leave the Noise Hz measurement mode Mong DOMOS Muret 06056 5 Display marker switching While making noise measurements if the display line is being displayed you can switch back and forth between a display of the noise level measurement result and the normal marker data display When the active marker is Below the display then display the noise measurement results When the active marker is Above the display line then display the normal marker data 5 Marker level display switching at display line ON This function can be used when the display line is on NEXT
241. OT 4 CONST CR 13 LF 10 Defines control character DiEflag 0 Flag for DLE character deletion control i 23 PRINT 1 TBB CHRS CR CHRS LPF TR i INPUTS 1 1 Receives DLE character TR 2 INPUT 1 1 Receives STX character TR 3 INPUT 1 1 Receives first byte of waveform data DO IF DLEflag Detects DLE character in waveform TR i THEN DLEfl1ag 1 data inserted ELSE IF TR i CHRS DLE THEN DLEflag 0 Deletes excess DLE character 1 171 ELSE IF TR i lt gt THEN DLEflag 0 END IF END IF 1 1 TR 1 INPUT S 1 1 Obtains waveform data 5 53 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 nS 232 Remote Control Function cont d LOOP WHILE NOT DLEflag 1 AND TR i CHR EOT Detects end of data DLE and EOT characters Example 15 Inputs the data of memory in ASCII format DIM TR 700 OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 DS6000 LF FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 41 TAB Assumes that waveform data is already set to TR FOR I 0 TO 700 PRINT 1 TR I FOR J 0 TO 10 Processing time is required at SPA NEXT J NEXT I STOP END Note Set to VIEW mode before program execution When VIEW key is pressed again after program execution the input result will be confirmed 5 54 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function Example 16
242. OUTPUT 701 TAA Specifies that data will be read from memory A in ASCII format 30 FOR I0 700 Inputs 701 variables 40 OUTPUT 701 Tr l 50 NEXT I 60 END Note Specify VIEW mode before executing the program After execution is complete press the VIEW key again to confirm the input result 11 22 Apr 1 96 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 6 inputting and Outputting Trace Data HP200 and 300 series programming examples GPIB address 1 Example HP 14 Input binary data to memory B 10 INTEGER Tr 700 20 OUTPUT 701 TBB Specifies binary data to be input to memory B 30 OUTPUT 701 USING Z W Tr END inputs 701 data in word size and adds EO at the end 40 END Note Specify VIEW mode before executing the program After execution is complete press the VIEW key again to confirm the input result Note f the data is in ASCII format specify 701 as the the number of processings If the data is in binary format fetch 701 data items and specify EO as the delimiter 9801 series programming examples GPIB address 8 Example PC 15 Output the A memory data in ASCII 0 to 340 cere M 10 ISET IFC IBET REN Executes interface clear and remote enabling 20 DIM TR 701 30 PRINT 28 DLO TPC DTG
243. PC9801 series programming examples GPIB address 8 Example PC 1 Mster reset the analyzer and set the center frequency to 25 MHz 10 ISET IFC ISET REN Executes the interface clear and the remote enable 20 PRINT 98 IP Executes the master reset 30 8 CF25MZ Sets the center frequency to 25 2 40 END Example PC 2 Set the start and stop frequencies to 300 kHz and 800 kHz respectively and add 50 kHz to the frequency offset 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 8 Sets the start frequency to 300kHz 30 PRINT 8 FB800KZ Sets the stop frequency to 800kMHz 40 PRINT 38 FONSOKZ Sets the frequency offset to 50kHz 50 END Example PC 3 Set the reference level to 87 5 dB div resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 8 UU RE87DB Sets the reference level to 87 30 PRINT 98 DD5DB Sets 5dB 40 PRINT 28 100 2 Sets the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz 50 END Example 4 Set the value by a variable im amm um mum mum Cu den amm um um cun 790 m Gum i GEM ms um uei mm uum um dum uA a mee wi Tam m m m cm m 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 SPA 8 10 2 20 Assigns the set value to ea
244. PECIFICATIONS This chapter covers the basic specifications and the main features of the analyzer 1 1 Outline of the Analyzer 1 1 1 U4944 series Maximum resolution VKH Sideband Noise measured 20 kHz from the 100 dBc Hz carrier The 04941 series Field Analyzer is a very portable RF Field Analyzer that is it has been developed to be used for maintenance inspections and the like in locations away from the lab bench and often out of doors in the field The U4941 4941PHS has the input impedance of 500 and the U4941N has 750 Even though the analyzer is small and light in mass it has a color LCD display further increase portability there are three power supply choices a removable battery AC DC Adapter or an external DC supply Performance Specifications presented in a single display U4941 4941PHS 500 U4941N 750 Preamp 117dBm to 27dBm to 134dBuV 100 dBc Hz The analyzer is newly added a MEASURE function that makes possible the measurements required by all types of applications without the need of any extra calculations This new function is added to the previous functions such as COUNTER X dB DOWN etc Beside using the internal preamplifier an easy operation can be made to obtain an high sensitive measurement or an AM modulation accuracy without the need of any extra calculations Remote control via either RS 232 or GPIB is possible There are two slots for
245. PERATION MANUAL A 1 Glossary Noise Sideband The spectrum analyzer efficiency is lowered by the noise generated in the local oscillator and phase lock loop of the analyzer itself which will appear in the vicinity of the spectrum on the display To compensate for this the sideband of the analyzer itself is defined so that signals out of the sideband can be analyzed in a certain range This range is called the noise sideband The spectrum analyzer s noise sideband characteristics are expressed in the following example Example Suppose the IF bandwidth is 1kHz 70dB at 20kHz apart from the carrier The noise level is normally expressed by the energy contained in the 1Hz bandwidth See Figure 5 b If this is expressed 1Hz bandwidth Since the value is 70dB when the bandwidth is 1kHz the signals within the 1Hz bandwidth will be lower than this by about 10 log 1Hz 1kHz dB or about 30dB consequently it is expressed as 100dB Hz at 20kHz apart from the carrier when the IF bandwidth is 1kHz Figure 5 Noise Sideband A 5 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 1 Glossary Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity The band pass filter normally attenuates Gauss distribution instead of so called rectangular characteristics Consequently if two adjacent signals of different sizes are mixed the smaller signal hides at the tail of the larger signal See Figure 6 Therefore the bandwidth at a certain attenuatio
246. PUT 1 StatusByte SB VAL StatusByte IF SB AND amp H4 0 THEN GOTO SW Loops until second bit is set to 1 PRINT SWEEP END Displays end END 5 57 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function Example 19 is a modification of Ex 10 and shows the case where the Xon Xoff contro is selected as the data flow control Example 19 Outputs the marker frequency and the level simultaneously Xon Xoff control Opens the RS 232 port with the specifications as follows Transmission speed 9600 bps Parity none Data length 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit ASCII mode for Xon Xoff control Line feed character insert mode DSR line monitor timeout time 6 s e 9 OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 ASC DS6000 LF FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 1 Header output prevention PRINT 1 INPUT 1 Mf 15 Mff s VAL Mf Example result 1 8 09 M11 73 02 M11 15 END 4 Panel key lock function The GPIB remote control uses a remote local enable function to inhibit local operation The RS 232 remote control achieves the same result by sending a message This is called the panel lock function Once a request for the panel lock has been sent by the controller to the system key and knob operation on the panel of the system is inhibited until the controller sends a panel uniock message or a local message LC However the panel lock condition can be cance
247. Q Frequency span is more than 50kHz and less than 10 MHz Set the RBW to AUTO However if the setting value less than the 100 kHz is entered it should be set to 100 kHz or more The display blinks in the setting other than the above and In the normal marker mode the display marker frequency is a calculated value based on the frequency axis displacement from the center frequency But in the counter mode the accuracy is determined directly by the analyzer s reference oscillator accuracy However the amplitude indicates the marker s existing signal frequency Further it is possible to set a resolution as small as 1 Hz for even higher accuracy But as the counter resolution is increased the counter gate time is lengthen and the sweep becomes quite slow The Counter cannot be used in combination with the SIGNAL TRACK mode The example of measurement in counter mode refer to 6 6 2 Marker Frequency Counter Mode Frequency Measurement em Set the frequency counter resolution to 1 kHz Set the frequency counter resolution to 100 Hz Set the frequency counter resolution to 10 Hz Set the frequency counter resolution to 1 Hz RRR o the frequency counter OFF ary tater 2 56 rotates 7 37 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4
248. R MEDMS MEDIAN BSTMS BSTERR IDMS PRD ON OFF Level ON OFF Level ON OFF Hefer to Fig 6 3 Apr 1 96 6 2 Output format LEVEL TIME jio 999 all 0 OK 0 UP CH CS PS 999 When the level cannot be got 1 ERROR 1 DOWN 5 2 UW ERROR CH CS4 PSI o NODATA 5 Shows the end of data Cl CS PS 5 Cl CS PS CI CS 0 O0K 0 1 CRC ERROR 1 DOWN 2 UW ERROR C P Figure 6 2 Output format of iD marker Burst error rate All data number UW error number CRC error number Figure 6 3 Output format of burst error measurement result Mar 15 97 6 5 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION T et 6 3 Status list When average comes to the set number of times 1 comes up When plot ni ends 1 comes up Ea Na When sweep ends 1 comes up The following contents are added to the third bit of normal status byte Auto scan When scan function ends 1 comes up Signal may not be found Burst error measurement When the measurement completes up to the set number of times 1 comes up Measurement of median When the measurement completes up to the set number of times 1 comes up Measurement of average power When the measurement completes up to the set number of times 1 comes up Measurement of Maximum and minimum values When the measurement completes up t
249. R LEVELROY uoo ku areae HUNE reU a e A 9 p eMe esos d incid A 9 MENU KEY EA EAE Si ae may A 10 TRACE KEY gb o8 29 Boer CETT 11 MKR key E 11 PEAR KOV so Sueco adc ue ER A 12 SHIET 2EPEANK KEY 12 USER key 12 SHIEISUSEREKOV ode Ree ih b es das 12 13 SHIFT PAGS ROY oen due ost 13 MEAST KOV ee ee he RAR ee bce A 14 MEASZ Key vua te da ee Oe ne A 14 SAE PO Key shares 15 cot ais eck 15 ls pcm A 16 SHIFT 3 key PEE E m 17 we eee 18 Key uuu eru Eure xb Ea X UE Saco oe re A 19 vial 2 4 rrr A 19 19 3 2 Softkey Menu for TV Demodulation Function OPT72 Standard equipment on U4341 U4341N Oniy A 20 SEIFTISEPIGTURE KOV deity irr atenta mand dte de A 20 A 3 3 Softkey Menu for TV Channel Function OPT72 OPT78 Standard equipment U4341 U4341N Only A 21 vr A 21 cing NR 22 SPAN KEY 22
250. RINT 1 MFL INPUT 1 Mf 15 Mff VAL Mf Example result Mff 1 8E 09 M11 73 02 M11 VAL M1 END Example 11 Outputs the frequency offset OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 DS6000 LF FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 1 Header output prevention PRINT 41 FO INPUT 1 On Frp FrqqsVAL frq END Example result On 21 Frqq 1200000 Example 12 Using NEXT PEAK reads out the 10 peak levels from the second peak level of a signal DIM M1 9 11 9 OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 DS6000 LF FOR RAMDOM AS 1 PRINT 1 PS FOR I 0 70 9 PRINT 1 NXP PRINT Z1 ML INPUT 1 15 1 11 1 VAL M1 I NEXT I Example result M11 1 55 01 M11 2 58 22 M11 9 70 26 END 5 51 Apr 1 96 2 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function Input output of trace data The input output of the trace data is basically the same as that of the GPIB and its ASCII format uses similar specifications for the contents of data values message format delimiter fixed and number of transmission times Although the binary format uses the same specifications for data values data transmission order and number of data bytes as that of the GPIB control characters are inserted at the start and end of the data Refer to Extended Formats of 5 5 4 Message Formats In addition it should be noted that if the data include the same charact
251. S 232 Remote Control Function 5 36 1 Compatibility with GPIB remote control codes 5 36 2 Functions controlled externally 5 4 5 36 5 5 1 Specifications 5 37 1 Transfer speed baud rate 5 37 2 Data ERE 5 37 3 Sop OLENG EDS do ee d do dedos a 5 37 7 PAN 5 37 5 Communication method 5 37 5 flow contiol dao 5 37 7 inter character sending interval 5 38 8 Communication mode epe oe e o 5 38 9 Transmission error control 5 38 10 Communication port open 5 38 552 COMMECHOM due sea 5 39 1 Connection with controller 5 39 5 5 3 Communication Port Setting 5 41 5 54 Message Format nae Ec S 5 45 C 3 Apr 20 97 6 MEASUREMENT EXAMPLES 6 1 Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Common to Ail Measurements 6 1 1 input Frequency Range and Resolution RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table of Contents 5 5 5 Differences from GPIB Remote Programming Command COdBS ang tg ees ies 2 Panel COnUOE ee a oma e eoe ce Re 5 5 6 RS 232 Remote P
252. SPR specification for Electro Magnetic Compatibility measurements CAUTION The analyzer cannot provide the range of 6 dB bandwidth 200 Hz used in the range of less than 150 kHz 7 80 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 12 Function SHIFT EMC Quasi Peak detection When this mode is selected the screen will automatically be set to 5 dB div and display a 40 dB range RBW 1 Set the resolution bandwidth to the optimum value for the ea AUTO _ current frequency span uS 49 See Table 7 5 for guidance e c um m oo oco Roo ooo oo e 65206 ates as RBW Setthe Resolution Bandwidth to the optimum value for the m zd AUTO curent frequency span RBW eel P See Table 7 5 for guidance a RBW 120kHz yi i RETURN 1 Return to the previous menu t E NORMAL Return to the normal spectral analysis detector mode This is the initial 1 n 1 default preset setting Table 7 5 CISPR measurement specification for RBW Measurement RBW T Sweep time criterion bandwidth 6 dB bandwidth 150 kHz to 30 MHz 1 sec per 10 kHz of frequency span 30 MHz to 300 MHz 120 kHz 1 sec per 100 kHz of frequency span 300 MHz to 1 GHz 120 kHz
253. SV type software menu list and display message list A 1 PHS carrier frequency assignment Frequency MHz 1895 15 Carrier 1895 75 1896 65 1896 95 1897 25 __ 1897 55 1897 85 1901 75 1902 05 1 96 Carrier 18545 9 1896 05 1907 15 1896 35 2 1907 45 3 5 2 180845 1800 75 5 1008 o o 198 9 31909 8 _ 2 7946 191255 gt VIJIMIN S 45100 1902 35 62 1913 45 196 63 1913 75 m 28 190325 6 191455 2 19045 191555 38 a x 191645 1967 SURE CIA gt a Frequency MHz 1906 25 1906 55 1906 85 1907 75 1908 05 1908 35 1908 65 1908 95 1912 85 1913 15 A1 1 A 2 Memory CSV type 1 2 Binary type and CSV type Binary type Necessary memory size Smali Trace 1 screen 1 4kbyte Processing speed Examples of process by personal computer An example of measurement data process by spreadsheet software Microsoft Excel of Microsoft Co is shown here The figure shows the file opened A and B columns Trace data C D and E columns Setting data G H and columns Limit line data J L M Q columns 10 list 1 er
254. TION MANUAL 6 1 Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Common to Measurements Sweep time SWP The sweep time is the amount of time required to sweep through the frequency span requested The sweep time of the analyzer can be set between 50 msec and 1000 sec 500 011 MHz PAN 5 00 MHz RBW 3 kHz 1 T SWP 100 ms Figure 6 5 SWP 4s Figure 6 6 SWP 100 ms If the sweep speed is too fast the signal processing will not be able to keep up with it To prevent any unexpected error the levels displayed in the spectrum the UNCAL message will appear in the center of the upper screen In that case it is necessary to increase the sweep time Input attenuator ATT The attenuator is used to protect the analyzer input section from damage to attenuate the input signal amplitude to a level where it can be measured easily and finally to reduce undesirable distortions which could affect measurements The analyzer attenuator can be set between 0 to 50 dB in 10 dB steps 6 3 Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAI 6 1 Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Common to Ail Measurements 6 1 2 1 U4941 4341 4342 Max input level U4941PHS 4342PHS Preamplifier OFF 27 dBm 134 Input attenuator gt 10 dB 50 50 Vocmax Preamplifier ON 13 dBm 50 Vpcmax Maximum Input Level and Dynamic Range Maximum input level The inputtable maximum signal level is shown in Table 6 1 If the si
255. U4941 4 3 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 4 2 Measurement Start to Finish 42 Measurement Start to Finish The analyzer is now ready for us to start making some measurements Let s suppose that we want to analyze the spectrum of a 500 MHz 20 dBm signal 1 Getting setup for the measurement D We need a source for a 500 MHz 20 dBm signal Something like an ADVANTEST R4262 TR4515 TR4511 would be good Adjust the signal generator for a 500 MHz 20 dBm output Connect the signal generator output to the U4941 INPUT using a BNC BNC cable Signal Generator R6262 etc ad 9 Output Freq 500 MHz d Amp 20 dBm CS E N M BNC F Connector 7 BNC BNC Cable Figure 4 3 Measurement setup 2 Measurement Begins When the above setup is complete a spectrum like that pictured here should appear on the display CF 1 2000 GH RBW 3 MAZ 4 4 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 4 2 Measurement Start to Finish 3 Some preliminary information about the analyzer operation The analyzer is operated with Panel Keys and Soft Keys Whenever a Panel Keys is pressed a corresponding softkey menu is displayed at the right side of the screen Pressing a soft key corresponding to the softkey menu executes the function Panel keys ji Softkey Menu Softkeys Figure 4 4 Panel keys and softkeys 4 5 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OP
256. UAL 5 3 Ouiput of Screen Data Pen count selection 400 003 REF 0 0 dBm marker to select the pen number of 1 2 4 6 or 8 The allocation of plotter pen is shown in Table 5 8 Display division selection Press the order Pushing the selection marker to select the division size for output screen of 1 2 or 4 Figure 5 14 Display division selection 5 11 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data Output location selection When the Display Division selection has been set to When the Display division selection is set two pictures in amp the output location from two positions of right and left Figure 5 15 Output location selection two pictures case When four pictures were chosen in amp Select the output location from four positions of upper left lower left upper right and lower right Figure 5 16 Output location selection four pictures case 5 12 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data Figure 5 17 Switching the output location between AUTO and MANUAL 7 400 003 MHz 9 18 dB 0 0 dBm 10 Figure 5 18 Talk only address 0 Output location AUTO MANUAL selection Select the output locations when the division output is set c A MNL ressi 5 Set to AUTO or by pressing AUTO MNL When the AUTO i
257. V MLM dBuV MLU dBuVemf MLE MLP V MLV W gt MLW dBm Hz MLH dBuV V Hz gt MLL aBc Hz MLC Same as MF ML e e Marker off 1 marker AMarker Marker frequency Marker frequency MFL Frequency Level eee 1 ma n m um dodi MKNORM Frequency ma NENNEN Jd um zum um me MKNORM MKN MK MK _ Frequency 11 44 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker request Function Listener code Remarks Code Output format MKDLT Frequency AMarker MT Frequency FIX OFF ON FX OFF ON Fixed Marker Fixed Marker ON Fixed Marker OFF REDLT OFF ON Operation value Note 1 AMarker 1 AMarker ON REDLT ON 1 AMarker OFF REDLT OFF AMarker 9edisplay ON MKDPR ON NET MKDPR OFF __ Multi Marker Multi marker ON Multi Marker OFF deer m m e m Aum Active marker move m e e ee e itr c le Mil m o e a e aem p b
258. WB dBmV PWM dBuV PWU dBuVemf PWE dBoW PWP V PWV W PWW Average power OFF Average power PWAVG PWTOTAL ON PWTOTAL OFF Total power ON PWTOTAL Total power OFF Total power PWCH ON PWCH OFF Channel power ON Channel poer OFF Measure 2 Channel power Carrier power ON PWCARR Position of displaying measurement result Upper Lower 122 Unit Header dBm REB dBmV REM dBuV REU dB Vemf REE dBpW REP 0 10 20 dB a 1 5 10 2 1 2 dB When the peak list is ON Reference Level gt ior the multi marker the number inside the 4 lt mm m e ye p P s Dac mo we mh LINEAR 11 36 Mar 1 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d A Talker request Function Listener code Remarks Output format Reference level display unit UNIT dBm UN 11 dBmV AUNITS dBuVemf dBpW DW o UDBM AUNITS DBM UB UDBMV AUNITS DBMV KSB UM UDBUV AUNITS DBUV KSC UU UEMF UE UDBPW UW UVLT AUNITS V KSD UWAT Mm RONTSA en
259. a of Delimiter one point 4 byte Data Without Header Command Input Query Output Code Code Memory A Binary DD a EOI T Delimiter Point 1 lower byte Point 701 lower byte Point 1 upper byte Point 701 upper byte The binary value of each data point consists of an upper byte and a lower byte The signal marks the end of the data Com mand Input Query Output GPIB Code Code You can control the range of the trace data the analyzer returns by specifying the first data point and the total number of data points you want To do this use the command syntax shown in the following diagram 11 20 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 6 inputting and Outputting Trace Data Grae lol Lo Start Position specifies the first data point you want output 0 through 700 The default value is Q e Number of Points specifies the total number of data points you want output This number must not be larger than 701 Start Position The default value is 701 11 21 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 6 Inputting and Outputting Trace Data HP200 and 300 series programming examples GPIB address 1 Example HP 11 Output ASCII data from memory E o uw oo MAR
260. acrylic filter that covers the LCD display CAUTION Never use any organic solvents such as benzene or acetone that can deform plastics for or maintenance purposes Shipping If you should need to ship the analyzer reuse the original packing or equivalent or better packing material if at all possible equivalent box should be made of corrugated cardboard at least 5mm thick Please the analyzer into the box surrounding it in shock absorbing material Next insert the analyzer accessories and cover them with more shock absorbing material Seal the box with packing tape 2 3 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 2 4 Before Turning the Power On 2 4 Before Turning the Power On 2 4 1 Power Supply Choices Since this analyzer was design to be used out of doors 3 different power operations are available Battery Option 14 Battery Anton Bauer corresponding 60WH Battery fuse Time lag 12 5A 250V e AC DC adapter 08364 Standard AC adapter built in fuse Time lag 4A 250V Mass Approx 1 1kg Automatic change between 100VAC system and 200VAC system External DC power cable 01434 Option Battery and external DC power cable are prepared as accessories WAHNING 1 Use battery adopted to battery mounter of back panel on the analyzer For example PROPAC14 Battery manufactured by Anton Bauer When using unadapted battery batteries not approved may result in damage to the analyze
261. alyzer and turns ON the CAL signal 30 MHz port is opened with the conditions e RS 232 port 9600 bps e Parity gt none e Data length 8 bits e Stop bit gt 1 bit e Binary mode except for Xon Xoff control e Line feed character insert mode e DSR line monitor time out time 6 OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 DS6000 LF FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 1 IP PRINT 1 CLN END Example 2 Sets the start frequency to 300 kHz and the stop frequency to 800 kHz and adds a frequency offset of 50 kHz OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 DS6000 LF FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 1 FA300KZ PRINT 1 800 2 PRINT 1 FONSOKZ END 5 48 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function Example 3 Sets the reference level to 20 dBm 5 dB div the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz and the detector mode to posi OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 DS6000 LF FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 1 RE 20DB Reference level 20 dBm PRINT 1 DDSDB 5 dB div PRINT 1 RB100KZ Resolution bandwidth 100 kHz PRINT 1 Detector mode posi END Example 4 Sets the trigger mode to single and the sweep time to 2 s so that the marker will reach the maximum level for each sweeping OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 DS6000 LF FOR RANDOM AS 1 PRINT 1 SI PRINT 1 5 25 SWLOOP PRINT 1 2 Status byte clear PRINT 1 SR Start of sweeping DO Waits for end of sweeping PRINT 1
262. annot be changed ERR710 ID MEAS As operation process is set sweep time cannot be changed ERR711 NOT FOUND Signal cannot be found by AUTO SCAN ERR712 NG ID MKR As operation process is set ID marker cannot be set As MANUAL SWEEP mode is set PHS mode cannot set As PHS mode is set measurement window cannot be dis played As SYNC CS ID trigger is set delay sweep mode with limit line displayed cannot be set A1 6 Apr 1 96 IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR ADVANTEST SOFTWARE PLEASE READ CAREFULLY This is an important notice for the software defined herein Computer programs including any additions modifications and updates thereof operation manuals and related materials provided by Advantest hereafter referred to as SOFTWARE included in or used with hardware produced by Advantest hereafter referred to as PRODUCTS SOFTWARE License rights in and to the SOFTWARE including but not limited to copyright shall be and remain vested in Advantest Advantest hereby grants you a license to use the SOFTWARE only on or with Advantest PRODUCTS Restrictions 1 You may not use the SOFTWARE for any purpose other than for the use of the PRODUCTS 2 You may not copy modify or change all or any part of the SOFTWARE without permission from Advantest 3 You may nol reverse engineer de compile or disassemble all or any part of the SOFTWARE Liability Advantest shall have no
263. annot be canceled 2 If the both memory capacities are different the all copy cannot be executed 3 Precautions in using memory cards e Keep dust and foreign matter out of the connector holes Avoid bad contact or damage to the connector Do not touch the connector with metallic wires or pins etc Avoid damaging static discharge Do not bend or subject the card to strong shocks 5 34 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use 4 Memory Card Specifications Table 5 6 Memory Card Specifications A09507 A09508 A09509 Mormory card A09507 09508 09509 Specification Memory capacity 64 64 Kbyte 000 256 Kbyte 2 Mbyte Connector 68 pin 2 piece connector Interface JEIDA IC memory card guide line Ver 4 1 conformity Memory backup supply CR2325 1 each replaceable Memory backup lifetime normal Approx 4 years Approx 8 5 years Approx 1 9 years temperature 54 width 86 length 3 3 thickness mm Exterior dimensions mm Environmental conditions No dew condensation Operating temp range 0 to 55 Storage temp range 20 to 60 Relative humidity 9596 or less Write protection Turn ON OFF using the switch In the ON position protection is ON and the card may not be written to 5 35 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function 55 RS 232 Remote Control Function With controllers not equipped
264. aptor E Attached to Magnet stand 1 9GHz BPF TEET Figure 2 1 Accessories 2 2 Apr 1 96 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 3 Panel This chapter provides an explanation of front panel and basic display screen 3 1 Front panel Two exclusive key switches are set to operate 5 10 demodulation function 1 PHSkey Enters into PHS ID demodulation mode hereafter PHS mode In the PHS mode soft menu of PHS mode is displayed In the PHS mode selected LED lamp lights up 2 AUTO key The measurement is performed under the specified conditions and the measured results are stored in the memory card The following keys have additional changes of functions to the standard specifications 3 CENTER key Selects input mode of the center frequency Setting can be performed by frequency and channel carrier number 4 MEAS2 key The function is changed with PHS mode ON OFF In PHS mode functions such as ID MKR function median computa tion and average value are selected ID code input FUNCTION keys are assigned to hexadecimal digits A C D E and F CENTER STOP CPL REF LEVEL gt MENU START E s 5 04941 FIELD ANALYZER sus INPUT 600 T17uBm 50 0 MAX Apr 1 96 3 1 3 2 Screen Standard screen Vertical 10 scales B9575 NE TX
265. are changed as follows 10dB div 20dB div 5dB div 10dB div 2dBidiv gt 4dB div idB div 2dB div 3 The PEAKA Y div setting range is changed as follows 0 1 to 10 0 0 05 to 5 0 7 27b Mar 1 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 3 Marker Section Functions 3 Signal track mode In this mode after each sweep the peak signal of the trace is found and then the center frequency is moved to that frequency This is very handy when analyzing signals with slowing drifting The condition for detecting signal is dependent on the PEAK AYdiv setting OFF 1 Set to into the signal track mode 5 ON OFF While in signal track if the span has been set to narrow the analyzer goes into Auto Zoom In that case SPAN can only be modified with the numeric key and the units keys Signal track is ended by selecting OFF 41 SIG v 4 Noise Hz measurement mode In the marker noise measurement mode the analyzer can measure normalized rms noise levels with 1 Hz to 100 MHz noise power bandwidths See Figure 7 13 500 000 SP 10 KHZ EOD HZ Figure 7 13 Noise Hz measurement Detector mode is automatically replaced with the sample mode and the following three menus for Noise Hz measurement mode will be displayed Set the reference level to dBm and calculate the noise level in dBm Hz units 7 28 Mar 1 97 FIELD ANALYZER
266. asurement method Setup the Channel Spacing CH SP and Bandwidth Specified BS for the ACP measurement At each push the CH SP and BS selection toggle the one selected is shown in reverse video Input the frequency using the numeric key and units keys Measure the leakage power in the channels adjoining the center channel Channel spacing from the center is set with The results are displayed the marker display area labeled with UP LOW for the Upper and Lower channel respectively A marker appears at each adjacent channel frequency CAUTION 1 Measurement error will be made if an active marker is not set to the center channel frequency before making the ACP measurement 2 I the ACP SETUP channel width and spacing are not specified or if the values are incompatible or inconsistent then the ACP POINT function will not work XR ooo ooo oe aa um IR 7 47 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section 6 J 5 NE utr ere tein Oo 5 9 Do When ON is selected the leakage power across the entire displayed spectrum is calculated and shown as a graph The channels used are those defined with the menu above for the bandwidth ad specified The marker is positioned on the graph and the associated
267. ata 29 7 6 4 1 7 4 7 5 1 7 3 7 3 E Input digits from 0 to 9 and decimal point 5 1 Extended function Used in combination with the shift key for keys extended functions sauecsascasarus ttususvhanttteaauarrec amosunsuus qusasqsunspeunaan dtcons3uuuarvunnppdasanuvssevsorsoeuanensenamanveeeqsoaupusnuuameets Set up a measurement window NUMERIC key pad MW key SHIFT 0 3 2 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 1 U4941 series cont d SHIFT 1 i SRA wA pam aa SRE ee ee ee B4 eee ee ee eee CONFIG key Configure the analyzer SHIFT 2 rrr rr er er ieee UTIL key Execute a utility function SHIFT 3 MEM CD key Operate the memory cards B SHIFT 4 snma sp atatanaasuuv vscectutsusanpsoveqanaudescuuunpoumasszuauusrssenbi l 4unstuumnooneaoesetuttaamztvevmatasacauasaessseanunmusuumampouvet CAL key Calibrate the analyzer SHIFT 7 COPY key Capy the display toa printer or plotter Ng SHIFT 8 err ree er eee eee ee ee ee ee aii ae aa LABEL key Put a label on the display screen SHIFT 9 BS key Backspace to edit numeric pad input Units keys Select a set of units and input corresponding 5 1 values aumasuasattrvDdianumsuub psrussv ansassxsusuasdvrdenshesunusseundv4aaqeanuassumuprpueb5 uatunussuauanoeb
268. ator composite video signal female rear panel 10kQ nominal DC coupled TTL level BNC female rear panel 10kQ nominal during TTL level low level during TTL level high level Subminiature monophonic jack front panel 0 2 watt 80 nominal 13 43 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 6 U4342N Specifications cont d IEEE 488 bus connector Supports R9833 HP7470A HP7475A 7440 HP7550A 682 XA HP2225AJ e GPIB Plotter Printer le RS 232 Printer Power input Battery mounter adapted D SUB 9 pin rear panel BJ 10 VP 600 MJ400 HP505J Advantest AC DC adapter Model A08364 Automatically selections between 100VAC and 200VAC Antonbauer Inc PROPAC14 battery nominal 60WH B Tracking Generator le Frequency range Output level 100kHz to 2 2GHz 1054 to 74dB V in 1dB steps lt 0 50 at 30MHz 95dB V 20 C to 30 C Accuracy output level lt 0 79 100kHz to 1GHz lt 1 598 100kHz to 2 2GHz at 95dBzV 30MHz reference 198 100kHz to 1GHz 2dB 100kHz to 2 2GHz at 95 reference T 750 Output impedance VSWR x1 5 100kHz to 2GHz VSWR 2 0 100kHz to 2 2GHz 95 output e Frequency characteristic e Attenuation accuracy IA JA 13 44 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 6
269. ats ety 7 57 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 6 Save Recall Functions of Memory Card Store the user defined softmenu to a memory card The user defined softmenu can be stored in a memory card with 1 data 1 files if the same file has already existed in the memory card the following softkeys will be displayed with the message confirming to overwrite the previously I 1 l saved data Proceed with the overwrite Cancel and return to the previous menu o t I 1 1 f 1 1 1 I Abort the copy and return to the previous menu CAUTION 1 Save and Recall functions will not operate without a memory card 2 Memory cards that can be used in the analyzer are those that conform the Japan Electronic Industry Development Association JEIDA Specification Version and PCMCIA Release 2 0 5 4 Memory Card Use for information about memory card and use 3 COPY ALL function cannot operate using 2 memory cards which have each different memory capacity 7 58 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 8 Save Recall Functions of Memory Card 7 6 2 Save Function Save the current analyzer setup parameters and spectrum data to the memory card plugged into the selected drive SHIFT SAVE Execute the save operation File Name is automatically gen
270. away from the carrier and so outside the BS 5 channel The procedure for measuring C N on a Japanese 5 channel is as follows and move the marker about 1 10 GHz with the data knob e i OFF E dBm dBuV V Hz calculated to bandwidth 27 MHz Compute the C N from the formula C N dB Carrier Level Noise level 74 3 dB In case of Figures 6 39 and 6 40 C N dB 43 95 24 68 19 27 dB SPAN 50 0 MHz 5 5 Figure 6 40 Noise level measurement 6 44 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 8 Analyzing Burst Signal Spectra 6 8 Analyzing Burst Signal Spectra You can analyze burst signal spectra using the analyzer s gated sweep function Burst signal measurements are often necessary when working with magnetic tape equipment such as VTR 8mm video and digital audio tape DAT equipment To analyze a burst signal spectrum use the gated sweep control terminal the GATE IN terminal on the analyzer s rear panel for gate control The sweep starts at the TTL level High or Open and stops at Low Set the input signal and the gate control signal as specified below Input signal Ati Ato Gate contro signal rmm TU NT RT 15 us 2206000 50 ps 180 pS or more or more or more or more or more Ate i 1 5 more 1 us or more Note When measuring noise set the detection mode to SAMPLE 6 45 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MA
271. ay Trace Go No Go Test Function 7 89 1 Menu explanallOt acea XU EE 7 89 7 14 Measurement Window Function 7 91 1 Window horizontal axis direction and window sweep setup 7 92 2 Window vertical axis direction window sweep setup 7 93 3 Measurement example using the window 7 94 8 TV DEMODULATION FUNCTION OPT72 Standard equipment on 94341 86 65 8 1 8 1 Notes on Using TV Monitoring Function 8 1 1 For single channel signal input 8 1 2 Formuluplo cHanrneb INDUL 3 534 3 3 eee 9 ee ae Red ios 8 1 8 2 Display of TV Monitor Screen Med 8 3 1 uiuunt mdr 8 3 2 Adjustment of TV monitor screen 8 4 3 Channel Sep aede see e RC RR nne 8 4 4 Preguenoy SOlUD uuo ge gm Rx IUe 8 4 8 3 Adjustment of TV Monitor Screen 8 5 9 TV CHANNEL FUNCTION OPT72 OPT78 Standard equipment on USAT gh keen wad 9 1 9 1 Channel Setup TV Key 9 1 1 Picture frequency setup 9 1 2 START frequency STOP frequency setup 9 1 3 The case when the frequency corresponding to the specified channel is different
272. bandwidth is decreased it takes an increasing amount of time to sweep through the same frequency range If the sweep speed is too fast the signal level measured at each frequency drops and an UNCAL message appears on the display Video bandwidth VBW Decreasing the video bandwidth has the effect of averaging the input signal to reduce the noise riding on it or to reduce the noise floor This can be useful when searching for a signal buried in noise etc The VBW of the analyzer can be set between 10 Hz and 3 MHz 31 0 dBi 92255 SNE NONE SLOGANS TOY SASH ERGY gt Gnd ned ICE PE eee U SPAN 0 E 50 00 ms VBW 1 2 Figure 6 3 VBW 1 MHz Figure 6 4 VBW 1 kHz Noise averaging is done by low pass filtering the signal from the detector an approximately 10 dB improvement in S N can be obtained To do this noise averaging most effectively the video bandwidth must be chosen based on the resolution bandwidth setting In general a VBW of 1 10 or less of the RBW is desirable If the VBW is set too narrowly because of the filter time constant the spectral levels measured will decrease from their true values To warn of this the UNCAL message will appear on the display such a case increasing the sweep time will allow the chosen VBW to be used accurately 6 2 Apr 1 96 4 500 011 MHz SPAN 5 ag RBW 3 VBW 1 kHz 4 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERA
273. be ee ee Saved file contents display with SHOW FILE function Front panel preset function key F 4 Mar 1 97 7 37 7 38 7 39 7 40 7 41 7 42 7 43 7 43a 7 A3b 7 44 7 45 7 46 7 47 7 48 7 49 7 50 4 51 7 52 7 53 7 54 7 55 7 56 8 1 8 2 8 3 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL List of Illustrations Front panel CONFIG function key The power supply voltage is in a normal state at DC CHECK ON When it is not in a normal state the display blinks and the buzzer sounds When the power supply voltage is low at DC CHECK OFF the display blinks Front panel COPY function key Front panel calibration function key Front panel LABEL Tunctl n KOV uus uc Em ED SODO seas twa ed en eae LHDer ON uva diat C doe oa doi E CHE E Ke PCR Front panel EMG TUNCHON KEY ov uud Front panel UTILITY function key tH1722 antenna factor 2s Ru 22s oe Ed weg Gmina Gata Cary Sw Table edit mode 2555 VR CR ees Be PASS FAIL funct
274. be envelope the Resolution Bandwidth should be satisfy the following inequalities Pulse repetition frequency 1 7 lt Resolution bandwidth 0 1 c Carrier frequency fc The measurement accuracy of the carrier frequency fc is determined by the pulse width When is small the main lobe spreads and it is more difficult to establish its center In order to display the center clearly it is necessary to set the SPAN DIV wider than r Th s gives a measurement accuracy of the carrier frequency fc which is equal to the center frequency accuracy for that SPAN DIV 6 30 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements 3 Peak power As long as the spectrum analyzer resolution bandwidth satisfies the following inequality Pulse repetition frequency x 1 7 lt Resolution bandwidth lt 0 2 Then the true peak power dBm can be found from the apparent peak level displayed dBm by the analyzer where a the pulse attenuation factor is a 2004 1 5 X RBW 4 Average power Paye The average power Pave in dBm can be found from X T Where as before PRF is the pulse repetition frequency in Hz and is the pulse width in seconds 6 31 _ Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 5 Occupied Bandwidth OBW Measurement 6 5 Occupied Band
275. be used This command is output from the RS 232 port RETORN P m et Return to the previous menu 3 Plotter output configuration menu SHIFT CONFIG Display the printer configuration setup menu For details see 5 3 1 Plotter Output Select the appropriate device type by moving the cursor gt 1 Select the display elements that you want to be plotted by moving the 1 cursor gt 7 66 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function initialization Function e e e e e e m o o e o o g p 5 iste ats ara aTe a ate QQO ITA n a T 1 been E This menu choice is only available when the F set to Table Select the table of data to be plotted by moving the cursor Display submenu for setting the plotter output format selections are made by moving the cursor gt m Set the paper size e M M dl Select the plotter pen count Select whether or how the display screen should be divided into smaller parts to plot LOCATION Select whether how the display screen should be zd located 2 53 op 959005 Return to the previous menu Sele
276. bility of the LOCAL signal is degraded and the frequency drift appears On the contrary the signal purity is improved 7 71 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function initialization Function 7 8 8 Battery Check Function SHIFT CONFIG NEXT 1 Press the keys in the left order Power supply voltage that is battery voltage to make this analyzer operate is checked Turns on and off the battery check function When this function is set to ON the power supply voltage is displayed on the screen and the boundary value of the power supply voltage can be set The boundary value can be set between 10 0V and 12V inclusive If the power supply voltage becomes lower than the specified boundary value the warning buzzer sounds and the display blinks When this function is set to OFF the power supply voltage is not displayed However the power supply voltage decreases and when there is a possibility that the decreasing voltage falling to about 10 2V has an effect on the operation of this analyzer the message as shown in Figure 7 39 is displayed pi Devi 14 4V MP 10454 Mauss i H coy qul ORS 5 4 4 E GF 30 00 MHz SPAN 10 00 30 00 MHz SPAN 10 00 100 KHz VBW 100 kHz SWP 50 ms ABW 168 Vh foo SWP 5 ms P d Figure 7 38 The power supply voltage is in Faure 7 39 When the power supply a normal
277. bytes Selecting an automatic file update SHIFT CONFIG Press When selecting ON The file number 15 automatically updated When selecting OFF The file number is not updated Selecting bitmap data to be created SHIFT CONFIG Press When selecting NORM A monochrome bitmap data is created When selecting INV A invert monochrome bitmap data is created 5 19c Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data 2 Memory card output execution Outputting data to the memory card SHIFT COPY Press The screen data is output to the memory card on the conditions set in the 1 Memory card output procedure Note Outputting data to the memory card can not be canceled halfway 5 19d Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data 5 3 4 Video Printer Output CAUTION Please read the instruction manual for the video printer before you begin to use it 1 Connection to a video printer The COMP VIDEO Connector on the rear panel of this equipment outputs a composite video signal having NTSC standardized amplitude of about 1Vp p When used with a BNC input Video Printer this makes for a very simple means of obtaining a hard copy of the display screen The analyzer and video printer connection diagram is shown in Figure 5 21 Rear panel U4941 Video Printer Rear Panel BNC BNC Cable Video Output connector Video Input connector Figu
278. cc m Ay Set the the window to a desirable position by using ten keys unit keys keys and 52 window is displayed when delay sweep is set to OFF Even if the window is outside the screen the internal data is set Delay sweep time Only the right side line moves Hesolution is common to the sweep time e setting range extends from 4 5msec to 1000sec Default value 4 5msec Delay sweep time e Figure 7 22 Delay position Figure 7 23 Delay sweep time lt 7 40 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section 20220 e OOo am ap am aum uum UND UNA GEM GEM NEM GEM Wm cum mda cd ded Gm um Ge Cum Jm um C GU 25055 906 IS utat Turns on and off the delay sweep mode Dismiss the window and executes the delay sweep Hefer to Figure 7 25 The delay sweep time of the window is set as the sweep time OFF Releases the delay sweep and resets the sweep time to the former value Refer to Figure 7 24 n Mau 31 10 23 9 suse el d pice We GOS WAS 100 kHz SWP 4 x Seen s AANA nama AA AAAA A iU NIA AAAA A AA Figure 7 24 Setup mode Figure 7 25 Measurement mode Delay swee
279. ccessory battery and option Approx 148 height x 291 wide x 330 depth mm Excluding the projecting legs connector etc le Dimensions External memory 2 slot upper panel Connector JEIDA Ver4 1 PCMCIA Rel 2 0 13 14 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 3 U4341 Specifications 13 3 U4341 Specifications 1 Frequency Frequency range Frequency readout accuracy Start Stop CF Marker frequency 9kHz to 2 2GHz X span accuracy 0 15 RBW 50 Count frequency marker Resolution Count accuracy 1Hz to 1kHz marker frequency X frequency reference accuracy 1LSD 5Hz S N 25dB 50kHz lt SPAN lt 10MHz RBW gt 100kHz 2 10 6 1 10 5 0 C to 50 C Frequency reference accuracy Frequency span Hange Accuracy 50kHz to 2 4GHz ZERO lt 5 SPAN gt 100kHz Frequency stability Residual FM Drift 3kHz p p 100ms lt 10kHz Frequency is fixed 30 minutes after power ON Sweep time 50ms to 5s temperature is fixed Sideband noise le Resolution bandwidth 3 dB Hange Bandwidth range accuracy lt 100dBc Hz 20kHz offset 1kHz to 3MHz 1 3 sequence lt 20 1kHz to 1 2 lt 25 3MHz lt 15 1 6048 10Hz to 3MHz
280. ceived at the receiver spectrum analyzer input is identical to that of Eg if Eg is transmitted to the receiver without impedance mismatching If the signal s completely reflected due to mismatching of the receiver and returned to the transmitter the ratio of reflection 1 e the reflection factor can be expressed as follows assuming Eg as the reflected wave size Reflection factor m Reflected wave Progressive wave Eo Return loss dB 20log Eg dB VSWR En The relationship to the reflection factor will be VSWR 1 ml y 1 ml The VSWR will be in the range 1 to 5 The matching state is improved as the value approaches 1 Signal to be measured Spectrum analyzer Transmitter Receiver ee Eo Progressive Reflected wave wave Figure 8 VSWR YIG tuned Oscillator This was first reported by Griffiths 1946 Garnet ferrites such as YIG Yttrium iron garnet monocrystal show extremely sharp electron spin resonance in the microwave area and has a resonance frequency in proportion to the direct current magnetic field applied over a wide frequency range Therefore YIG crystals can be used for wide range electronic tuning changing the current exciting the elector magnet that generates direct current magnetic field YIG crystals are used in the local sweep generator of the spectrum analyzer and in other devices such as auto microwave frequency counters A 7 Apr 1 96
281. ch input characters will be drawn When 1 is selected Upper case letters and numerals ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ 0123456789 When 2 is selected Lower case letters and numerals abcdefghijkImnopqrstuvwxyz 0123456789 When 3 is selected Symbols _ amp lt gt _ 1 gt 1 Select the desired character with the data knob C and set with the units keys For each press of this softkey the item is changed Enter a space blank Clear the all labels being displayed ON Label display is made in the scale See Figure 7 43a t is always displayed at the plotter printer video output OFF Label display is not output to the screen See Figure 7 43b When the plotter function is used the label is displayed in the top of the screen 7 79 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 12 EMC Function REF 0 0 dBm uw Li a di E IWIBVI SPAN 100 0 VBW 1 50 ms VBW 1 MHz Figure 7 43b Label display OFF OX coo ARS m m OU mh eh m Rho el RETURN Return to the previous menu 7 12 Function Standard equipment U4941 series U4342 series Figure 7 44 Front panel EMC function key Set the detection mode as required by the CI
282. ch variable 30 QSPA CF A MZ Sets the center frequency to 10 MHz 40 QSPA SP B MZ Sets the frequency span to 2 MHz 50 PRINT QSPA AT C DB Sets the attenuator 20 dB 60 END 11 11 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 4 Command Syntax Listener Example PC 5 Save the set value in memory card of drive with the file name and execute the recalling X A Ap wei qum em num um um MAL um um um dae M Gum a nci um um um 4884 m m m cmn t cm s 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 8 SV A SAVEDATA Executes the saving 30 PRINT 98 IP Executes the master reset 40 PRINT 8 RC A SAVEDATA Executes the recalling 50 Example PC 6 Set the softkey menu display OFF 20 PRINT 8 MND OFF Sets the softkey menu display to OFF 30 PRINT 98 CF30MZ SP20MZ 40 PRINT 8 PS 50 END Example PC 7 Input the limit line 1 table and set it ON ma EEN 8 PD f a 7 gt 2 PRINT 8 IP 30 PRINT 8 LMTADEL Del
283. channel MHz MHz MHz 90 00 to 96 00 96 00 to 102 00 102 00 to 108 00 108 00 to 114 00 114 00 to 120 00 120 00 to 126 00 126 00 to 132 00 132 00 to 138 00 138 00 to 144 00 144 00 to 150 00 150 00 to 156 00 156 00 to 162 00 164 00 to 170 00 170 00 to 176 00 176 00 to 182 00 182 00 to 188 00 188 00 to 194 00 192 00 to 198 00 198 00 to 204 00 204 00 to 210 00 210 00 to 216 00 216 00 to 222 00 222 00 to 228 00 230 00 to 236 00 236 00 to 242 00 242 00 to 248 00 248 00 to 254 00 252 00 to 258 00 258 00 to 264 00 264 00 to 270 00 9 22 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table cont d Analyzer s Channel Frequency range Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz C31 270 00 to 276 00 C32 276 00 to 282 00 C33 282 00 to 288 00 C34 288 00 to 294 00 C35 294 00 to 300 00 C36 300 00 to 306 00 C37 306 00 to 312 00 C38 312 00 to 318 00 C39 318 00 to 324 00 C40 324 00 to 330 00 C41 330 00 to 336 00 C42 336 00 to 342 00 C43 342 00 to 348 00 C44 348 00 to 354 00 C45 354 00 to 360 00 C46 360 00 to 366 00 C47 366 00 to 372 00 C48 372 00 to 378 00 C49 378 00 to 384 00 C50 384 00 to 390 00 C51 390 00 to 396 00 C52 396 00 to 402 00 C53 402 00 to 408 00 C54 408 00 to 414 00 C55 414 00 to 420 00 C56 420 00 to 426 00 C57 426 00 to 432 00 C58 432 00 to 438 00 C59 438 00 to 444 00 C60 444 00 to 450 00 C61 450 00 to 456 00 C62 456 00 to 462 00 C63 462 00 to 468 00 9
284. ct AUTO MNL which of the Plot Divisions should be plotted In AUTO the plot division will be determined automatically based on what was plot last In Manual the user can choose which partition of the screen to plot Toggle the plotter TALK TALK only ADRS 01 address 01 4 In TALK the analyzer becomes a TALK ONLY device and the plotter should be set to LISTEN ONLY When ADRS 01 is selected then the plotter address can be specified with the numeric key and units keys the NS step keys or the data knob E Be sure the plotter is actually set to the same address CAUTION For further details refer to 5 3 1 Plotter Output 7 67 20 37 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function initialization Function 4 Memory card output configuration menu SHIFT CONFIG MEN i FILE 1 Display the memory card output configuration 5259 i 3d CONFIG 1 setup menu For details see 5 3 3 Memory card Output 1G Set a filename or the file number of 0001 to 9999 to store in the memory card The file number can be selected using the ten keys keys or the knob Select an automatic file update When ON is selected The file number is automatically updated When OFF is selected file number is not updated Select bitmap data to be created When NORM is selected A monochrome bitmap data is created When INV is selected invert monochrome bitmap
285. ction data and display the Correction ON OFF menu Display the menu to edit the correction table data See 7 13 2 Limit Line Function for how to create the table When ON the custom antenna factor data is use to correct measurement display When OFF no compensation is done Select whether the custom data table contains antenna factor data or level correction data applies the antenna factor correction and the vertical axis units become dB V m LVL the level correction is applied but no scale changes occur Return to the previous menu 7 83 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 13 Utility Functions CAUTION The level data of the correction data table is available to input the range of 70 0 to 70 0 dBm The total correction range of frequency characteristic correction antenna correction and correction table is 7DIV on the screen For example the total 7 dB 70 dB in 10 dB DIV is available in the 1 dB DIV setting If the correction exceeding this range is conducted an error message is displayed the analyzer s dynamic range on the screen will be degraded if the level correction is conducted to the minus direction 7 13 2 Limit Line Function The limit line function displays two lines on the display they could be set for example to show permissible upper and lower bounds on the spectral amplitudes In any case comparison of measured data with the limit lines is very easy 1
286. cy characteristic calibration data is measured for each analyzer at the factory and stored internally When ON is selected here the frequency calibration data is used to compensate measured data Choose whether or not to use the data collected by the CALIBRATION Function to correct raw measurement data T 77 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 11 Label Function 7 11 Label Function Figure 7 42 Front panel LABEL function key A display spectrum or waveform can be labeled with this function The input label can be used for a plotter output and a memory function 1 Labeling procedure SHIFT LABEL D Press and the label input screen Figure 7 43 appears 000 MHZ SPA kHz VBW 10 KHz Figure 7 43 Label input screen label location can be moved with the step keys The cursor moves right when is pushed and left when is pushed 7 78 Apr 1 96 Characters can be chosen from the numerals upper and lower case letters or symbols the character set is chosen with the Sa 12 3 1 Use the data knob to select each character in the label pushing a units key to RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 11 Label Function 1 2 confirm each selection 2 Label menu SHIFT LABEL po m 229 1 1 ta ET LBL DISP 4 ON OFF Y The input can be corrected with the backspace key CAUTION Select the character set from whi
287. d the following menu appears m T 7 CONFIR Overwrites the screen data on the existing filename 2 CANCEL Cancels the overwrite T 7 74 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 9 Copy Function 2 Printer plotter output cancellation SHIFT COPY ord hui ressing CANCEL enables to cancel the printer plotter output CAUTION 1 It is not possible to simultaneously output to both the printer and plotter 2 If the output device is not completely or correctly configured the copy function may not operate Always check that CONFIG has been done 7 74a Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 9 Copy Function This page has been intentionally left blank 7 74b Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 10 Calibration Function 7 10 Calibration Function Figure 7 41 Front panel calibration function key Calibration data for the analyzer can be obtained by using the Calibration Function This data can then be used to correct the raw measurement data to achieve even more accuracy from the analyzer 1 Calibration Items Calibration is done for any or all of the following seven items Absolute level error resolution bandwidth 3 MHz 1 dB div calibration reference signal 20 dBm Lovel error in switching IF filters resolution bandwidth 1 kHz to
288. d specification not supported ERR 413 NOP CARD Memory card error due to incorrect memory card specification not supported ERR 4 414 NOP CARD Memory card error due to incorrect memory card specification not supported Memory card error due to attribute memory Access failed ERR 422 Memory card error m to dead ERR 500 500 enon card Memory card internal error error ERR 501 Memory card internal error Note Error codes 400 to 423 are generated if memory card standards are out of JEIDA IC Memory Card Guide Line Ver 4 1 Memory card error due to out of the JEIDA Ver 4 1 standard Memory card error due to out of the JEIDA Ver 4 1 standard If an error code is generated and the memory card cannot be used correctly contact to our service engineer A 28 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A4 List of Massages cont d ERR 502 Memory card internal error ERR 503 Too many files Three files or more were opened open ERR 504 Can t access Directory was accessed directory ERR 505 File is write Write failed due to a read only file protected ERR 506 Card is write Write failed due to a write protected memory protected ERR 507 File already open Desired file was already opened ERR 508 No such file Access failed due to non exist file File is full ERR 50
289. dB 10 dB 0 2 dB 1 dB 596 of reference level lt 1 0 dB 100 kHz to 2 GHz lt 1 5 dB 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz lt 1 0 dB at reference bandwidth MHz 50 ms to 1000 s and manual sweep 13 11 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 2 U4941N Specifications 6 Demodulation Spectrum demodulation Modulation type Audio output AM FM Speaker and phone jack with volume control adjustable 13 12 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 2 U4941N Specifications 7 Input Output RF input Connector Impedance Preamplifier OFF N type female 750 nominal VSWR lt 1 5 100 kHz to 2 GHz VSWR x 2 0 9 kHz to 2 2 INPUT gt 10 dB VSWR 2 1 10 MHz to 2 GHz INPUT gt 0 dB Preamplifier ON e 10 MHz reference input Connector Impedance Input range BNC female rear panel 500 nominal 8 dBm to 16 dBm Video output Connector Impedance Amplitude 750 termination BNC female rear panel 75Q nominal AC coupled Approx 1Vp p 750 termination composite video signal e External trigger input Connector Impedance Trigger level BNC female rear panel 10 nominal DC coupled level je Gate input Connector BNC female rear panel Impedance 10 nominal Sweep stop during TTL l
290. does not include a protected eround terminal Be sure to use fuses rated for the voltage in question Do not use this instrument with the case open Do not place anything on the product and do not apply excessive pressure to the product Al so do not place flower pots or other containers containing liquid such as chemicals near this Satety 1 Safety Summary product When the product has ventilation outlets do not stick or drop metal or easily flammable ob jects into the ventilation outlets When using the product a cart fix it with belts to avoid its drop When connecting the product to peripheral equipment turn the power off Caution Symbols Used Within this Manual Symbols indicating items requiring caution which are used in this manual are shown below to gether with their meaning DANGER Indicates an item where there is a danger of serious personal injury death or seri ous injury WARNING Indicates an item relating to personal safety or health CAUTION Indicates an item relating to possible damage to the product or instrument or relat ing to a restriction on operation Safety Marks on the Product The following safety marks can be found on Advantest products AN ATTENTION Refer to manual Protective ground earth terminal DANGER High voltage AN CAUTION Risk of electric shock Replacing Parts with Limited Life Safety 2 The following parts us
291. dy for data indicates that data can high state or cannot low state be received NDAC Not data accepted indicates that data has high state or has not low state been received 11 3 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 2 GPIB Specitications Bus control lines these control the flow of information through the bus and use the following signals ATN Attention determines whether the signal on the data line is a command or other information IFC Interface clear clears the interface End of identify signals the completion of information transfer SRQ Service request makes a service request to the controller REN Remote enable enables remote control of a device 2 Connector analyzer has a 24 pin GPIB connector Amphenor product number 57 20240 D35A or its equivalent The following figure shows the connector and its pin assignments GND GND DAY Figure 11 2 GPIB connector pin assignment 11 4 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 2 GPIB Specifications 3 Specifications Code Logic level Signal line termination To Bus Line Driver Bus cable length Addresses ASCII except for packed formatting which uses binary code Logical 0 High state 2 4 V or above Logical 1 Low state 0 4 V or below all sixteen bus lines are terminated as shown below From Driver To Receiver
292. e 1 3 B TRACE A 2602 2323 2326 964 2598 1678 222221732 1038 1018 1718 VB 1004 SW weet od F 05 OIRO Loo ed et JOJN CO Go 792 11 0 002 0 051 0 003 _ 0 004 04 0 0531 53 0 5 09054 54 0 006 0 5 1 2 54 6 5 5 0 008 5 7 5 8 5 9 8 1 6 2 e e ce E 58 1 1 0012 09 3 0 062 62 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 1 96 FrameMaker English Format 2 Memory card CSV type 48D159E26AC 1234567 1234567 D Trace data is saved with internal data form Data value 2720 is REF LEVEL Expres sion of conversion from trace data to dB value is as follows Level dB REF 10 DIV 1 DATA 2720 REF REF LEVEL set value DIV dB set value DATA Trace data set value Trace data enters in from the second line to 702nd line The data in the second line corresponds to school left end and the 702nd line to right end Q The set code is specified by GPIB code Listener code or Header CF Center frequency Reference level Unit dBm 3 Error code of ID list J column 0 No error 1 CRC error 2 UW error Apr 20 97 A1 3 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION _ AD Memory card CSV type a sane ath eats F
293. e Marker movement between trace Next peak Search oxecultion ew ee we POY SOTO SEO Se oat UP GEIN wate ee dee LOW setting mE Location of measurement section keys on the front panel Waveform at the setup mode The window is moved to a part to be expended Waveform measured with delay sweep ON The window part is expanded Delay DOSIUDH sto ios dabo gei ee o irata dU gt Delay sweep time QU d Setup mode Delay sweep OFF Measurement mode Delay sweep PEAK LISE T d oes Eve dee tg NAMEN IER Y a dead S EE SMIE OWBBD usque ACER OR T e Mae Ra a qe o DAO COWL cce UR Edo d De t o e wor See Third order intermodulation distortion measurement AM modulation wave spectrum Log scale AM modulation wave spectrum Linear scale AM modulation accuracy measurement in time domain Location of the user defined key on the front panel ser detined display udi T e e x function keys of the memory card on the front panel Pile liSt OISDIBV 428 3 25 4 t
294. e RIGHT for the next peak Search to the LEFT for the next peak Display the following menu Find the smallest level on the trace being displayed Move the marker there and display the frequency and level data The opposite of NEXT PEAK for each press of this key a search is conducted to ascend to the next smallest trace level Enable Continuous Peak Searching When on peak search is done after each sweep and the frequency and level are displayed When OFF is selected the continuous peak search is canceled m 229920055 7 31 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 3 Marker Section Functions Set the amplitude condition for NEXT PEAK search For further details refer to the procedure 2 described later Modify the peak search level For further details refer to the procedure 3 described later Return to the previous menu 2 Amplitude condition settings for NEXT PEAK search To execute a next peak search set up the amplitude condition for the waveform to be searched with the numeric key and the units keys For example entering the value 1 div corresponds to 1 division on the horizontal axis In case of many waveforms shown in Figure 7 15 it is necessary to treat each signal as a single amplitude target for next peak search 50 that the next peak search is executed to find the entire waveform amplitude data 100 0011 MHz
295. e assignment will be made by moving the arrow gt at the left side of the display with the data knob In the example to the left SF3 has been selected dii D m Shea a n LI Qe lt ASO CT 075 a TES 07 19 en SBA o 7 51 1 97 F I IP RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 5 User Defined Functions Next we will chose something from the member window to be assigned to the key chosen in step e MEMBER Press p ACTIVE _ ito make the lower window active and make a selection either with a panel key push or by moving the arrow up and down with INITIAL i RODES the 7 La ter keys or the data knob B RETURN 7 Here we choose dB DOWN from the soft menu MEAS2 Push ENTER 1 to execute the soft group modification or addition the left we see that dB DOWN has been assigned to SF3 in the USER key As long as assignment is not changed initialized DEFINE then pushing execute the dB DOWN function soft group reset to the default menu pushing will 1 Note If a Member name has in front of it then that item cannot be modified or have additions made to it 7 52 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 6 Save Recall Functions of
296. e channel spacing position The display area at the top left of the screen will show the relative channel spacing and the adjacent channel leakage power REF 18 0 d MER 50 f KHz SPAN 200 0 1 kHz SWP 20 Figure 6 33 GRAPH mode measurement of adjacent channel leakage power CAUTION This function will not operate if the channel bandwidth is not set or is not set correctly 6 37 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 7 Television Carrier Signal Measuremenis 6 7 Television Carrier Signal Measurements CAUTION The input impedance of U4941 4941PHS 4341 4342 4342PHS is 50 Q Use a 75 to 50 adapter or other impedance converter as necessary to match the U4941 4941PHS 4341 4342 4342PHS impedance to the rest of the system under test and measure the television broadcast signals with dB unit type As may be seen in Figure 6 34 one broadcast television channel is composed of a video signal carrier fy audio signal carrier fA and color signal sub carrier fa fy is Amplitude Modulated and fa is Frequency Modulated after Amplitude Modulation fg is processed into vestigial sideband signal three components are combined to make the broadcast signal The bandwidth of one channel is 6 MHz With respect to the video carrier fy fA is spaced 4 5 MHz above and fs is 3 58 MHz above AT do EN ditt Ad ATO AUC LLL VY ane i TUR TP
297. e cursor with Ca x means 0 or f Input of ten keys for of ten keys for 0 and _ of ten keys for 1 4 8 Apr 1 96 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION x LIST ID FLTR a Eo ume 9 2 INPUT t Apr 1 96 4 input hexadecimal system input ID FLTR BIN HEX Selection of binary system e RETURN CS OMBRE eee KKEK _ Binary BIN input 1 Select HEX input KOK k Hexadecimal HEX INPUT CS 1011 0011 Return to PHS basic menu RETURN RETURN Hereafter displaying ID list with left aligned only the codes of CS ID with 59 at the head remain Input CS ID Output CS ID 56789ABCDEF 59876543210 543210FEDCB 59876543210 09901234567 59901234567 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 4 10 B iD list The creation of list Create ID list each time after the completion of sweep in order to get a match between mea surement waveform data and list data in FREE RUN trigger mode use SINGLE sweep mode Level measurement Level in ID list shows 1 center point level of the slot The levelis calculated from waveform data Therefore the point data outside the scale range cannot be measured RBW Use it with more than 300 kHz swp time Use it with less than 400 ms However use it with under 100 ms when burst waveforms are adjacent on the screen due to horizontal axis resol
298. e greater the input attenuation the worse the S N would become Therefore for simply measuring signal levels the attenuator should be set to the smallest value consistent with a mixer input level below 10 dBm 6 6 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 1 Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Common to Measurements Spurious response Whenever a signal is applied to the input mixer harmonic distortion necessarily occurs due to the mixer non linearity This analyzer generated harmonic distortion is an important error factor in distortion measurements and sets the ultimate limit in distortion measurements possible with the analyzer In the typical spectrum analyzer it is the second order harmonic and third order intermodulation distortions that create spurious response problems Second order harmonic distortion Suppose an absolutely pure signal with no higher harmonic components is applied to the analyzer They any second or higher harmonic spectral components that appear in the display must be being generated inside the input mixer The harmonic distortion is defined as the ratio of the spurious harmonic signal to the fundamental frequency level Usually the problem is the appearance of a harmonic at twice the frequency of the fundamental second order harmonic distortion for the analyzer is shown in Table 6 4 REF 0 0 dBm 400 MHz SPI T 300 kHz VBW 100 SWP aU Figure 6 8 Second order harmonic distortion
299. e observed Please read it before you begin using the analyzer 3 Panels This chapter briefly describes the controls and connectors etc on the analyzer s front and rear and top panels 4 Easy Use Instructions For first time users from initial power up through measurement completion this chapter provides simple easily understood directions 5 Method of Operation Basic analyzer operation hard copy of display data and the use of the memory cards are ali explained in this chapter 6 Measurement A gentle introduction to the features and operation of the analyzer is Examples given through step by step explanation of the measurement procedures for some of the most important applications Each of the analyzer functions is described in detail 8 Domodulation Function 72 The 14341 series is equipped with the function by standard OPT78 The U4341 series is equipped with the function by standard 10 Tracking Generator Function 44342 series is equipped with the function by standard 11 GPIB Indicates the GPIB codes m 12 Troubleshooting Q amp A Simple diagnostic checks and suggested fixes if trouble should arise 13 Specifications Complete specifications for the analyzer and its components and accessories APPENDIX 2 Before Using the First Time Glossary of spectrum analyzer related terminology lists of softkey menus and error messages INDEX EXTERNAL V
300. e softkey menu cleared will be redisplayed SHIFT e Push the e key and then the key to turn off the back light of the screen To turn on the back light push any key 2 Function key section 23 qr A TRACE DEFINE SAVE C 69 E MEAS2 REF LEVEL REMOTE ep in Off ET 858 555 kal ADRS Figure 5 3 Panel keys in the function section This section is composed entirely of the panel key that are involved in the fundamental setup and operation of the analyzer Fundamental keys The seven keys shown at the left of Figure 5 3 are called the Fundamental keys They are used to make the basic setup for the analyzer Miscellaneous operational keys This group is found to the right of Figure 5 3 There are eight operating keys in the group Power Preset Shift LCL Marker Control and Save Recall function The SHIFT key is used to select functions indicated in BLUE letters above the various keys For example to execute the MKR MARKER TO function first push and then the 5 3 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 1 Analyzer Control Key Functions 3 DATA ENTRY section 4 2 ENTRY SE en CONFIG UTIL SBS A 593 CO DOr Figure 5 4 DATA ENTRY section of the front panel Data for analyzer setup is entered using these keys There are three different ways of data
301. easure a wanted signal in minimum sweep time by using ZOOM function To measure the down CS ID cycle To perform cumulative operation with measurement data Measurement of down CS burst ertor rate Median value processing of down CS receiving level Average value processing of down CS receiving level Maximum and minimum values processing of down CS receiving level 5 1 PHS 10 DEMODULATION FUNCTION 5 2 Soft menu configuration 5 2 Soft menu configuration PHS PHS Pressing this key enters into PHS mode and the screen like Fig 5 1 appears LED lamp lights to show it is PHS mode p 5 boes Figure 5 1 PHS Mode Screen in PHS mode the followings are set Frequency span to zero span Display range to 8 div Level unit to dBuV Note 1 Manual mode cannot be set in PHS mode 2 Limit line function cannot be used in PHS mode 3 in the PHS mode use the trace A mode for saving the ID list or for using the IM marker 4 When frequency span is set to other than 0 PHS mode is released 9 2 Apr 1 96 1 96 ID LIST amp SET a S AE numm mH TTVPITTETTTARARPATAREMATRTNASTAARTAM AAA ERO eee rrr Mer u u a ww naen PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION ID list of signal measured and demodulated in 1 sweep time is shown Fig 5 2 shows an example Display of ID LIST It sh
302. easurements with the frequency counter mode for more accurate measurements marker frequency counter mode measures the marker s existing signal frequency at the direct standard oscillator accuracy 1 10 5 for the analyzer deferred from the frequency measurement with normal marker mode Pressing the following keys 30 000 MHz 42 T 18 67 dBm 10 gt MEAS1 Press the keys in order and set the frequency resolution to 1 kHz The waveform shown in Figure 6 11 is gained and at the upper left we see the counter frequency measured at the 1 kHz resolution CAUTION Figure 6 11 Frequency counter 1 Frequency Counter mode cannot measure correctly when the signal peak level to be measured the 50 kHz 10 MHz and RBWz 100 kHz is 25 dB or more from the noise level When the span or the RBW is set out of the above range the CNT display blinks It shows the counter cannot be normally operated under the environment If more accurate measurements are required connect the 10 MHz reference signal source of the external device to the 10 MHz reference signal input terminal of the analyzer rear panel In this case the measurement accuracy is set to the 10 MHz reference signal of the external device connected The 10 MHz reference signal input range of the analyzer
303. ed But each time the center CH is changed span return to the best span for the channel MNL When the center channel is input with this mode sets the picture frequency as the center frequency and does not change the frequency span 9 13 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL _ 9 3 Frequency Span Setup REF 0 0 apm 103 25 MHz A when 1ch of the center channel is input with CH AUTO with CH MANUAL 40 0 REF 40 0 NE UNE OR L enema n ludi TT UNES a inne T an q yp ryimraetett CON MUT ET m T m iti EN En im NU mi TERT Mind mA en n 92 00 Maz i 5 255 8 00 MHz 100 kHz 100 fis GF 3 REW 106 fu 100 kHz 20 2div 1CH Frequency Bandwidth 2div When the center channel is input with CH AUTO the center of 1CH frequency bandwidth becomes the center frequency The frequency span is set up with the best value When the center channel is input with CH MANUAL sets the picture frequency as the center frequency and does not change the frequency span Figure 9 8 Center channel setup example VHF in Japan 9 14 Apr 1 96 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 4 Marker Channel 9 4 Marker Channel When it i
304. ed in the instrument are main parts with limited life Replace the parts listed below before their expected lifespan has expired to maintain the perfor mance and function of the instrument Note that the estimated lifespan for the parts listed below may be shortened by factors such as the environment where the instrument is stored or used and how often the instrument is used The parts inside are not user replaceable For a part replacement please contact the Advantest sales office for servicing Each product may use parts with limited life For more information refer to the section in this document where the parts with limited life are described Safety Summary Main Parts with Limited Life Disk Mounted Products The operational warnings are listed below Do not move shock and vibrate the product while the power is turned on Reading or writing data in the hard disk unit is performed with the memory disk turning at a high speed It is a very delicate process store and operate the products under the following environmental conditions An arca with no sudden temperature changes area away from shock or vibrations An area free from moisture dirt or dust An arca away from magnets or an instrument which generates a magnetic field Make back ups of important data The data stored in the disk may become damaged if the product is mishandled The hard disc has a limited life span which depends on the operati
305. een and sound signal from the speaker at the same time Corresponds to almost all TV standards throughout the world Color system corresponds to NTSC PAL SECAM include 4 43MHz NTSC The system corresponds to M B G D K K1 1 L L1 Contains CHANNEL PLAN by country to select channel Corresponds to the reverse spectrum reversed signal is useful to check transmitter and IF Displays menu and parameter on the screen at the same time with OSD On Screen Display function Adjusts the followings Bright Contrast Tint OSD bright HUE control NTSC mode Available rear output TV sound output TV video output Composite Avoid confusion with video composite out Available rear input External audio input External video input Composite NTSC PAL SECAM TV board is powered only when it is in use order to save battery when it is not in use typical TV monitor consumption about 1 5W 1 4 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 1 1 Outline of the Analyzer 1 1 3 U4342 series 14342 series is U4941 series with a tracking generator A tracking generator is a device that generates signals of the same frequency as the sweep frequency of a spectrum analyzer A tracking generator allows the measurement of filters or amplifiers This tracking generator outputs frequencies in the range of 100kHz to 2 2GHz The level of an output frequency varies from OdBm to 31dBm in 1dB steps The output signal level of U4342N is
306. eform is drifted set the VIEW waveform pressing the keys in order the marker display appears to start the measurement for the third order intermodulation distortion We see the Figure 6 16 Third order intermodulation rneasurement result on the upper left of distortion the screen as shown in Figure 6 16 6 16 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 3 Level Measurement 6 3 3 Measuring Minute Signal Level The analyzer incorporates the pre amplifier with the gain of 20 dB or more at frequency width range of 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz Therefore the input sensibility increases and the very minute level signal of 130 dBm or less can be analyzed Also a gain is not considered at level measurement since the level frequency characteristic at pre amplifier operating is calibrated before forwarding MEAS1 Press the keys in order The pre amplifier starts and the input attenuator is automatically set to 0 dB when the input attenuator is set to AUTO The reference level is set according to the pre amplifier OFF setting MKR 580 004 MHz 4 78 dBm 1008 SENS REF 40 0 dBm ATT TE aed Oo Mz Tf REF 40 ON huc sep me NM mi BEN MAH a i Wem 000 MH 000 MHz 9 ms KHz Figure 6 17 Pre amplifier OFF Figure 6 18 Pre amplifier ON CAUTION 1 The 1 dB gain compression level at pre amp
307. elsen tad CUTE D DL Gee EE TIES RE EEE Gee Le ITE at MEHR RARE HAE QI EAD Ee Graph by data saved e Graph by vertical axis dB value conversion Li I Apr 1 96 A1 4 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION A 3 Soft menu list PHS ae ID LIST TRIGGER SWEEP TIME J DSP LINE ON OFF LIST SETUP PHS OFF RETURN 7 The operation with normal key cannot be performed AUTO MEAS2 CENTER C Te A CF STEP NEEM K AUTO MNL FRQ OFS DELETE 2 ON OFF UNIT Hz CH CARD DRV PHS CH LIST RETURN AUTO 8 80 aj wj AVG PWR ON OFF MAX MIN ON OFF START STOP RETURN RECALL EXECUTE SHOW FILE RECALL DEFINE CARD DRV A B FAST NORMAL Apr 1 96 1 5 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 4 Display message list Error code Display message Contents ERR227 NG LIN SCL As linear scale is set PHS mode cannot be set ERR315 NG MNL SWP ERR369 As limit line is displayed PHS mode cannot be set 703 NG PHS MD ERR705 SYNC CS ID ERR706 SYNC CS ID As SYNC CS ID trigger is set zoom mode cannot set ERR707 NGSYNC As ID cycle is not measured SYNC CS ID trigger cannot be set ERR708 SYNC As ID cycle is not measured operation process cannot be started ERR709 ID MEAS As operation process is set trigger c
308. en the sweep time is shorter than 4 5ms ID ON OFF and ZOOM MD ON OFF keys cannot be switched to ON 5 12 Apr 1 96 5 ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 4 Select ON with then displays zoom position and 4 Zoom position is moved with V Ca keys and Enlarged with ZOOM Pressing ZOOM again the previous sweep time returns e The menu is changed to cumulative operation 898515 6H 222 GEB 46489540010 bie _ MEDIAN 35 26 pap 5 cus Figure 5 7 Cumulative operation menu BRST ERR Performs burst error rate measurement Burst error rate Error siot number measurement setting number Error slot number is the total number of the slot where UW is undetected and CRC check error arose Median i Is the center measurement value i in order of decreasing size Apr 1 96 5 13 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 5 2 Soft menu configuration AVG PWR Processes average value Average value After converting measurement value dBm dByV to true value W V divide the total by the number of measurement setting and convert the result to dB This converted value is the average value MAX MIN M g ON OFF Processes maximum and minimum value Find the maximum value and the minimum value from all the data obtained by measurement H EEN Starts stops the above process
309. ency range 80 END 11 31 Juni 0 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes 11 9 GPIB Command Codes Note on Table Function Listener code z o C gt Li An asterisk in the Listener Codes column indicates that you can send numeric data following that code by using a knob numeric key or step key e A plus sign in the Output Formats column indicates that multiple data items are output AUTO MANUAL or ON OFF in the Output Formats column indicates that the code outputs 1 0 respectively ON OFF in the Output Formats column indicates that they output 1 or O respectively A star x in the Remarks column indicates the initial value when power is turned on All frequencies are in Hertz Hz and all times are in seconds or fractions of a second Refer to an optionally available GPIB Guide Book for information about the use of GPIB CF Step size CF Step AUTO Frequency offset size Frequency offset ON Freguency offset OFF Full span Zero span Last span CENTER CSAUTO CA FROFS FO FROFS ON FO ON FON FROFS OFF FO OFF FOF SPAN FLSP FS ZROSP 7 LTSP_ request CFSTEP CS CSAUTO FROFS 11 32 Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency AUTO MANUAL AUTO MANUAL ON OFF Frequency ON OFF Frequency Frequency
310. er s GPIB Address Set the analyzer s GPIB address 0 through 30 using front panel keys Example To set the analyzer s GPIB address to 1 SHIFT ADRS Ca 11 3 2 Defining the Delimiter When sending data from a controller to the analyzer use one of the delimiter codes described below to define the symbol that will be used as a message terminator carriage return line feed LF or end or identify EOI When the analyzer sends data to the controller one of the delimiters given below is selected Table 11 2 Delimiter specification codes Description Outputs CR and LF also outputs EOI signal together with LF Outputs LF Outputs signal together with the data end byte Outputs CR and LF initial value Outputs LF and also signal together with LF 11 7 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 4 Command Syntax Listener 11 4 Command Syntax Listener This section describes the syntax you must use to send GPIB commands to the analyzer The general syntax for a command is this lt command gt lt separator gt lt device address gt lt data Where e command is the code for the command you want to use e separator is a space comma commands must be separated by space or comma CF SP Correct CFSP Incorrect data is the data associated with the command Note that numeric data do not need to be separated from com
311. er as the DLE character an excess DLE character will be inserted Note Be sure to use 8 bit data for execution If 7 bit data are transmitted an incorrect waveform may be generated because of the absence of the most significant bit in the waveform How to input output Description ASCII format 0000 CR LF Data corresponding to one point 4 byte data without header Binary format DLE STX DD DD DD DD DLE EOT Least significant Least significant of first point of 701st point Most significant Most significant of first point of 701st point One point data are divided into two bytes most and least significant bytes of the binary value for transmission NNNM Input code Output code 5 52 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function Sample program 2 Example 13 Outputs the data of memory A format OPEN 0 1 9600 8 1 052000 1 FOR RANDOM AS 1 DIM TR 700 Ensures 701 variables PRINT 1 TAA Specifies memory A ASCII FOR f 0 TO 700 Repeats data obtaining in 701 times INPUT 1 TR I NEXT I END Example result TR 0 0208 TR 1 20210 TR 699 20311 TRS 700 0298 Example 14 Outputs the data of memory B in binary format Opens the RS 232 port without insertion of the binary mode and the line feed character OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 DS6000 FOR RANDOM AS 1 DIM TR 1500 CONST DLE 16 STX 2 E
312. er level MKR and use the 7A Le step keys to set the sweep time Use the Amarker to find the modulation frequency fm MKR OFF Choose ON and then read the modulation frequency as the frequency of the 1 marker that appears at the top left of the screen 6 24 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements 2 Analyzing an FM signal with high modulation frequency low modulation index Q Set the center frequency to the carrier frequency the frequency span to greater than twice and less than ten times the modulation frequency Sec and use the F Ley step keys to set the desired span Q The frequency difference between the carrier frequency and the sideband frequency is the modulation frequency fm MKR Move the marker to the carrier frequency OFF and then use the data knob to move the Amarker to the sideband peak The Amarker frequency display at the top left of the screen is the modulation frequency cls EL LI Metz b X BREL ENS 400 0000 MHz 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz Figure 6 25 signal with low modulation Figure 6 26 FM signal with high modulation frequency frequency 6 25 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements 3 Measuring an FM signal peak shift Af
313. erated at this time Even though the file name is generated automatically it is possible that the name is already in use that case a request to confirm your intention to overwrite the previous file appears eee ee 1 CONFIRM Pressing this key allows the overwrite to proceed im Au e n Return to the previous menu 54 ate 4 Hans rne 52045 Displays the contents of a saved file See 7 6 1 Memory Card Function i d Apply WRITE to the selected file When ON is selected WHITE is enable When OFF is selected WRITE PROTECT is disable s VS a m e y RETURN Return to the previous menu 4 M MER 5 R wv pea Vae 925950 2 MP d tete s rre 3 Conditions of the data to save can be changed Select a format of the data to save Add or cancel the current setup conditions and press item etc Refer to 5 4 1 1 for the selecting items 4 o eee ye eere 5 90 7 59 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 6 Save Recall Functions of Memory Card r ee ee ee oe oer eee e 6 RETURN
314. error control 10 Communication port open Places a fixed time interval between each character when the system sends data This reduces the load at the controller The following five setting values are available The system employs the start stop mode and uses carriage return CR and line feed LF as delimiter symbols of messages Note A special mode is employed only for the binary output of waveform data Refer to 5 5 4 Extended Formats The system does not perform error control lf necessary the control should be made at the controller The RS 232 port is opened when the system is switched on Since the parameters necessary for communication are stored in the memory panel softkey operations open the port with the setting currently stored When the port is initially opened after shipment the initial settings are used Also the panel softkey operations will forcibly close the communication port 5 38 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Function 5 5 2 Connection 1 Connection with controller The RS 232 cable is used to connect the analyzer and the controller RS 232 connector 74941 Rear panel U4941PHS RS 232 connector U4S41N type of computer Refer to individual instruction manuals for each computer Figure 5 29 Connection to personal computer 5 39 Jun 10 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Funct
315. es Figure 10 1 Through line PRESET Q Press the key to preset the analyzer Press nom key to turn on TG Sra ME NH Mete 5505 antes 1 298 to set the TG output level to OdBm dB Press ce Cue a to set the center frequency to 200MHz 10 5 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 10 3 Measurement Example to set RBW to Note The setting of RBW and VBW decreases the noise and make the waveform of the band pass filter sharp 2aB div 1 Press and then move the waveform to the upper part of the screen by turning the data knob so that the waveform does not lie offscreen Press to watch the full screen without the softkeys Then the screen changes as shown in Figure 10 2 REF 0 6 i 200 00 MHz SP4N 20 00 MHz BBW 166 kHz VBEW 1 KHz Sh TE 400 Figure 10 2 Clear Screen Press Eg to recall the softkeys 10 6 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 10 3 Measurement Example D Press to normalize the system of measurement Then the screen changes as shown in Figure 10 3 10 dB LS INSTANT NORML EM 4 IH z SPAN 20 00 MHz 1 5 400 Figure 10 3 Normalize Screen Now the frequency characteristic became flat without DUT CAUTION If functional values that have reference to normalization for example a center frequency a fre
316. es only are available Common memory SRAM Attribute memory Any one of SRAM EPROM MASKROM EEPROM OTPROM Flash memory or none 4 Format type MS DOS format Corresponds to 64KB 128KB 256KB 512KB 1MB 2MB 5 21 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use The memory card sold by ADVANTEST Model A09507 A09508 and A09509 is shown in Figure 5 22 E b Figure 5 22 Memory Only Memory Cards that conform to the Japan Electronic Industry Development Association JEIDA Specification Ver 4 1 or the United states standards PCMCIA Release 2 0 No other memory cards can be used Please verify that all cards conform to the above standards before use of this analyzer 5 22 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 54 Memory Card Use 2 Memory card insertion and extraction Front side Hear side Drive A side Drive B side Drive A Lamp T EI Drive Lamp Drive Eject Button Drive ejector button Note Drive is the card slot on the front panel side Figure 5 23 Memory card insertion and extraction 5 23 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use The slots for the memory cards are found on the top panel of the analyzer cards are inserted and removed from above D insert cards with their labeled printed side facing toward the front of the
317. etes the limit line 1 table 40 PRINT 98 UU LMTAIN Specifies the unit to dByV and the data input to the 50 table 60 PRINT 8 25MZ 49 5DB Inputs the data of the limit line 1 70 PRINT 8 27MZ 50 5DB 80 8 29MZ 51 5DB 90 8 31MZ 52 5DB 100 PRINT 8 36MZ 54 3DB 110 PRINT 8 40MZ 55 9DB 120 PRINT 8 43MZ 57 0DB 130 PRINT 98 46 2 58 0DB 140 PRINT 8 52MZ 60 5DB 150 PRINT 8 63MZ 63 0DB PRINT 8 67MZ 64 0DB 11 12 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 4 Command Syntax Listener PRINT 8 69MZ 64 6DB PRINT 8 75MZ 64 7DB PRINT 8 FAOMZ FB100MZ Sets the start frequency and stop frequency PRINT 8 LMTA ON Sets the limit line 1 to ON Example PC 8 Measurement example of DELAY SWEEP gt ee Mall 10 ISET IFC ISET REN Executes interface clear and remote enabling 20 PRINT 8 VIDEO DLY 30HZ Makes a trigger with the VIDEO signal and the trigger level to 3096 30 8 TRIGSLP DLY Makes a trigger at the leading edge of the VIDEO ignal 40 PRINT 98 DLYPOS 1005 Sets the DELAY time to 10 s 50 PRINT 98 DLYSWPTIM 4 5MS Sets the DELAY sweep time to 4 5 ms 60 PRINT 28 DLYSWP ON Sets DELAY SWEEP to ON 70 END 11 13 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 5 Query Syntax Talker 11 5 Query Syntax Talker This section describes the syntax to use when requesting infor
318. evel low level Sweep continue during TTL level high level Phone output Connector Power output Subminiature monophonic 3 6 mm jack front panel 0 2 watt 80 nominal IEEE 488 bus connector Supports R9833 HP7470A HP7475A HP7440A 7550 682 XA HP2225AJ je GPIB Plotter Printer 8 232 Printer D SUB 9 pin rear panel BJ 10 VP 600 MJ400 505 13 13 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 2 U4941N Specitications cont d e Power input Battery mounter adapted Advantest AC DC adapter Model A08364 Automatically selections between 100 VAC and 220 VAC Antonbauer Inc 14 battery nominal 60WH 8 General specifications Environment temperature Operating temperature Non operating temperature Relative humidity 0 C to 50 C 20 C to 60 C RH 85 or less Power supply External DC input Connector XLR 4 pin Input range 10V to 16V Power consumption during DC operation During AC adapter is used During 100 VAC operation 50W Automatically selections between 100 VAC and 220 VAC Voltage 100 V to 120 V Power consumption 110 V max Frequency 50 50 Hz Voltage 220 V to 240 V Power consumption 110 V max Frequency 50 60 Hz During 220 VAC operation Approx 6 8 kg Without carrying belt a
319. ey for extended functions iaqussaausvearrsccsasauumuaunsrnuuqevetsaausanvesusnasvadonsussanuracipeecddansuesnuuagsesec thtenunatuse psrsaitaoann soneunanonbepuetaeanonaneerapectdandeuunmeue MW key Set up a measurement window 7 14 SHIFT 0 3 20 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 3 U4342 series CN key Execute the EMC function SHIFT 1 aeniarsccastdamuussnasevveccveitaasnssausnseduurrqecc ntstinsubtiunuvapvephthttuamsiberuumnruuepedeaaadurusasuauamenstusuauunosnaumauuspresLcmsevomacmortssetuedvmevee CONFIG key Configure the analyzer SHIFT 2 nausatsbrrecsuevatasassuanuagessanneb daanab sst5suapovsecev chttausususausuus2eweovst taeo suenuaussapvu retcuumnusnussauuaguss dbcejouusmcessctiecmueanvoctbohtustetsecunT UTIL key Execute a utility function SHIFT 3 savvssocnurassrecunusantirscunsunseeecsudebecsnusssanaruuasauussibAs btssuanquasuaunsseuepedebusuucsintunuauaueusvdmaedssmunmuastumav neaccc momssoevseasmasmuoreuesuet MEM CD key Operate the memory cards SHIFT 4 rrussrseavdauauauassuaumanec taanupssussduarpuen th tbpusuaoruasnsarsecusoptteeonossnumsssuanevbsbsretanuusumEampusscueAtbuvrsassuunpaerescecsenuttactmssmousmuamuumuema CAL key Calibrate the analyzer SHIFT 7 aasanssalticirim cve Ri suasuapa nsivasupodaatuscssunuapssvecieuopteussnusseavevtheestunesuusarvsuvr ba Muurumsstu uctmanpipttaa eunaenmerrssevutwevetoenos
320. fier ON gt 70 dB V input level Frequency 10 MHz or more Spurious response Preamplifier OFF 2nd harmonic distortion lt 70 dB 78 dByV input INPUT 0 dB frequency gt 10 MHz 3rd order inter modulation lt 70 dB 78 input distortion INPUT ATT 0 dB frequency gt 10 MHz Residual response Preamplifier OFF lt 10 dBsV INPUT ATT 0 dB INPUT 750 terminated frequency gt 1 MHz Preamplifier ON lt 5 dBsV INPUT ATT 0 dB INPUT 750 terminated frequency gt 1 MHz 13 10 10 97 4 Amplitude accuracy e Frequency response Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON e Calibration signal accuracy F gain error after self calibration e Scale fidelity accuracy after self calibration LOG LIN Input attenuator 20 to 50 dB settings referenced to 10 dB Resolution bandwidth switching error after self calibration b Sweep e Sweep time lt 5 e Trigger mode FREE RUN SINGLE VIDEO EXT TV RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 2 U4941N Specitications lt 1 0 dB 100 kHz to 2 GHz lt 2 0 dB 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz INPUT 10 dB 20 C to 30 C referenced to 30 MHz after self calibration lt 1 0 dB 100 kHz to 2 GHz lt 2 0 dB 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz INPUT ATT 0 dB 20 to 30 referenced to 30 MHz after self calibration 90 5 0 3 dB lt 0 5 1 5 dB 90 dB 1 0
321. gnals exceeding the maximum input level shown in Table 6 1 are present in the system be sure to decrease the input level by using the attenuator CAUTION If signal exceeding the maximum input level shown in Table 6 1 to RF input of the analyzer the internal input protection circuit cause the input signal to interrupt automatically and display an error message this case reduce the input signal levels less than 20 dBm immediately Table 6 1 Maximum input level U4941N 4341N 4342N 120 dBuV 50 2 Dynamic range If the input attenuation is set incorrectly and an excessively large signal is input the input mixer can saturate Or if 2 or more signals with closely spaced frequencies are input again the input mixer can give rise to spurious intermodulation distortion in either case accurate signal analysis will become impossible Conversely the range of input levels over which accurate analysis is possible is called the analyzer s dynamic range Another way of stating this that the dynamic range is the difference in dB between the level of the largest signal and the smallest signal that can both be displayed at the same time with no spurious signals produced by distortion etc appearing The dynamic range is determined by the following four items e Average display noise level 1dB gain compression point e Spurious response e Residual response 6 4 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6
322. gure 5 27 will appear 2400 58 Bs Q Select the proper memory card drive with the toggle The card in the slot nearest to the front panel is Drive A amp Make a file selection by moving the cursor up and down the file list with the 7A step keys or the data knob f nd out what any in the list contains at this point push the uuta a te E to recall the selected file setting conditions 5 31 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use in FAST mode SAVE a 4 Press RCL DEFINE in order and the screen shown in Figure 5 28 will appear the knob then press SAVE Press ten key setup register number 1 to 9 in order and the assigned file setting conditions will be recalled 57 0 dBuv Figure 5 28 RECALL DEFINE menu screen 5 32 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use 5 4 2 Memory Card Care and Handling 1 Backup battery lifetime A battery is necessary for preserving data in any memory cards that use SRAM The battery lifetime is dependent on the static power dissipation of the memory card RAM and the dissipation increases with increasing RAM capacity resulting in decreased lifetime 64 KB memory card with new battery installed and then kept at room temperature will have a battery lifetime of about 4 years a similarly treated 265 KB card s battery w
323. h it pushed forward Knob to control the sound level from the AM FM detector with it pulled When not changing volume and intensity use the knob with it inserted Ear phone connector For use with an 80 headset ear phone for the AM FM detector ol Option list Options numbers are listed here 3 16 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 2 U4341 series cont d D CAUTION INSIDE ENTRY BY TRAINED SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING NEVER USE THE UNSPECIFIED POWER SUPPLY OR BATTERY BEFORE CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING POWER PACK MAKE SURE THAT THE INSTRUMENT POWER 1 TURNED OFF Releases the catch on the battery or AC DC 2 4 adapter so that it can be removed from the adapter Battery AC DC adapter detachment lever 3 17 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 2 U4341 series Gen 1 i QNI TM dvd 3 Bet 220029 DAT Min CAVE LO4 VIN FANNI LOJ 04 Ore kane LELNE ROOY Figure 3 6 Top panel U4341 series 3 18 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 3 04342 series NENNEN RN M EEDMEM AM 8685888583605 3 3 04342 series 3 3 1 Front Panel Figure
324. h the 7470 3 When using the HP7475A set the PAPER SIZE dip switches to US A4 US AS Table 5 4 Plotter pen assignments Frame Marker Window Limit line Alphanumeric characters Display line Waveform A Waveform B Frame Marker Window Limit line Waveform B Waveform A Alphanumeric characters Display line Frame Display line Marker Window Limit line Alphanumeric characters Waveform Waveform B Frame Marker Alphanumeric characters Waveform Waveform B Display line Window Limit line Frame Marker Alphanumeric characters Waveform A Waveform B Display line Window Limit line 5 15 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data 5 3 2 Printer Output 1 GPIB output D Connection to the PCL capable printer To print out the data in the PCL Printer Control Language form connect the analyzer to a printer by using a GPIB connector The HP2225AJ printer produced by Hewlett Packard or the HP2225AJ equivalent printer can be connected to this unit Connect the printer as shown in Figure 5 19 If the printer does not have GPIB connector use a commercial GPIB to parallel converter Rear panel Printer Rear panel GPIB Cable Figure 5 19 Printer connection diagram Example of the analyzer and HP2225AJ connection CAUTION 1 Be sure that the power is OFF before connecting the GPIB cable 2 Please read the instruction manual for
325. has been intentionally left blank 7 A1d Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section 7 4 2 MEAS2 Functions MEAS2 makes the following five measurements possible 1 1 X dB down measurement 2 Third order intermodulation distortion measurement 3 Measuring AM modulation accuracy 96 4 Occupied bandwidth OBW measurement 5 Adjacent channel leakage power ACP measurement 6 Power measurement X dB down measurement The X dB down function displays the difference in frequency and level between a reference marker and another marker that is offset X dB down or up from the reference The relative dB range that can be specified for X is from 0 to screen s dynamic range is selected using the v step keys and the knob 5 The initial value is 3 dB MKA REF 0 0 dBm 20 6 EI LA cl LL M PAN 200 0 kHz Hz 3 Bw 100 KH 50 ms Figure 7 26 X dB down 7 42 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section D mem am e A pey ee gt 0960650 J Pressing this key displays the following menu and enables the X dB input Place left and right markers at the points X dB down from the reference marker Place a marker at the point to the left of the reference marker that is X dB down Place a marker at the point to the right of the reference
326. hat the Positive terminal goes to the RED lead and the Ground terminal is connected to the WHITE lead Reversed polarity could result in damage to the analyzer 2 Make sure that the POWER switch of the analyzer is OFF when removing the external DC power cable Connect the external DC power cable to the analyzer via the DC power input connector located on the bottom right of the analyzer rear panel When removing the cable turn off the power supply of the analyzer and keep the button on the connector of the cable side pushing and then detach the cable 2 7 Jun 10 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 2 4 Before Turning the Power On DC power input connector XLR 4 pins Connector pin location ist pin GND terminal TE Jud Ul MEM t 4th pin Power terminal Rear panel 04941 cM Red terminal a ll am External DC power cable Om Brown or white GND terminal Figure 2 4 DC power supply connection diagram 3 Checking the fuse This unit uses time lag type 10A 250V fuse for the DC power line The model of the fuse is 326010 The fuse is a fuse holder located at the lower right of the analyzer rear panel can be removed by using a screw driver to turn the holder counterclockwise When reinstalling the fuse be sure to turn the holder clockwise until it locks into position Fuse holder Fuse 10A 250V Remove by pulling out while turning counterclockwise with a screw dr
327. he analyzer may be compromised so please take proper care in arranging the conditions under which the analyzer is used 1 The analyzer should only be operated at temperatures between 0 and 50 The relative humidity should be below 85 Even within this temperature range quick changes in temperature can lead to moisture condensation If that should happen please avoid using the analyzer unit it is dry inside again 2 Please avoid using the analyzer anywhere that there is much vibration or where corrosive gases are present 3 To obtain even higher accuracy in the data after doing a calibration the analyzer requires 30 minute warm up period See 7 10 Calibration Function For the calibration procedure 4 When the analyzer is used indoors from an AC power line with AC DC adapter it is advisable to use line that contains as little noise as possible If line noise is unavoidable then a noise filter should be inserted in the AC input 2 2 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 2 3 Storage Cleaning and shipping the Analyzer 2 3 Storage Cleaning and shipping the Analyzer 1 3 Storing the analyzer Storage temperatures should remain between 20 C and 60 0 When putting into storage we recommend that the analyzer be wrapped in plastic and put into a cardboard box and then kept in a dry place where it is out of direct sunlight Cleaning Use a soft cloth periodically to clean the protective
328. he SAMPLE detector mode is automatically established Sets the attenuator ATT In MNL mode the input attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps to between 0 and 50 dB However the input attenuation 0 dB can be set by using the numeric key only In AUTO mode an opt mum attenuation is chosen depending on the reference level to be between 10 and 50 dB ibi ALL AUTO All of the coupled measurement parameters are set automatically Eu uu l l l 2l2 J depending on the current frequency span and reference level Table 7 2 shows the AUTO settings for RBW VBW and SWP for the various SPAN ranges gt Table 7 2 AUTO settings for RBW VBW and SWP for various SPAN ranges Frequency span SWP sec 50 kHz to 99 9 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz When RBW 1kHz 100 kHz to 299 9 kHz 3 kHz 1 kHz SPAN 101kHz 500 300 kHz to 1 999 MHz 10kHz 10kHz gt 101 2 SWPx2 2 MHz to 5 99 MHz 30 kHz 10kHz 6 MHz to 19 89 MHz 100 kHz 100 kHz lt VBW 300 kHz 100 kHz RBW x RBW x 0 5 1 MHz 1MHz RBW gt VBW owp SPAN 3 MHz 3 MHz RBW x VBW x 0 5 20 MHz to 59 9 MHz 60 MHz to 199 9 MHz 200 MHz or more When the resolution bandwidth RBW is in manual mode MNL then an AUTO setting for the video bandwidth VBW comes from the RBW of the above table 7 2 regardless of the current frequency span For example if RBW is 3 kHz then no matter what
329. he above figure RECALL inputting the register number specified at DEFINE with ten key starts the measurement After the completion the measurement data is saved in the memory card Pressing key performs the measurement with the present etna AUTO The waveform data and ID list saved by can get a match even after recalled by RCL ID list creation ID list is created after 1 sweep Therefore pressing VIEW during sweep may not get a match between the waveform and the list Apr 1 96 m 5 11 5 ID FUNCTION 5 2 Soft menu configuration MEAS2 B MEAS2 10 marker a mic e lt 48 Df c js id H acapseapaio 389340 PRD 5 Does arker ID Figure 5 6 ID marker IDMKR Displays ID code of the signal specified with ID marker vertical cur i sor The marker number matches list display number ID marker is moved with v key and When the marker is displayed moving ID marker moves the marker following to ID marker and the signal and the level which are specified with ID marker can be seen IDMKR an 4 IDMKR IDMKR 2 IDTRG Select ON with ON OFF then displays IDTRG ID code of the signal specified with ID marker is set to trigger code ZOOMMD ON OFF Minimizes 4 5 ms the sweep time and enlarges the measurement sig nal When you want to change the sweep time use MEAS1 DELAY SWEEP function 7 Wh
330. he analyzer itself and allows the correct measurement of the frequency characteristic of DUT such as a filter CAUTION When changing the center frequency frequency span reference level and so on are changed after having normalized the analyzer the normalization has to be made again Operation method Connect a cable directly between the TG OUTPUT connector and the INPUT connector 10 3 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 10 2 How to Normalize a Freguency Characteristic with Reference to a Displa Line Press to adjust the reference level with the step keys or the data knob Waveform image nm em The frequency characteristic is normalized TRACE Press keys in order of C gt 10 4 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 10 8 Measurement Example 10 3 Measurement Example of a Filter s Damping Property The measurement of a filter and an amplifier is introduced as an example A band pass filter with a passing band of around 900MHz is measured here Its characteristics are as follows Center frequency 200MHz Passing bandwidth 3dB Approx 4 5 2 Insertion loss Approx 5dB input output impedance 500 1 Normalizing the Measurement System It is necessary to adjust the tracking generator TG See section 10 2 Connect a through line between the TG OUTPUT connector and the INPUT connector by using measuring cabl
331. he occupied band to indicate the band endpoint frequencies For example in a 99 0 OBW case there is 0 5 of the total power in the tail to the left of the left marker and 99 596 of the total power to the left of the right marker Hz SPAN 800 0 kHz W 1 kHz SWP 5 Figure 6 31 OBW measurement To change the ratio between the power contained in the occupied band and the total power first find the OBW as before then use the numeric pad to set a new percentage and the band markers will be adjusted to suit For example to change to an 80 bandwidth MEAS2 After pressing ES mh C and the display will be changed to an 80 OBW 6 33 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 6 Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement 6 6 Adjacent Channel Leakage Power Measurement The analyzer ACP function works by first calculating the total power under the spectrum displayed on the screen Then the percentage of the total power that is found in each channel is calculated Note that the user must specify the channel bandwidth see below BS Specified Bandwidth The analyzer has two ways of making adjacent channel leakage power measurements ACP POINT For a specified channel spacing the leakage power in the adjoining upper and lower channels is found GRAPH Given only the channel width the entire frequency span is divided into channels and the power each channel is calculated and stored
332. he reference level REF 18 3 dBm Now let s get our reference level setup say to just about the peak spectrum level To use the Data Knob 5 Press the and then turn the Knob while watching the display move to the desired level 500 000 MHz SPAN 1 000 MHz REW 10 VBW 1D0 kHz SWP 50 ms To use the key An even quicker way is to use the Move Marker to Reference function MKR Just push 5 level will be adjusted to be the peak level Note The NUMERIC keys and the Step keys can be also used 7 Measuring the frequency and level 500 011 18 88 dBm REF 19 5 dBm Ss I 5 Let s measure the frequency and level of the peak using 509 01 miz H MKR gt ERES The active marker symbol will appear at the highest point of the spectrum and the numerical values for the frequency and level are shown at the top left of the display 600 MHz SPAN 10 4 9 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 4 2 Measurement Start to Finish 8 Some handy functions gt D The function This function sets the center frequency to the frequency of the active marker point This is especially useful when we want to center a peak or other point with an unknown frequency Spectral peak case Key presses are MKR A point not the peak level O
333. httunusaneausumovtatcuaeunerner GHz key Frequency in GHz level in dBm er rrr err rere rh Tere ee eS MHz key Freq in MHz level dBm time in sec aeusseasuassvcseoveadhusauaeuunvevi tununaunss duesuc tcHu as ve un vomure mudssuumurvuuvevettvtausaunvanveauveuesatsecseme kHz key Freq in kHz level in mV time in msec sauzurrussbivsuUMqaAnauamgmanssueeveatutasaunussavdivedt5szunurreu ore tonausmanapoveVN uots nuuBuzvtuaunevpabUsanunmnisnauvsertpeuamuumvueeetuve Hz key Freq in Hz time in x sec Function Execute the EMC function 3 3 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 1 U4941 series Ss 8 ZER 4941 RF FIELD ANA U4941 Front panel U4941 series Figure 3 1 Jun 10 97 3 4 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAT 3 1 U4941 series 3 1 2 Rear Panel Figure 3 2 shows the location of each numbered item further details and explanations will be found in the indicated sections EXT TRIG connector TTL level input to control the start of the sweep 7 1 6 Active edge can be selected to be either the rising or falling edge Input impedance approx 10
334. ialization execution is not canceled The card without attribute memory does not show the memory type of attribute memory or common memory and the size of attribute memory 2 The display FILE EXISTS on the screen of FORMAT shows that a file exists in the memory card 5 26 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Use 4 Storage to the memory card Save function Saving procedure SHIFT D Pushing RCL will bring up the screen shown in Figure 5 25 The nearest slot to the front panel is the card drive A 9 Make a FILE SELECTION by moving the cursor up and down the file list with the vA La step keys or the data knob C To create a new file move the cursor to the last line in the file list 5 27 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use A FILE NAME will also be automatically created at this time When an existing file has been selected for overwriting the following message will appear on the message area Tas ES CRM V istud er n CANCEL return to the previous menu cb WH imm amm When the overwriting is not required push from the overwriting menu CAUTION When the CONFIRM key is pressed and the CANCEL key is pressed during the overwriting the overwriting execution is not canceled Changing saving condition In saving the conditions of
335. if the manual sweep has been set before TV monitor screen is set auto tuning is not executed When the tuning is done with the marker to display the best picture press key to display TUNING on TV monitor screen And execute tuning with Cor key On TV monitor screen SOUND function AM FM does not work TV audio demodulation is preceded e During TV monitor screen if the COMP video output is input to the external monitor the spectrum screen can be seen Adjustment of TV monitor screen See the section 8 3 Channel setup See the section 9 1 and 9 2 Frequency setup See the section 9 3 8 4 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 8 3 Adjustment of TV Monitor Screen SHIFT Key PICTURE Key 8 3 Adjustment of TV Monitor Screen SHIFT Key PICTURE Key Operation and explanation SHIFT PICTURE i Pressing key in order the menu to adjust TV monitor picture is displayed The menu is displayed only during TV monitor screen By an OSD function Screen Display Note With bad selection standard garbage may occur for OSD and menu may be unreadable Disconnect RF input to recover OSD SHIFT PICTURE BRIGHT gt Adjusts the brightness The adjustment stages are from 0 to 99 CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast The adjustment stages are from 0 to 99 Gd TNT E 4 P zs TINT io Adjusts the color The adjustment stages are from 0 to 99 Aur oue NTSC Adjusts
336. ify the center frequency However if an offset less than the RBW is entered it will be replaced with the RBW Center frequency Displayed Center freq SET Offset freq When OFF is selected the offset is removed 7 1 2 Frequency Span 1 Frequency span setup procedure Frequency range 0 Hz 50 kHz to 2 4 GHz Numeric key units keys A Step keys 1 2 5 sequence Data knob C End 7 2 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys 2 Frequency span menu explanation Displays span frequency softmenu When softmenu disappears display span frequency is displayed in the active area and can be set by procedure 1 4 de Automatically selects 1 2 GHz center frequency 2 4 GHz frequency m span With zero span the analyzer operates as a fixed tuned receiver The center frequency is the tuned frequency the horizontal axis becomes a time axis The center frequency resolution is the previously set resolution bandwidth Returns to the span previously setup Can be used to conveniently correct a mistake in span setup or to toggle back and forth between two different span settings 7 1 3 START STOP Frequencies 1 START STOP frequency setup procedure Start frequency range 200 MHz to 2 2 GHz Stop frequency range 0 Hz to 2 4 GiHz Numeric key units keys Me 3 Step keys Data knob 3 End 7 3 1 96 2
337. igh resolution PCL printer ESC P printer Plotter output execution Printer output execution Memory card output execution Drive A Drive MCPA MCPB RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Taiker request Function Listener code j Remarks Plotter type H9833 PLTYPEA HP7470 PLTYPEB HP7475 PLTYPEC HP7440 PLTYPED HPz550 PEPEE ___ Plotter data Ail data Waveform only Character only Graphic only PLGRAT Marker DL WDO PLMKR Antenna table PLANT Limit 1 table PLLMTA Limit 2 table Pl gt 4 Jd a Piotter division size 1 division 2 division e Plotter printing position Center Left PLLEFT Right PLRIGHT Upper left PLUPLEFT Upper Right PLUPRIGHT Lower left PLLOWLEFT Lower right PLLOWRIGHT Number of plotter pen Pen 1 PLPEN1 Pen 2 PLPEN2 4 PLPEN4 Pen 6 PLPENG Pen 8 8 Note The 682 XA provided by Hitachi Electronics Ltd is the same code as R9833 s code 11 52 Mar 1 97 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Taiker request Function Listener code oT Remarks pL ode Outputtormat Plotter printing position movement Au
338. ill last about 8 5 years and similarly treated 2MB 5 battery will last about 1 9 years When first changing the battery check the production data code printed on the back of the memory card WARNING Battery lifetime will be greatly reduced if memory card is left exposed to elevated temperatures Please remove memory cards from the analyzer when they are not in use 2 Memory card backup procedure Using the two analyzer s drives enables to backup ALL COPY function the memory card data due to exchange batteries etc D Insert a master memory card into active drive Also insert a blank initialized memory card the capacity shall be same as the master s one into the other drive to copy the all data Select the active drive SHIFT CD Press select the master memory card active drive JA Here for example select the drive A Copy the all data in the master memory card active drive to the other memory card SHIFT MEM COD 5 33 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use Te dee Oo E Press EATER Ono CANCEL 1 T CANCE to return to the previous menu from the ALL COPY function menu J gt gt m CAUTION 1 When the CONFIRM key is pressed and the CANCEL key is pressed during overwriting COPY execution c
339. in B Trace Memory The B Trace is then also displayed CAUTION 1 The analyzer s dynamic range will be degraded if the signal level is much lower than the reference level Use a span of 4 or 5 times the radio channel spacing 2 If the setting span frequency of the analyzer is less than 200 kHz it is possibility to increase the measurement error since the setting stability 3 kHzp p 100 msec in remaining FM of the analyzer is close to the value 3 ACP measurement can be carried out only trace A It cannot be carried out by trace B 1 Measurement procedure D Set the center frequency to the carrier frequency and the frequency span and resolution bandwidth to their expected values dB Press and use the data knob C to adjust the reference to be near the signal peak level 6 34 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 6 Adiacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement 2 Set the trace detector to Posi peak mode From here on the procedure depends on the type of measure desired POINT 5 GRAPH POINT measurement a 1 Set the marker to the specified channel frequency Qu CO CO CD Qoa 2 Go into the adjacent channel leakage power mode and specify the channel width and spacing MEAS2 AMOO CH SP BS ms Choose BS and then enter the channel bandwidth 3 Execute the POINT measurement Markers appear at the neighbori
340. ing TEE Transmission speed setting Data ongl soling a arse ee ula eee Stop bit setting WR RI t Pany IE ii aches are Aer ck ee ENR Dataflow dux educa erara MOD ee hath Interval time SOWING miai dE Loi De dox Communication port open setting Communication port close setting Using the largest possible IF bandwidth such that 2 signals can still just be resolved Using a very narrow RBW such that the same two signals are completely separated 5 VBW dee oaa F2 List of iliustrations poses 5 12 ae 5 12 dnx 5 13 5 13 5 16 VT 5 17 T 5 18 ADR 5 19 TEM 5 19 x 5 20 ud 5 22 n 5 23 dcs 5 25 20 594 5 27 5 29 5 31 5 32 Tm 5 39 5 40 TT 5 41 Tor 5 41 5 42 5 42 TUE 5 42 TEE 5 43 lide 5 43 5 43 Law 5 44 Mar 1 97 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 35 6 36 6 37 6 38 6 39 6 40 VBW SWP SWP 11 N gt o 100ms RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL List of illustrations C9
341. input ke 5 The up and down step keys are used to increment and decrement data values in steps of stepsize Data can be set the down key enables to decrement data values and the up key for increment In this manual the symbol above will be used for the step keys 0 The data knob can be used to continuously change data values in steps that can be resolved in the display It is very useful in making fine adjustments to data values In this manual the symbol above will be used for the data knob 2 Numeric key pad and units keys These keys can be used to directly input numerical values When the number has been completely entered pushing one of the unit keys will confirm the correct entry SHIFT When used in combination with the the other functions above each numeric key can be executed Corrections can be made with the BS backspace key Each press of BS deletes one digit from an entry Also when data is not input is input by pressing the 5 4 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 2 Screen Display Annotation 5 2 Screen Display Annotation Figure 5 5 shows typical display labeling all of the display fields Active area shows functional data which can be modified Reference level Frequency and level Vertical scale of the marker point dB DIV Marker area AES gt Date function MKR 29 999 MHz 18 85 dBm 10dB 4 ATT iD dE 01 03 BLL CNT
342. internal toggle setup WON All of the values set for these items are fully backed up turning the power off and on or using the PRESET to reinitialize the analyzer will not affect them at all you make sure that the printer plotter memory card output setup is done when the analyzer is first set up or changed then a hard copy of the display screen can be easily made any time by just SHIFT COPY pushing and E 7 64 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function Initialization Function 7 8 1 Printer Plotter Memory Card Output Setup CAUTION 1 Please refer to 5 3 Output of Screen Data for the printer plotter memory card information about the output procedure 2 f you change the printer or plotter operating environment and do not make the corresponding changes to the analyzer configuration then it is quite likely that the hard copy function will not work 3 Please refer to the appropriate printer or plotter manual for information about the correct procedure of the output device itself 1 Selecting output devices where the screen data is sent SHIFT CONFIG CONFIG FETCOPY A printer a plotter and a memory card are available 4 t theta V 4 Mate b 4 d lum 4 for an output device p ok 2 PRINTER Outputs the screen data to the printer enel Outputs the
343. ion Using a single limit line PASS FAIL function Using both hrmitliBBS 5 525255520 e ERREUR Front panel measurement window function key Measurement window initialization screen Window position movement XX Window width increase decrease AX AX Partial sweep inside the window Continuous peak search inside the window Relationship between input signal level and S Nratio Indications and input of channel number Se LE ws TONG DIS pia sa xx ars Start frequency Stop frequency setup Relation between lower limit and upper limit of frequency bandwidth Difference between the present setup value and the displayed value Display when user table is not set pu cu gd DE bd Channel input mode SCreen User channel setup screen Oo Center channel setup example VHF Japan Channel number display screen F 5 7 72 7 72 7 74 7 75 7 78 7 78 7 80 7 80 7 80 7 82 7 82 7 84 7 86 7 89 7 83 7 91 7 91 7
344. ion The following describes how to connect the RS 232 cable to a controller such as a personal computer The names of each signal line used here comply with the notation of the EIA Electronic Industries Association The analyzer 9 pin D SUB Host 25 pin D SUB Pin No Signal name Signal name Pin No 1 CF DCD RTS 4 2 RxD TxD 2 3 9 RxD BB 3 4 CD DTR CTS 5 DSR CC 8 5 GND 7 6 CC DSR DTR 20 7 CA RTS DCD CF 8 8 CTS Figure 5 80 Cable connection diagram Table 5 7 Signal names of serial input output interfaces Signal direction Pin No Signal name H Analyzer External Description HE ai Carrier detector DCD High when carrier is received normally RXD lt Receive data Transmit data TXD Transmission data 1 Jetec DTR Data terminal ready Ready _ High when external device is ready for communication Transmission request signal to external device When high level ready for receiving When low level receiving inhibited Transmission permission signal When high level ready for transmission When low level transmission inhibited Frame ground Used for protection ground 5 Signal ground Signal ground
345. ions measurement with examples 4 1 To measure the up and down levels of 12 chs 1898 45 MHz 1 Set channel Hz CH Default Hz Each time it is pressed the setting is switched alternately Select CH here Input of 12ch _ Enter key or 2 Select ON pre amp according to the input level E gt HI SENS ON OFF Default OFF Each time it is pressed the setting is switched alternately 3 Enter into PHS mode PHS Soft menu F ID LIST amp SET TRIGGER VIDEO SWEEP TIME DSP LINE 4 ON OF LIST SETUP Apr 1 96 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 4 Setup list display measurement result display PHS i occ o SETUP The followings are set up to perform the up and down measurement Trigger ID CS ID Align Sort Cont Meas Disp CRC ERR Disp ID I 4D Filter 5 Return to PHS menu screen RETURN 6 Display measurement results wo the cursor to UW with 3 Select UP amp DOWN with PHS ID LIST CC amp SET Measurement result Apr 1 96 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 4 2 To lID trigger at a specified base station Specified base station number self supporting system s System alerting code 29bit Additional ID 13bit CS ID 0000 1001 0001 1010 oora vor Lr Lor oror srol of 9 Left aligned 0 9 1 A csp 00 oo oo10 oto
346. iver Rear panel U4941 Figure 2 5 Checking the fuse 2 8 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 1 U4941 series raaa 3 PANELS This chapter briefly describes the analyzer s front rear and top panels 3 1 U4941 series 3 1 1 Front Panel Figure 3 1 show the location of each numbered item further details and explanations will be found in the indicated sections Displays the waveforms and data in color Also 5 2 LCD display the whole display can be moved Softkey menu display Up to 6 software defined keys can be displayed 5 1 area here key Clears or displays the Softkey menu display 5 1 Turn off the back light of the screen 4 Softkeys 6 keys the function of each labeled by the 5 1 corresponding softkey menu item INPUT connector 500 connector is used for the 4941 4941 5 6 750 connector is used for the U4941N Both connectors are N type Input signals with frequencies between 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz 27 dBm in the max input level 50 VDC in the max U4941 4941PHS 134 dBuV 50 VDC in the max U4941N can be analyzed Selects menus for setting trigger video detector sweep sound and color modes STOP koy Selects the swoop ending requency 718 _ Setup the coupled functions resolution 7 1 5 bandwidth video bandwidth sweep time and attenuator Controls the display waveform trace
347. justment of TG ADJ A 23 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 4 List of Massages cont d NG SPAN 0 SIGNAL TRACK function cannot be executed because ihe zero span mode is selected NG SPAN 0 OBW and ACP functions cannot be executed because the zero span mode is selected Error code ERR 206 EHR 207 SPAN 0 Window sweep mode cannot selected because the zero span mode is selected NG SPAN 0 Power measurement cannot be executed because the zero span mode is set NG LIN SCL NOISE Hz function cannot be executed because the linear scale is selected ERR 209 210 ERR 220 dB down function cannot be executed because the linear scale is selected NG LIN SCL Frequency compensation function cannot be executed because the linear scale is selected NG LIN SCL Antenna compensation dipole function cannot be executed because the linear scale is selected ERR 221 NG LIN SCL ERR 222 ERR 223 ERR 224 NG LIN SCL Antenna compensation log perd function cannot be executed because the linear scale is selected Antenna compensation user function cannot be executed EHR 225 NG LIN SCL because the linear scale is selected ERR 226 NG LIN SCL Limit line cannot be displayed because the linear scale is selected ERR 227 LIN SCL PHS mode cannot be set because the linear scale is set OBW and ACP functions cannot
348. k level PRINT 8 NXP INPUT 8 C Reads the third peak level PRINT 1st PK 2nd PK B 3rd PK 50 100 END Result 1st PK 9 44 2nd PK 10 06 3rd PK 11 84 11 18 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 6 Inputting and Outputting Trace Data 11 6 Inputting and Outputting Trace Data The trace displayed on the screen is made up of 701 data points plotted along the frequency axis When entered into or read out of trace memory or B the data is transferred one point at a t me starting at the left end of the trace the start frequency Trace data can be sent and received in either or binary form The level of each point is expressed as an integer from 0 to 340 in TPC format or from 0 to 2720 format When is specified When is specified Trace data 2720 points T 210 280 350 420 490 560 630 700 Point Data point number Figure 11 4 Relation between screen grid and data points Table 11 3 shows the GPIB commands used to select TPC or TPF format Table 11 3 Trace accuracy codes Code Description TPC 0 to 340 FRF 0 to 2720 11 19 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 6 inputting and Outputting Trace Data The following table shows the commands queries and syntax used for sending and receiving trace data to and from the analyzer VO Format Syntax and Command Codes ASCII DDDD CRLF 1 Dat
349. k waveform does not exists ERR 341 NO PEAK AM accuracy cannot be obtained because the desired peak waveform does not exists BAD SET UP ACP function cannot be executed because the incorrect setup data is set on the display screen ERR342 350 NOISE Hz function cannot be executed because QP mode is selected NG QP DET dB div function cannot be changed because QP mode is selected NG QP DET Linear scale function cannot be executed because QP or PEAK mode is selected NG QP DET ERR 351 ERR 352 Power measurement cannot be executed because QP mode is selected NG QP PEAK RBW function cannot be changed because QP or PEAK mode is selected ANT CORR ON NOISE Hz function cannot be executed because the antenna compensation mode is selected ERH 353 NG QP DET ERR 355 ERR 358 359 Linear scale function cannot be executed because the antenna compensation mode is selected ANT CORH ON ERR 360 ANT CORR ON Units cannot be changed because the antenna compensation mode is selected A 26 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 4 List of Massages contd ERR 362 ANT CORR Power measurement cannot be executed because the antenna correction mode 15 set LMT LINE ON Linear scale function cannot be executed because the limit line is displayed T DOMAIN Limit line having T DOMAIN data cannot be displayed because the F
350. lect the internal pre amplifier ON MEAS2 and select the HI SENS ON 2 Unlike the AM signal of terrestrial broadcast signals the IF signals from satellite broadcast signals are FM Thus depending on the video image the spectrum can change from moment to moment Get around this by using the Maximum Hold function to accumulate the spectrum TRACE 4 MKR gt Then after for one minute or so push the Record the marker level displayed at the top left of the screen as the carrier level C dB LV 6 42 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 7 Television Carrier Signal Measurements DN pam f245 E AP st CE 1 0 GHz SPAN 50 0 MHz BBW 2 10 kHz SWP 50 ms Figure 6 39 Carrier signal level measurement 2 Noise level measurement Since the broadcast signal is being constantly modulated it is impossible to measure just the noise inside the channel Accordingly measure the noise level at an unused frequency as close as possible to the channel of interest p Release the MAX HOLD of step 1 and set the VBW to 100 Hz sweep time to 5 seconds TRACE iCOCOCOCO OO 6 43 Apr 1 96 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 7 Television Carrier Signal Measurements Q Using the Noise XHz function measure the noise level with the value calculated to 27 MHz at a frequency about 17 MHz
351. lects the positive peak detector mode Because this mode accurately captures the spectral peak values it is useful in measuring level of very narrow spectral lines or for PULSED RF measurements When the MAX HOLD mode is set this is selected automatically Selects the negative peak detector mode Selects the sample detector mode This mode is selected automatically in making a noise measurement with the marker using the video averaging mode or making the sweep time shorter than 50msec I Displays the sweep mode menu Continuous sweep mode Initial default mode When the TRIGGER mode is FREE RUN then sweeping occurs continuously Otherwise a sweep occurs each time the trigger condition is satisfied Single sweep mode In TRIGGER FREE RUN mode a single sweep occurs each time this softkey is pressed Otherwise after each this softkey press when the trigger condition next satisfied a single sweep occurs Even in the midst of a sweep this causes a reset and sweep returns to its starting condition 7 10 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 1 Functions of the Fundamental Keys Manual sweep mode A marker appears on the screen and sweeping occurs only from the marked frequency The sweep point frequency can be changed with the numeric key and units keys the step keys or the data knob e 7 Conduct sweeps inside measurement window When pressing this key again window sweep can
352. led by any of the following operations Pressing the LCL key Pressing the key Switching off the power to the system In addition when in the panel lock condition the system cannot change the softmenu on the screen using commands from the controller 5 58 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function Table 5 10 Control codes for status byte Inhibits the key tho sri of the system panel lock Permits the key operation on the panel of the system panel unlock 5 59 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function 5 5 7 Data Communication Errors A communication error such as timeout may occur for some reason at the controller during RS 232 remote programming execution To improve the reliability of remote operation in such cases the final message command sent from the controller can be retransmitted This section shows an example of a simple recovery program using Microsoft s Quick BASIC Example 20 Using NEXT PEAK reads out the 10 peak levels from the second peak level of a signal This example is Ex 12 with communication error processing added CONST CommTimeOut 24 t Timeout error No CONST CommBuffOver 88 Buffer overflow error No DIM M1 9 M11 9 OPEN COM1 9600 N 8 1 D086000 LF FOR RANDOM AS 1 ON ERROR GOTO Commerror PRINT 1 PS FOR I 0 TO 9 PRINT 1 NXP PR
353. liability 1 for any PRODUCT failures which may arise out of any misuse misuse is deemed to be use of the SOFTWARE for purposes other than it s intended use of the SOFTWARE 2 For any dispute between you and any third party for any reason whatsoever including but not limited to infringement of intellectual property rights 06 11 LIMITED WARRANTY Unless otherwise specifically agreed by Seller and Purchaser in writing Advantest will warrant to the Purchaser that during the Warranty Period this Product other than consumables included in the Product will be free from defects in material and workmanship and shall conform to the specifications set forth in this Operation Manual The warranty period for the Product the Warranty Period will be a period of one year commencing on the delivery date of the Product If the Product is found to be defective during the Warranty Period Advantest will at its option and m its sole and absolute discretion either a repair the detective Product or part or component thereof or b replace the defective Product or part or component thereof in either case at Advantest s sole cost and expense This limited warranty will not apply to defects or damage to the Product or any part or component thereof resulting from any of the following a any modifications maintenance or repairs other than modifications maintenance or repairs 1 performed by Advantest or 11 specificall
354. lifier operating is 40 dBm 70 dB V for U4941N 4341N 4342N If over 40 dBm is input the level measurement cannot be performed correctly due to the signal distortion in the pre amplifier portion _ 2 The maximum allowable input level at pre amplifier operating is 13 dBm 120 dBzV for U4941N 4341N 4342N and 50 Vpc for DC coupling If the signals exceeding the maximum input level are input it may result in damage to the pre amplifier 6 17 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements These sections will cover measurements of AM FM and Pulse Modulated signals using the analyzer Unless otherwise mentioned the carrier frequency will be 400 MHz for all the examples 6 4 1 AM Signal Analysis For measuring residual AM or FM modulation for weakly modulated signals the spectrum analyzer working in the frequency domain can easily out perform the oscilloscope working in the time domain In the time domain the AM Modulation Index m is given by Emax Emin m 96 Emm Emin x 100 See Figure 6 19 a But with a spectrum analyzer all that is needed is to measure how many dB the sideband signals are below the carrier signal level See Figure 6 19 0 At the same time the modulation factor for other higher harmonics of the modulating signal can each be easily measured In particular when the modulation is weak only about a 2 accuracy can be obtained in
355. lly Measure the level error that arises when the input attenuator is switched and correct for it Measure the level error that arises when the IF Step Amplifier is switched and correct for it Measure the level error that arises as the IF Filter is switched to change resolution bandwidth and correct for it Measure the display vertical linearity in LOG scaling from 10 dB div down to 1 dB div Correct for the error Measure the level error that arises in LOG scaling when switching from 10 dB div down to 1 dB div Correct for it Measure the noise power bandwidth using resolution bandwidth of 1 kHz to 3 MHz and correct the noise level NOISE Hz of marker 7 76 Mar 1 97 Bey Bors 5 Mj d i v es amp ICAL CORR RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 10 Calibration Function a M Turn the internal 30 MHz 20 dBm calibration signal On or OFF The analyzer input section has an RF switch which selects either the normal front panel RF connector or the internal calibration source The switch is usually operated automatically when calibration mode is entered and left but it can also be manually controlled with this push button When ON is selected the calibration signal can be viewed on the display just as a standard input signal If OFF is selected then the calibration signal is cut off and the normal RF input connector signal is displayed Frequen
356. m m i i I mu im 2 o I 2 NU 2 c section re RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 3 Menu Lists MEAS1 COUNTER 11 X 4 4 t 4 section 7 4 MEAS2 09 1 5245 4 4 4 D u MES 1 25 ST SORT SlAV RAGE POWER PEAK i AT CARRIER AYdv POWER 1 ABSR Mem GAME See section 7 4 A 14 Jun 10 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 3 Menu Lists SHIFT MW ZEE SHIFT EMC 4 This softmenu is not displayed the U4341 series STOP 5 9 m See section 7 14 section 7 12 15 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 3 Menu Lists CONFIG SHIFT sep ord o VE pace 0 5 Se I i i 1 i r 16 im TT i i Ta 1 E 127 od D 1j H gt i 10 Hog I fr 1 1 1 1 i CL I 1 poc MOERS IN Q o PE 7 D gt og mM 1 1 E dee d ONES I
357. mands 300 MZ Correct CF300MZ Correct When sending commands you must also obey the following restrictions Do not use binary numbers excluding the trace binary input Use the carriage return CH and line feed as data delimiters e Do not enter data that is not specifically defined as a GPIB code or a syntax error will occur Section 11 4 through 11 7 give programming examples using the HP200 or 300 series computers manufactured by Hewlett Packard and the PC9801 series computers manufactured by NEC Corporation Read your computer manual for specific information about applying these examples to your system In these examples note that each program line that uses a command also specifies the GPIB address of the device the command is being sent to These examples also assume the analyzer h s been initialized 11 8 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 4 Command Syntax Listener For example to set the analyzer s center frequency to 300 MHz you would send the following HP200 300 series Specifies the controller the talker GPIB interface selector Specifies the analyzer GPIB address 01 as the listener Sets the center frequency active Sets the center frequency to 300 MHz PC9801 series PRINT _ Specifies the controller the talker GPIB interface selector Specifies the analyzer GPIB address 01 as the listener Sets the center frequency active Sets the center frequency
358. marker that is X dB down Select the marker display format for X dB down HEL Displays Amarkers Initial state ABSL ABS LEFT Normal Markers are set the marker is placed at the point to the left which is X dB down and that absolute value is displayed ABSR ABS RIGHT Normal Markers are set the marker is placed at the point to the right which is X dB down and that absolute value is displayed Switch the X dB DOWN ON OFF continuously When ON is selected X dB Down is executed continuously After each sweep the peak is found and markers are displayed X dB down from the peak 7 43 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section 2 Third order intermodulation distortion measurement Obtain the relative values frequency and level differences between the carrier level and the 3rd order intermodulation distortion For details of measurement example refer to 6 3 2 Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Measurement MEAS2 Set the AMARKER to the carrier level and the active marker for third order distortion results as AMARKER value 15 displayed on the marker area the active marker is not displayed on the third order distortion position press the T ES keys in that order and reset the AY For details of setting method refer to 7 3 2 Peak Search PAN 1 000 MHz SWP 700 ms Figure 7 27 Third order intermodulation distortion measurement 7 44 Apr 1 96
359. mation from the analyzer or querying the analyzer from the GPIB controller and the syntax the analyzer uses when returning information in response to a query All queries have the form query gt 2 where query is the code for the query you want to use Note that all queries must end with a question mark The data you request also called the response is returned to the controller the next time the analyzer enters Talker mode The response has one of the formats shown below Each format puts a header at the beginning of the character string to show what type of data the response contains These headers can be omitted You can use any of five delimiters to mark the end of the data The query you send is valid unless you modify it The following table shows the five response formats and shows a typical response using each each of these examples the header is ON Notes Header character 2 or 3 characters if ON and no characters if OFF Separator a space Sign a space if positive a minus sign if negative Delimiter mantissa Delimiter exponent Delimiter at initial setting II 11 14 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 5 Query Syntax Talker Hesponse Format Frequency HHHA DDDDDDDDDDDDE CR LF T T T 1283 4 6 Maximum data size including 1 through 5 is 21 bytes the unit is Hz Sending the query CF might return the response 00000
360. me to 100msec Turns the display line ON and sets to 87dB V if units are set to dB V Turns normal marker ON and sets it to 1 8GHz Turns delta marker ON and sets normal marker 2 2 it Sets the active marker s at 100kHz PUN100MS DLN87DB NOISE50Hz XDB6DB Sets noise power noise width to 50Hz Sets XdB down width to 6dB This can be also set by the XDL and XDR commands Sets marker step size to 100kHz MPM100KZ Sets average A to 200 times and executes GZ is entry Sets the analyzer GPIB address to 8 GZ is entry Sets window start frequency 1MHz Sets window stop frequency to 2MHz Sets window upper level to 20dBm if units are set to dBm Sets window lower level 40dBm if units are set to dBm Sets CAL level to 25dBm if units are set to dBm Executes save of file name FILE 0001 Executes recall of file name FILE 0001 SV A FILE0001 0001 11 61 1 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 12 1 in Case a Problem Like This Should Occur 12 TROUBLESHOOTING Q amp A In case there should be any trouble with the analyzer this chapter presents some ideas for diagnosis and solutions 12 1 Case a Problem Like This Should Occur In the unlikely event that a problem should arise please go through this check list first If the problem still cannot be resolved then contact your nearest deale
361. ments 6 7 2 Satellite Broadcast Signal C N Measurement In order to assure quality reception of a satellite broadcast signal the carrier to noise ratio C N must be good Using the analyzer it is possible to make highly accurate measurements of C N even during program broadcast transmission The relationship between picture quality and C N is shown in Figure 6 38 Picture evaluation 1 Threshold level C N Ratio dB Figure 6 38 Picture quality vs C N Where C dB V is the signal carrier level and is the noise level per Hertz The 74 31 dB is a conversion of an ideal 1 Hz noise into the 27 MHz broadcast channel bandwidth C N Ratio dB C N 74 31 dB Using the Noise XHz measurement mode measure the noise level with the value calculated to 27 MHz at a frequency about 17 MHz away from the carrier and so outside the BS 5 channel The procedure for measuring C N on a Japanese BS 5 channel is as follows 6 41 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 7 Television Carrier Signal Measurements 1 Measure the carrier signal level D Set the center frequency the 1 126 MHz IF corresponding to BS 5 the frequency span to 50 MHz RBW to 300 kHz and VBW to 10 kHz OO Press use the 7A step keys and the data knob to adjust the reference to 5 convenient location If the input signal level is week and the S N ratio is poor se
362. mp SET CAUTION 1 When has already been input as trigger ID the measurement is performed to the base station 2 Asthe burst error rate measurement is performed based on the specified base station cycle the measurement continuity may be lost by setting wrong cycle with low level or interference wave Refer to the setting cycle shown in the lower right of the screen 4 Select burst error from MEAS 2 menu NEXT BRST ERR Input measurement number of times with ten keys Default 10 times T Select g mS when measurement is restarted Apr 1 96 4 7 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION mE To display the list O PEEB stations of specified SERI CO oni HCM NERA RRR MORD ED ENG MERERI 4 4 To display the list of base stations of specified users ID codes Users ID code Simultaneous alerting 9bit area number Additional ID ERE Po oe cs D 01 0110011 N bit 1 Setfrequency channel Hz CH Default Hz 2 Select ON pre amp from the input level H SENS ON OFF Default OFF 3 Enter into PHS mode and set up the list display LIST SETUP Set up as follows UW DOWN Detect the down channel ID FLTR ID Filter ON Detect only the data set at INPUT Move the cursor with 2 10 Specify with E INPUT Input user s ID number Move th
363. mproves S N ratio Because RF block down conversion degrade S N ratio e When a pre amp is used 1dB gain compression is 70dByV If the input level more than 70dBzV is applied the synchronization may be unstable picture may have watering or sound in picture 2 For multiple channet input e n the case C N is not improved when the pre amp is used the pre amp is saturated Use an external attenuator or a filter so that the total input power of the pre amp will reach the order of 35dBm 75dByV 8 1 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 8 1 Notes on Using TV Monitoring Function e When the video carrier signal level of one channel is 40 to 60dByV as a guide The pre amp can be used with powered When the signal level is 70dBuV or more The pre amp is saturated Reduce the signal level with an external attenuator or turn off the pre amp Set the input attenuator to OdB e Example for using pre amp For low input level The C N ratio is improved So the S N ratio of the modulated signal is improved Pre amp OFF Pre amp ON REF 70 0 MHz 50 ms Ti202 0U MHz ON MHZ Rei 100 kHz VBW i kHz 5 50 ms For high input level The C N ratio is declined picture quality is declined because of appearance of distortion in the video band Pre amp OFF ON KR NUN m ET zb AIT LU T VB MEZ SPAN 10 040 e 2 207 00 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz 10
364. n gt ee m umo m CANCEL 1 Stop the initialization and return to the previous menu gt e AMO MR NE APO c mc c cm i AU gs x You can find out what a saved file contains Moving the desired file to the active cursor and pressing this softkey enable to display the file list shown in Figure 7 35 i 3 3 Y _ m m m r o e e ee ee GA OQ 7 54 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 6 Save Recail Functions of Memory de e gt gt 5 Rv 3 S S 3 z5 2 79 LL t co 9 70 oco T3 x x 2 2 N 0 x o E 252 222 c lt Laam DE 5 Omz i I A gt a a 994 Seon S 6 s pq lt 21 ze re 2 4 e ev 5 5 c O oo o to D wv N PEU o E ul EE EE o Lo Nagel e tu he b S N N oO Oo E Em oe G nos cec mal m A 55555 O a A E si st ee gt gt 2 HE
365. n 95 01413 01404 Option 96 A01414 01405 Option 97 A01415 01406 Option 98 01407 Option 99 01417 114009 Option 94 A114109 Safety 5 Certificate of Conformity RF Field Analyzer This is to certify that U4941 4341 4342 Series instrument type designation complies with the provisions of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC in accordance with 50081 1 and 50082 1 and Low Voltage Directive 73 283 EEC in accordance with EN61010 ADVANTEST Corp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Tokyo Japan Engineering and Sales GmbH Munich Germany 4941 00 Table of Power Cable Options There are six power cable options refer to following table Order nin cable options by Model number JIS Japan Law on Electrical Appliances UL United States of America CSA Canada Europe Denmark Norway Germany The Netherlands Belgium Austria Finland Sweden SEV Switzerland SAA Australia New Zealand BS United Kingdom Ratin g color and length 125Vat7A Black 2 m 6 ft Angled 125 Vat 7 Black 2 m 6 ft Angled 250 V at 6 Gray 2 m 6 ft Angled 250 at 6 A Gray 2 m 6 ft 250 V at6 Gray 2 m 6 ft 250 V at G Black 2 m 6 ft Angled Straight Straight Straight No 1 Model number Option number Straight 01402 01412 A01403 Option 95 01413 01404 Option 96 01414 01405 Opti
366. n extreme large signal decrease its output level 2 Time Response message This REG SPAM indicates A Era the IF filter responds sufficiently under conditions of FREQ SPAN SPAN swp and RBWI in the analyzer and whether a correct level is displayed If the level change of a signal to be supplied from the output end of DUT to the spectrum analyzer is small even if the message is displayed there are cases of displaying a correct level If the level of a signal to be supplied from the output end of DUT to the spectrum analyzer changes violently the IF filter cannot respond Be careful to the time response of DUT 10 12 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL T 10 4 Handling Precautions of Tracking Generator 2 f the characteristic displayed on the screen does not change even after switching SWP the IF filter of the analyzer and DUT is responding sufficiently If not slow SWP down or make SPAN narrow until the characteristic on the screen does not change 3 Overvoltage Protection of TG OUTPUT Connector Don t apply a voltage of 50V or more or a power of 130 or more to TG OUTPUT connector It will be broken with such a voltage or a power 4 Output Level Overshooting at TG Turns on When TG turns on approx 2dBm output level overshoot occurs for a short time CAUTION IF DUT is weak in large level input be careful to this output overshoot 10 13 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPER
367. n range 60dB should also be defined The ratio between the 3dB width and 60dB width is expressed as the bandwidth selectivity a Separation of D IF Filter Selectivity Signals at Different levels Figure A 6 Bandwidth Selectivity Bandwidth Accuracy The bandwidth accuracy of the IF filter is expressed by the deviation from the nominal value of the 3dB lowered point This efficiency has almost no effect on measurement of normal signals of continuous level but it should be taken into consideration when measuring the level of a noise signal Bandwidth Switching Accuracy Several IF filters are used to obtain optimal resolution in signal spectrum analysis according to the scan width When switching from one IF filter to another while measuring one and the same signal an error is generated for the difference in loss This error defined as the bandwidth switching accuracy Figure 7 Bandwidth Switching Accuracy A 6 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 1 Glossary Voltage Standing Wave Ratio VSWR This is a constant that represents the impedance matching state It is expressed as the ratio between the maximum and minimum values in the standing wave generated as a combination of progressive wave and reflected wave in the spectrum analyzer loaded against the ideal nominal impedance source This is a variation of reflection factor and reflection attenuation amount In Figure A 8 the value of signal E re
368. n to All Measurements Spurious response Spurious Signals Standard configuration START Frequency Start frequency Stop frequency setup START key e E o y k Status register bit assignments STOP Frequency STOP key y E 4 Storage to the memory Save function Storing the analyzer Sweep mode setup Sweep Time Sweep Time for 2 Seconds SWP p a m 3 E u p x n u 3 n A d k y G3 ms 3 T Television Carrier Signa Measurements RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 1 4 6 38 Third order Intermodulation distortion Third order intermodulation Distortion measurement Through line Top Panel E E 9 a Gi a n c d gt E u Trace accuracy codes TRACE B Modes Trace Data Inputting Trace Data Outputting TRACE Functions TRACE key a 53 8 3 8 gt NW E y 9 b 8 8 8 u Trace Modes TRACKING GENERATOR FUNCTION Trigger mode setup Troubleshooting Q amp A TV Channel Function s Example TV Channel Function s Softkey Menu TV DEMO
369. nalyzer sets the optimal value according to the sweep width In general smaller bandwidths improve resolution Therefore the resolution of the spectrum analyzer can be expressed by the narrowest IF bandwidth See Figure A 1 b IF Bandwidth Resolution p b Figure A 1 IF Bandwidth Electromagnetic compatibility EMC The ability of a system to operate without producing or being affected by electromagnetic interference Electromagnetic interference EMI Electromagnetic interference EMI is disturbance in the reception of desired signals caused by unwanted electromagnetic energy or something EMI can be caused by any source of EM energy such as list a pertinent Modern circuits are designed to produce as little EM energy as possible but since the EM can not be completely eliminated the cabinets containing EM can not equipment are shielded to exclude EMI 1 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 1 Glossary Reference Level Display Accuracy When reading the absolute level of an input signal on the spectrum analyzer the level is determined by the distance in dB from the uppermost scale on the screen The level set for this uppermost scale is called reference level The reference level is modified by the IF GAIN key and the input attenuator and displayed in dBm or The absolute accuracy of this display is the reference level accuracy Reference Level
370. ndwidth Measurement MEAS Section Measurement Window Function Measuring Minute Signal Level Measuring Pulse Modulated Signals Measuring the Frequency and Level Memory Card Care Memory Card Functions Memory Card Handling Memory Card Initialization memory card insertion and extraction Memory Card Output Memory Card Output Setup Memory Card Related Functions Menu key b p E E c3 o X 3 E E b y X EH Menu Lists Message Format Method of Operation adem Coe RR Modes for the A Trace Memory Modulation Signal Measurement Multi marker NB m c3 css E A E E E 4 N BNC conversion Noise Sideband Noise Hz Measurement Mode Non higher Harmonic spurious NORM Normal Marker c c p E E A 8 o c Ww o n n F a 8 Normalize Mode Normalize Screen NORMAL mode Notes on Using TV Monitoring Function 10 11 10 9 10 10 7 36 7 91 6 17 6 23 4 9 5 33 7 54 5 33 5 24 5 23 5 19c 7 65 5 21 3 1 3 10 3 19 7 8 9 5 45 5 1 8 19 7 19 6 18 7 27 2 1 5 7 28 4 7 55 6 10 7 25 7
371. nes 1 Menu explanation SHIFT UTIL 1 Display the PASS FAIL menu CA u mp CONT P F i When ON PASS FAIL judgment is done after each sweep and the 1 ON OFE 1 result is displayed When OFF exit the PASS FAIL judgment function When the key is pressed conduct PASS FAIL judgment and display il _ the result i Return to the previous menu 7 89 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 25 7 13 Utility Functions CAUTION 1 If one or both limit lines are not defined then the PASS FAIL function will not operate 2 When using both limit lines for PASS FAIL always arrange the data so that Limit Line 1 will appear above and Limit Line 2 below the trace to be tested 7 90 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 14 Measurement Window Function 7 14 Measurement Window Function By using measurement window it is possible to make fast measurements inside the window even while displaying a very wide frequency span Figure 7 51 Front panel measurement window function key SHIFT MW Press ED to display the initialization screen shown below Figure 7 52 LOCATE AGO 008 MM MEN UNT Figure 7 52 Measurement window initialization screen 7 91 Apr 1 96 1 er rr ere se ee eee SPR FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 14 Measurement Window Function
372. ng upper and lower channel frequencies and the display at the upper left shows the fractional power as dB from the center channel in each 6 35 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 6 Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement 59 50 m LOW REF 18 0 dB C RC s ome 90 0 KHZ lt 3 hah a SPAN 200 0 kHz SWP 20 Figure 6 32 POINT mode measurement of adjacent channel leakage power CAUTION 1 Always be sure that the markers appear at the adjacent channel locations the channel width spacing is not specified see step 2 or if the values are incompatible or inconsistent then the ACP POINT function will not work 2 After using the marker to make any measurement the marker automatically changes into a Amarker Be sure to adjust the marker to the specified channel frequency before making the measurement b GRAPH measurement 0 1 Go into the adjacent channel leakage power mode and specify the channel width MEAS2 Choose BS and then enter the channel bandwidth C 6 36 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 6 Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement b 2 Execute the ACP GRAPH measurement Choose OFF and then enter the graph The adjacent channel leakage power measurement appears on the screen as the B Trace Each time GRAPH is pushed it is remeasured and move the marker to th
373. nto the analyzer input in order to cut off the fundamental frequency component Figure 6 12 switch position 2 If the second order harmonic distortion of the signal generator is sufficiently greater than the analyzer s distortion level then the high pass filter may not be necessary But if the signal source has a clean output or you wish to make the most accurate measurements possible then always use the H P F between the source and the spectrum analyzer in order to suppress the effects of any harmonic distortion from the analyzer Pressing the following keys 0 55 dBm 0 0 dBm 10dB ATT 20 dB FEM ER OE Pressing the and set the to AUTO Pressing the and set the fundamental level to the optimize position BW 7 10 SUP 50 ms for observing the waveform by using the 91 Figure 6 14 Second order harmonic distortion measurement In exceptional cases where the harmonic spectrum is buried under the noise level try using a higher frequency resolution bandwidth or more noise averaging by narrowing the video bandwidth Now the analyzer is set up to measure the level of the harmonic signal Push and read marker level displayed at the top left of the screen as the second order harmonic distortion level second order harmonic distortion is just the difference dB between the fundamental frequency component level measured in the previ
374. o 734 00 734 00 to 742 00 742 00 to 750 00 750 00 to 758 00 758 00 to 766 00 766 00 to 774 00 774 00 to 782 00 782 00 to 790 00 790 00 to 798 00 798 00 to 806 00 806 00 to 814 00 814 00 to 822 00 822 00 to 830 00 830 00 to 838 00 838 00 to 846 00 846 00 to 854 00 854 00 to 862 00 9 34 Apr 1 96 CATV Analyzer 5 Channel Erequency range Picture frequency So channel MHz RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table 9 27 Channel ae of CATV in east Europe 102 00 to 110 00 110 00 to 118 00 118 00 to 126 00 126 00 to 134 00 134 00 to 142 00 142 00 to 150 00 150 00 to 158 00 158 00 to 166 00 166 00 to 174 00 230 00 to 238 00 238 00 to 246 00 246 00 to 254 00 254 00 to 262 00 262 00 to 270 00 270 00 to 278 00 278 00 to 286 00 286 00 to 294 00 294 00 to 302 00 302 00 to 310 00 9 35 9 5 Channel Tabie und frequency MHz Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table 4 France D VHF Table 9 28 anne table of VHF in France Analyzer S Frequency range Picture frequency Sound frequency Channel channel MHz MHz MHz 49 00 to 57 o0 53 75 to 61 75 57 00 to 65 00 174 75 to 182 75 182 75 to 190 75 190 75 to 198 75 198 75 to 206 75 206 75 to 214 75 214 75 to 222 75 C ob C n c I O UHF Table 9 29 Channel tabie of UHF in France Analyzer Channel
375. o 822 00 822 00 to 830 00 830 00 to 838 00 838 00 to 846 00 846 00 to 854 00 854 00 to 862 00 862 00 to 870 00 9 32 Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table 3 East Europe D VHF Table 9 25 Channel table of VHF in east Europe Analyzers Channel Frequency range Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHZ MHz MHz 48 50 to 56 50 58 00 to 66 00 76 00 to 84 00 84 00 to 92 00 92 00 to 100 00 174 00 to 182 00 182 00 to 190 00 190 00 to 198 00 198 00 to 206 00 206 00 to 214 00 214 00 to 222 00 222 00 to 230 00 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 UHF Table 9 26 5 Channel table of UHF in east Europe 470 00 to 478 00 478 00 to 486 00 486 00 to 494 00 494 00 to 502 00 502 00 to 510 00 510 00 to 518 00 518 00 to 526 00 526 00 to 534 00 534 00 to 542 00 542 00 to 550 00 550 00 to 558 00 558 00 to 566 00 566 00 to 574 00 574 00 to 582 00 9 33 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table cont d Analyzer Channel Frequency range Picture Sound frequency channel MHz MHz MHz 582 00 to 590 00 590 00 to 598 00 598 00 to 606 00 606 00 to 614 00 614 00 to 622 00 622 00 to 630 00 630 00 to 638 00 638 00 to 646 00 646 00 to 654 00 654 00 to 662 00 662 00 to 670 00 670 00 to 678 00 678 00 to 686 00 686 00 to 694 00 694 00 to 702 00 702 00 to 710 00 710 00 to 718 00 718 00 to 726 00 726 00 t
376. o improve S N in a shorter time than video bandwidth filtering for noise reduction would require With averaging it is possible to recover signals buried in noise or quantified signals with a random component MKR e20 000 MHz 520 000 MHz 79 08 dBm 80 50 0 dBm nf LARA AA i PN a GF 620 000 MHz 1 000 MH2 000 MHz SPAN 1 000 E RBW 10 kHz VBW 10 Td 50 ms VBW 10 kHz SWP 30 Figure 7 8 No averaging Figure 7 9 Averaging 20 times CAUTION Selecting averaging mode automatically forces the SAMPLE detector mode Start averaging The count of the number of traces to be averaged will be shown in the active display area The count can be set to a value between 2 and 1000 with the numeric key and units keys vA Lo keys or the data knob 29 The initial default is 20 Pressing this key select STOP during averaging will cancel the averaging mode and return to the previous trace mode Pressing again select START will start the averaging process again from the beginning m w m n 59505057 7 21 Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 2 TRACE Functions _ 5 PAUSE 11 CONT gt Sigma n Algorithm 1 z Algorithm 2 lt
377. o the set number of times 1 comes up 6 6 Mar 15 97 6 4 Examples of program PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION N 88BASIC of PC9801 series produced by Nihon Denki is used for the following examples of program Setting example of ID trigger 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 88 TICCP 30 PRINT 88 IDTRCI 5 40 PRINT 88 IDTRCS 123456789AB 50 PRINT 88 IDTRPS 1234567 60 PRINT 28 ID 70 END Examples to read ID trigger 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 88 IDTRCI 30 INPUT 88 CI 40 PRINT 88 IDTRCS 50 INPUT 8 CS 60 PRINT 08 IDTRPS 70 INPUT 88 PS 80 END Setting example of ID filter Only the IDs that Cl is 5 are listed Any ID is listed for CS PS 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 08 IDFLHEX 30 PRINT Q08 IDFLCI 5 40 PRINT 88 IDFLCS xxx fr 50 PRINT 88 IDFLPS x xJ 60 PRINT 88 IDFLTR ON 70 END Mar 15 97 Set trigger ID to CI CS PS set CI trigger set CS trigger Set PS trigger set trigger mode to ID Read CI trigger Read CS trigger Read PS trigger Make input mode of ID filter to hexadecimal number Set CI filter Set CS filter Set PS filter Set ID filter to ON 6 7 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION To perform auto scan function 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT Q08 2 Clear status byte 30 PRINT 88 ATSCAN Start auto scan 40 LOOP 50 POLL 8 S Read status byte into variable s 60 IF S AND 8 0 THEN
378. of TETECOM in France 9 39 9 32 Channel table VHF in italy 9 40 9 33 Channel tabla of CATV in Korea 9 41 9 34 Channel table of VHF in Singapore 9 43 9 35 Channel table of VHF in Malaysia 9 43 9 36 Channel table of VHF in vss ok RR rey ehm OR 9 43 9 37 Channal4abla of UHF in LL S A te 9 44 9 38 Channel table of CATV In Sls 9 46 9 39 Channel table of VHF west Europe 9 49 9 40 Channel table of UHF in west Europe 9 49 9 41 Channel table of CATV in west Europe 9 51 T 2 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL List of Tables NO Title s Page 11 1 Analyzer GPIB interface codes muU DT 11 6 11 2 Delimiter Speciation codos 11 7 11 3 Trace accuracy Codes CA AC n RR 11 19 11 4 Service request ON OFF codes 11 26 11 5 Status register bit assignments 11 26 11 6 Examples or data entry GPIB codes with asterisk 11 61 T 3 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 1 1 Outline of the Analyzer 1 ANALYZER FEATURES AND S
379. olarized waves For JCSAT broadcast local oscillation 11 2 GHz vertically polarized waves For JCSAT communication local oscillation 11 3GHz horizontally polarized waves For JCSAT communication local oscillation 10 873 GHz horizontally polarized waves For JCSAT broadcast local oscillation 11 2 GHz horizontally polarized waves JCSAT V TYPE2 V2 JCSAT V SOUND VS JCSAT H TYPE1 H1 JCSAT H TYPE2 H2 JCSAT H TVy HT For SCC communication local oscillation 11 3 GHz vertically polarized waves For SCC communication local oscillation 10 99 GHz vertically polarized waves For SCC broadcast local oscillation 11 2 GHz vertically polarized waves For SCC communication local oscillation 11 3 GHz horizontally polarized waves For SCC communication local oscillation 10 99 GHz horizontaily polarized waves SCC V TYPE1 V1 SCC V TYPE2 V2 SCC V TVM VT SCC H TYPE1 H1 SCC H TYPE2 H2 9 19 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table 9 5 3 Channel Table List by Country 1 Japan D VHF Table 9 8 Channel table of in Japan Analyzer 5 Picture frequency Sound frequency Channel channel MHz MHz 90 00 to 96 00 96 00 to 102 00 102 00 to 108 00 170 00 to 176 00 176 00 to 182 00 182 00 to 188 00 188 00 to 194 00 192 00 to 198 00 198 00 to 204 00 204 00 to 210 00 210
380. ompression Preamplifier OFF gt 100dB V mixer input level Frequency 10MHz or more Preamplifier ON gt 70dB 4V RF input level Frequency 10MHz or more e Spurious response Preamplifier OFF 2nd harmonic distortion lt 70dB 78 input INPUT OdB frequency gt 10 2 3rd order inter modulation lt 704 78dB V input distortion OdB frequency gt 10MHz Residual response Preamplifier OFF lt 10dBuV INPUT OdB INPUT 750 terminated frequency gt 1MHz Preamplifier ON 5 5 INPUT 0dB INPUT 750 terminated frequency gt 1MHz 13 25 Jun 10 97 4 Amplitude accuracy e Frequency response Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier ON Calibration signal accuracy IF gain error after self calibration Scale fidelity accuracy after self calibration LOG LIN Input attenuator 20 to 50 dB settings referenced to 10 dB Resolution bandwidth switching error after self calibration 5 Sweep Sweep time Accuracy Trigger mode RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 4 94341 Specifications 1 0dB 100kHz to 2GHz 2 0dB 9kHz to 2 2GHz INPUT 10dB 20 C to 30 C referenced to S0MHz after self calibration 1 0dB 100kHz to 2GHz lt 2 09 9kHz to 2 2GHz INPUT OdB 20 C to 30 C referenced to 30MHz after self calibration 90 5dB JV 0 3dB lt 0 5dB 1 5dB
381. on 5 5 1 Specifications 1 Transfer speed baud rate The following six speeds are available D 600 bps 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 5600 bps 19200 2 Data length The following two lengths are available 8 bits 3 Stop bit length 2 1 5 bit 2 bit 4 Parity bit The following three parity methods are available o Odd Dany 9 Even parity 5 Communication method Half duplex 6 Data flow control Specifies the handshake method used in the communication with the controller The following two methods are available depending on the function of the communication port at the controller The RS 232 does not send out dete viti the DSR line at the sending end is low Also while the line in the system is low the data from the mating end will be rejected 5 37 Apr 1 96 handshake RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Function The sending end does not send data until it has received the next Xon characters after receiving the Xoff characters through the data line Also if the system is not ready to receive data it will send the Xoff characters to indicate data rejection from the mating end As soon as it is ready to receive data it will send the Xon characters 7 Inter character sending interval 22 1 0 ms 2 5 0 4 0 5 5 8 Communication mode 9 Transmission
382. on 7 81 Bait xxx HON ene ACIES Sos 2 3 Clear KOY 52 o es Se 5 3 Clear Screen 10 6 Gir ve ex ae ROCK 3 1 5 3 CPU check function 7 41 10 97 p h Command Syntax Listener Communication Port Setting e Configuration Function Connecting Connection Copy Function Couple key CPL CHT Section C15 type conversion adapter E 8 e c 3 m cio E E E E Oa m hh 4 E E E E E e 8 8 qa D Data Communication Errors DATA ENTRY Section Data Input DATE Function dB Conversion Formulas DC power cable DC power input connector power supply connection diagram DC power supply operation Defining the Delimiter Definition of Display Color DEFINE key E y Delay sweep function Delimiter specification codes Detector Mode Setup Difference between the present setup value and the displayed value Display Color Setup Display Line Setup Display of TV Monitor Screen Display when user table is not set Dynamic range 8 P RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 8 5 41 7 70 7 64 10 8 5 39 7 74 7 6 5 2 2 1 5
383. on 97 01415 01406 Option 98 01407 99 01417 Cable 1 0104 Caution in using carrying belt DELUSI FO ERR Attachment of the belt ELLET Raise the lever of the belt M i 2 Twisting Bi Hang the lever to the projections of the main unit LIN e MA da Fava Be careful not to give excesive power to the lever Check after attaching the belt ARRAY DX After attaching make certain of abnormal rattle or gap belt 1 a Mar 1 97 Part 1 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Part 1 1 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Preface PREFACE How to use this manual operation manual for the U4941 series U4341 series U4342 series RF field analyzer covers how to use the analyzer its functions measurement methods and operational and maintenance precautions In order to maximize the utility of the analyzer for you we ask that you first familiarize yourself with the contents of this manual e event by all means read chapters 1 and 2 before you begin using the analyzer 1 Analyzer Features and Introduces the capabilities functions and organization of the analyzer Specifications For first time users covers the procedures from setup through powering on the analyzer Includes precautions to b
384. on output in the spectrum This should be taken into consideration when analyzing a precise input signal Quasi Peak Value Measurements In radio communication EMI usually appears as an impulse To evaluate this interference the analyzer uses the noise power in proportion to the peak value The measurement bandwidth and detection constant used for this evaluation are called quasi peak value measurements and are determined by JRTC specifications in Japan and CISPR specifications international Frequency Hesponse This term represents amplitude characteristics frequency characteristics for a given frequency In the spectrum analyzer frequency response means the frequency characteristics flatness of input attenuator and mixer for the input frequency and is given in A dB Zero Span The spectrum analyzer sweeps at any frequency along the horizontal axis as the time axis but will not sweep in zero span mode Occupied Bandwidth Modulation causes the frequency spectrum of EM signal to spread significantly The occupied bandwidth is the portion of the signals that contains 9996 of the total average power radiated See Figure A 3 Occupied Bandwidth o lt FL FU Frequency Figure A 3 Occupied Bandwidth A 3 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 1 Glossary Spurious Signals Spurious signals are undesired signals that can interfere with the target signal be divided into
385. onal conditions Note that there 1 no guarantee any loss of data Precautions when Disposing of this Instrument When disposing of harmful substances be sure dispose of them properly with abiding by the state provided law Harmful substances 1 polycarbon biphenyl 2 Mercury 3 Ni Cd nickel cadmium 4 Other Items possessing cyan organic phosphorous and hexadic chromium and items which may leak cadmium or arsenic excluding lead in sol der Example fluorescent tubes batteries Safety 3 Environmental Conditions This instrument should be only be used in an area which satisfies the following conditions Safety 4 An area free from corrosive gas An area away from direct sunlight dust free area An area free from vibrations Altitude of up to 2000 m Direct sunlight 4 DIT 4 Corrosive cy Figure 1 Environmental Conditions ur IPS IS SC Vibration Operating position A clear space of 10 centimeters or more The instrument must be used in hor must be kept around the air vents izontal position A cooling fan which prevents the in Front ternal temperature rom rising 15 equipped with the instrument The air vents on the case must be un blocked Figure 2 Operating Position Storage position This instrument should be stored in a horizontal position When placed in a vertical upright position for storage or transportation
386. onitoring the frequency of AMKR A Press Gourd to erase the soft menu 10 10 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 10 3 Measurement Example Then the screen changes as shown in Figure 10 8 Figure 10 8 Measurement of an Attenuation In this measurement the attenuation is 44 89dB at the frequency of 14 2 10 11 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 10 4 Handling Precautions of Tracking Generator 10 4 Handling Precautions of Tracking Generator 1 Dynamic Range dynamic range of measurement is limited by the maximum output level of the TG part and the noise floor of the analyzer Making a resolution bandwidth RBW narrow expands the dynamic range If the local oscillation signal leaks from the TG part to the receiving part there is possibilities that the noise level doesn t decrease at the maximum available resolution and that the dynamic range doesn t expand If the loss of DUT including its matching circuit is big the dynamic range also gets wrong In such a case the dynamic range can be improved by inserting an amplifier into the input or output port of DUT The location of an amplifier to be inserted is determined by conditions of DUT Accordingly it is necessary to study the characteristic of an amplifier to be inserted for example gain flatness noise figure output level 1 dB compression point input output VSWR and so on If the tracking generator outputs a
387. onversely too high an audio level will lead to cross modulation noise of the video signal Therefore it is necessary to properly adjust the relative carrier levels and the spectrum analyzer makes it easy to do In the following we will consider the adjustment of a VHF signal NHK Channel 1 in Japan D Set the center frequency to 91 25 MHz frequency span to 8 MHz C39 0C OCHO CO sean CO CO Qt Consider a level change to execute the max hold function for approx 1 minute TRACE 25 GAD 24 5 4 Ee n Wait for approx one minute 6 39 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 7 Television Carrier Signal Measurements Measure the picture transfer wave level and sound transfer level OFF Press the key to move a marker point to the peak position for the picture transfer wave using the data knob e The marker level shows the picture transfer wave level V dB uV and move a marker point to the peak position for the sound transfer wave using the data knob C The marker level shows the sound transfer wave level dByV The V A is found from the following formula VA comparison Picture transfer wave level 4 Sound transfer wave level Figure 6 37 V A measurement 6 40 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 7 Television Carrier Signal Measure
388. orm 4 shift QPSK Transmission speed 384Kbit s Signal Channel The configuration of the logical control channel marks conforms to STD 28 Range of level measurement Heceiving performance SWP 400 ms or less in level measurement Preamplifier OFF Input ATT 10 dB 52dBuV to 107dBuV Preamplifier ON Input ATT 0 dB 16dB4V to 67dBuV Sweep trigger mode Free run VIDEO and ID Measurement function ID list display CS ID level and time ID MKR Displays ID of the specified signal in the waveform display mode Cycle measurement Measures synchronizing signal of the specified CS ID Burst error ratio measurement Number of error slots number of measurements settings Level measurement calculation Median operation function Mean value operation Maximum Minimum value operation 13 38 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 8 U4342N Specitications 13 6 U4342N Specifications 1 Frequency Frequency range 9kHz to 2 2GHz span X span accuracy 0 15 x RBW 50kHz e Frequency readout accuracy Start Stop CF Marker frequency e Count frequency marker Resolution 1Hz to 1kHz Count accuracy marker frequency frequency reference accuracy 1LSD 5Hz S N gt 25dB 50kHz lt SPAN lt 10MHz RBW gt 100kHz e Frequency reference accuracy 2x10 S Year 1x10 5 0 C to 50 C e Frequency span Range Accuracy
389. ormalize is executed without displaying the display line the level display value shows the absolute value dBm etc from the reference value and the relative value dB is not displayed Toggle the normalize ON OFF Store the current trace A data into the backup memory as CORRECTION DATA Turn normalize ON by completing the following operations D Establish the display line near the midpoint between the signal maximum and minimum levels Q Store the current trace data into the backup memory as CORRECTION DATA Setthe to Set normalize ON 2 7 24 Feb 25 98 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 2 TRACE Functions Select the CORRECTION DATA for normalizing BKUP Normalize is performed using CORRECTION DATA which is saved in the backup memory of the spectrum analyzer if this mode and Normalize are activated In this mode the CORRECTION DATA is saved in the backup memory of the spectrum analyzer when recalling the data from the memory card however a few seconds are required to save MEM A Normalize is performed using CORRECTION DATA which is saved in the memory of the spectrum analyzer if this mode and Normalize are activated In this mode the CORRECTION DATA is saved in the memory of the spectrum analyzer when recalling the data from the memory card Note The data in this mem
390. ory card 0 C to 50 C RH 85 or less 20 C to 60 C Connector 4 pin Input range 10V to 16V Automatically selections between 100VAC and 220VAC Voltage 100V to 120V Frequency 50 60Hz Voltage 220V to 240V Frequency 50 60Hz During DC operation 55W max During AC adapter is used 120VA max AC adapter is 300VA max by load Approx 6 8kg Without option accessory carrying belt and battery Approx 148 height X 291 wide 330 depth mm Excluding the projecting legs connector etc 2 slot upper panel Connector JEIDA Ver 4 1 PCMCIA Rev 2 0 13 22 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 4 U4341N Specitications 13 4 U4341N Specifications 1 Frequency Frequency range 9kHz to 2 2GHz Frequency readout accuracy span X span accuracy 0 15 x RBW 50kHz Start Stop CF Marker frequency Count frequency marker Resolution Count accuracy 1Hz to 1kHz marker frequency X frequency reference accuracy 1LSD 5Hz S N gt 25dB 50kHz lt SPAN lt 10MHz RBW gt 100kHz 2x10 6 Year 1X10 5 0 C to 50 C Frequency reference accuracy Frequency span Range Accuracy 50kHz to 2 4GHz ZERO lt 5 SPAN gt 100kHz Frequency stability Residual FM Drift lt 3kHz p p 100ms lt 10kHz Frequency is fixed 30 minutes after powe
391. ory card to copy has a file with a same name the following softkeys are displayed with a message confirming the overwriting ee eee e A T e m m e See ee m m ne o ee a e n 7 56 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 6 Save Recall Functions of Memory Card Proceed with the copy of the selected file M tu 5 o a a o r softkeys are displayed with a message confirming the overwriting Copies all the files in the memory card on the active drive to the memory card on the other drive At that time moving the active cursor switches the display and gt in the copy menu Before executing the copy the following softmenus are displayed to confirm the copy execution Proceed with the drive RARIPE I 7 1 CANCEL 1 to the previous menu 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 J 1 1 t Select the active drive of the memory card Store the user defined softmenu and load it Load the user defined softmenu from a memory card Dono a 2 rate dte tete St
392. ory is lost when you turn off the power of the spectrum analyzer When you wish to turn on Normalize in this mode after powering on recall CORRECTION DATA from the memory card I 1 i 1 1 1 I i 1 1 I 1 1 me gt gt B RETURN A Return to the previous menu terre st 7 24a Feb 25 98 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 2 TRACE Functions This page has been intentionally left blank 7 240 25 98 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 3 Marker Sect on Functions 7 3 Marker Section Functions The normal marker and Amarker can be placed anywhere on a trace the frequency and level data at that point are displayed Figure 7 10 The MARKER section on front panel 7 3 4 Marker ON 1 Both normal marker and Amarker OFF Pushing MKR turns the marker ON the marker Symbol is shown on the trace and the marker frequency and level parameters are displayed at the top left of the screen The marker can be moved with the numeric key and units keys the V 4 step keys and the data knob lt When softmenu also disappears display the marker is turned ON and can be moved Select the normal marker for for setup or manipulation Display the Amarker Symbol initially at the same place as the normal marker marker area will begin
393. ous step and the current marker level 6 14 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 3 Level Measurement 6 3 2 Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Measurement Example third order intermodulation distortion measurement of a 20 dB gain amplifier Front panel U4941 Gain 20 dB Power DUT c m source 30 1 combiner _ 30 dBm rain M M rm Figure 6 15 Third order intermodulation distortion measurement 1 As shown in Figure 6 15 begin by connecting two signal generators and B by power combiner The two signals 30 MHz and 30 1 MHz are then passed through a 20 dB gain amplifier under test to the input of the analyzer 2 omen the following keys Press the keys 1 Two signal levels on the screen are equal with the reference level to adjust the output level of the signal source and B 6 15 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 3 Level Measurement MEAS2 3 Press the keys in order and ud Adjust the output 4 i v _ 37 _ REF 0 0 dBm 10987 ATT 30 dB 4 1 a 5o 5 xS fera Mt aret t gt etd kHz level of the and B signal sources for corresponding the peak level of 2 signals on the screen to to the reference level If a wav
394. ows the list of data which is processed in burst error median average value and maximum minimum modes ON When you want to display ordinary ID list set these modes to OFF Figure 5 2 Display of ID list LIST IDTRG Sets ID code displayed on the cursor line of ID list to ID trigger However the code with CRC UW error cannot be set to the trigger IDTRG ipur Becomes ID trigger ID input state Pressing this key again releases the input state After completing ID input be sure to release the input State CS ID and PS ID numerical value must be input with hexadecimal number Press the unit key to define input data Press only the unit key for input switching Note During inputting ID number ordinary keys cannot be operated PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION u Panel key and numeric value input Use numeric value key for 0 9 of hexadecimal number Function keys of A F are assigned clockwise CENTER STOP REF LEVEL g F START 4 RETURN f Finishes displaying ID list E Selects trigger mode Figure ET Trigger menu FREE RUN Sets the trigger mode to FREE RUN 2 VIDEO Sets the trigger mode to VIDEO 5 4 1 96 5 ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION 5 2 Soft menu configuration 3 ID Sets the trigger mode to ID ID code which is set now is displayed on the screen as shown in Fig 5 4 When the trigger mode is se
395. ows you to connect the analyzer to other GPIB devices more easily than you can using single bus cables making it easier to construct or modify high grade measuring systems 2 Each device on the GPIB can be assigned the role of controller talker sender or listener receiver Devices commonly change roles while the system is operating although there can only be one controller Only one device can talk at a time though multiple devices can listen The controller specifies the talker and listener addresses and transfers data from the talker to the listener controller itself can also play the role of talker and can specify listener measurement conditions 3 GPIB panel switches D Remote lamp This lamp lights when the TRACE DEFINE SAVE POWER 8 analyzer is set to External control mode MEAS1 MEAS2 SHIFT OFF MKR PRESET LCL key SS een 52 This key switches the analyzer between Remote and Local control allowing you for example to interrupt external control and enable input from the front panel SHIFT key This key with the LCL key specifies the GPIB address GPIB connector This terminal connects the analyzer to the external controller or to a plotter Rear Panel 11 1 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 1 Overview of the GPIB 4 You can use the GPIB controller to do the following Set measurement conditions enter the measurement conditions as you wo
396. p OFF Delay sweep ON Sets a sweep time Escapes from the delay mode Turns off the delay sweep mode if the delay sweep mode is set to ON Dismisses the window if the window is displayed Note This key must be pushed when the measurement is ended CAUTION 1 If the trigger is set to FREE RUN the delay mode is released 2 the frequency span is set except zero the delay mode is released 7 41 Mar 1 97 _ FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 4 Measurement MEAS Section 4 Peak list function The peak list function allows detecting the peak of the on screen waveform and displaying the data as the list The list can be displayed in the order of the frequency or the level MEAS1 When this key is pressed the single sweep mode is set and the peak list is displayed Refer to Figure 7 25a All marker functions are set to OFF For functions that are turned to OFF by the peak list display refer to Subsection 7 3 4 Marker OFF REF 0 0 dBm 1 E A1 an ae b Figure 7 25a Peak List 1 D The peak list may be simplified when the softkey menu is being displayed The following shows the example a When frequency is on the horizontal axis the unit is simplified as follows GHz MHz kHz k Hz gt H b The unit of the level is displayed in the following manner When the unit of the level is dBm dB4V dByVemt dBmV or dBpW it is not displayed Refer to the unit of
397. peak Q Set the center frequency to the carrier frequency and the frequency span to slightly greater then the peak shift so that measurements can easily be made eene 2C CH at and use the step keys to set the desired span Set the resolution bandwidth wide enough to include the main side bands at least five times greater than the modulation frequency SHAUTO MNL and use the vA La keys to adjust RBW Finally move the Amarker to the spectrum shoulder see Figures 6 27 and 6 28 Call the Amarker frequency Then Afpeak and modulation index m can be found from m _ _ 2 fm REF 7 3 dbn 1D dB ATT 19 x ak ie ry 10 dB FELINE EH AN 700 0 kHz Wi 100 ms Figure 6 27 signal with small Afpeak Figure 6 28 FM signal with large Afpeay 6 26 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements 4 Finding the modulation index m when m is small If the FM signal modulation index m is less than 0 8 or so we can approximate it by on the linear scale Esp Ec Esp is the first sideband level Ec is the carrier level D Set the center frequency to the carrier frequency the frequency span so that the nearest sidebands can easily be seen and the reference level to the carrier peak level and use the vA Lo step keys to
398. pect to it Otherwise they are with respect to the reference level Enable ON or disable OFF the display of the corresponding limit line 1 or 2 SHIFT UTIL Time domain Create a limit line A Enable the limit line 1 or 2 and go to data entry mode The data table can be scrolled with the data knob C and step keys 4 TIME 1 Time data input points should be absolute or relative data When the 21 ABS REL 4 delay sweep is on absolute values are with respect to the delay position Otherwise absolute values and relative values are with respect to the leftmost side of the screen Level data input points should be absolute or relative data When the display line is present relative values are with respect to it Otherwise they are with respect to the reference level Enable ON or disable OFF the display of the corresponding limit line 1 Soror 2 LIMIT 2 ud ON OFF 1 u uum uma uum 7 85 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 13 Utility Functions 3 Limit Line data table creation The method of creating the data table is the same for both the frequency domain and time domain limit line Also the same procedure is used to enter the data for the antenna factor correction data of section 7 13 1 Antenna Factor Correction Data entry or edit mode is set by one of the following key press sequences SHIFT In any case
399. please ask your nearest Advantest dealer Our address and phone number are listed at the end of this manual Symbols of those warning labels are shown below together with their meaning DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious personal injury WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which will result in death or serious personal injury CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which will result in personal injury or a damage to property including the product Basic Precautions Please observe the following precautions to prevent fire burn clectric shock and personal inju ry Use a power cable rated for the voltage in question Be sure however to use a power cable conforming to safety standards of your nation when using a product overseas When inserting the plug into the electrical outlet first turn the power switch OFF and then insert the plug as far as it will go When removing the plug from the electrical outlet first turn the power switch OFF and then pull it out by gripping the plug Do not pull on the power cable itself Make sure your hands arc dry at this time Before turning on the power be sure to check that the supply voltage matches the voltage requirements of the instrument Connect the power cable to a power outlet that 1s connected to a protected ground terminal Grounding will be defcated if you use an extension cord which
400. quency _ channel MHz _ MHz MHz CCC 61 444 00 to 450 00 DDD 62 450 00 to 456 00 63 456 00 to 462 00 64 462 00 to 468 00 65 468 00 to 474 00 66 474 00 to 480 00 67 480 00 to 486 00 68 486 00 to 492 00 69 492 00 to 498 00 70 498 00 to 504 00 71 504 00 to 510 00 72 510 00 to 516 00 73 22 516 00 to 522 00 74 522 00 to 528 00 75 528 00 to 534 00 76 534 00 to 540 00 77 540 00 to 546 00 78 546 00 to 552 00 79 552 00 to 558 00 80 558 00 to 564 00 81 564 00 to 570 00 82 570 00 to 576 00 83 576 00 to 582 00 84 582 00 to 588 00 85 588 00 to 594 00 86 594 00 to 600 00 87 600 00 to 606 00 88 606 00 to 612 00 89 612 00 to 618 00 90 618 00 to 624 00 91 624 00 630 00 92 630 00 to 636 00 93 636 00 to 642 00 94 642 00 to 648 00 9 48 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table 10 West Europe D VHF Table 9 39 Channel table of VHF in west Europe Analyzer Frequency range frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz MHz A7 00 to 54 00 54 00 to 61 00 61 00 to 68 00 174 00 to 181 00 181 00 to 188 00 188 00 to 195 00 195 00 to 202 00 202 00 to 209 00 209 00 to 216 00 216 00 to 223 00 223 00 to 230 00 2 UHF Table 9 40 Channel table of UHF in west eve S Chaine Frequency range Picture CEU Sound frequency channel MHz MHz 470 Q0 to 478 00 478 00 to 486 00 486 00 to 494
401. quency span and a reference level and so on are changed under normalizing the analyzer there is a possibility of not performing the normalization correctly In such a case normalize the analyzer again from the beginning 2 Starting Measurement p Connect between the TG OUTPUT connector and the INPUT connector by using measuring cables as shown in Figure 10 4 10 7 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 10 3 Measurement Exampie Figure 10 4 Connecting Q Press 9 to set the sweep time to 2 seconds Note This setting allows the sweep time not to influence the waveform Then the screen changes as shown in Figure 10 5 TdB 4 RBW ATT 10dB UE aie de VEN GALL AUTO eS 200 00 MHz 20 00 MHz RBW 100 kHz VBW 1 kHz SWP 2 0 S _ Figure 10 5 Sweep Time for 2 Seconds 10 8 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 10 3 Measurement Example Measuring the following three items a lnsertion loss b Passing bandwidth c Attenuation Measurement of an insertion loss D Press CF to locate a marker at 200MHz on the screen The insertion loss of 200MHz is displayed as the readout of the marker Note When the display line is shown a marker level indicates a value based on the display line Then the screen changes as shown in Figure 10 6 MER 700 00 MHZ
402. r 2 When using the AC DC adapter or an external DC power supply always check that the conditions of Tables 2 2 or 2 3 are satisfied Failure to do so can result in damage to the analyzer 3 A08364 is an AC DC adapter only for this analyzer Do not use A08364 for other use 4 In the event of trouble of AC DC adpater please contact the sales and support offices 2 4 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 2 4 Before Turning the Power On 2 4 2 Battery Operation Figure 2 1 Battery pack Anton Bauer company Approximately 2 hour of continuous operation is possible using the PROPAC14 battery recommended by ADVANTEST The battery is installed into battery mounter of back panel on the analyzer see 4 1 Initial Power on For information about recharging the Battery pack please see the instructions that accompanied the battery 2 4 3 AC Operation Using the AC DC Adapter Figure 2 2 AC DC adapter 2 5 Jun 10 97 1 2 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 2 4 Before Turning the Power Power supply conditions n AC operation is possible using the AC DC adapter supplied with ADVANTEST 08364 Power supply requirements are spelled out in Table 2 2 Table 2 2 AC power requirements _ Trower 120 VA or less U4341 series U4342 series This input voltage is automatically changed between 100VAC system and 200VAC system Connecting the AC DC adapter to the analyzer Figu
403. r ON Sweep time 50ms to 5s temperature is fixed Sideband noise lt 100dBc Hz 20kHz offset Resolution bandwidth 3 dB Range Bandwidth range accuracy 1kHz to 3MHz 1 3 sequence lt 20 1kHz to 1MHz lt 25 3MHz lt 15 1 60dB 10Hz to 3MHz Selectivity Video bandwidth 13 23 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 4 U4341N Specifications 2 Amplitude range 1304 to average indicated noise level e Maximum input level Preamplifier OFF 1349 V Input ATT gt 10dB 50V DC max 1200BuV 50V DC Preamplifier ON e Display range Log 10 x 10div 10 5 2 1dB div 1096 div of reference level Linear Reference level range Preamplifier OFF Log 469 to 150 0 1dB step Linear 199 5 to 31 62V Preamplifier ON _ Log 26dBuV to 115dBzV 0 1dB step 19 95 to 1V 0 to 50dB 104 step Linear input attenuator range 13 24 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL s 13 4 U4341N Specifications 3 Dynamic range Display average noise level Preamplifier OFF 2 7 GHz dB RBW 1kHz VBW 10Hz INPUT 0dB frequency 1MHz or more Preamplifier ON 23dB V 3 3f GHz dB RBW 1kHz VBW 10Hz INPUT ATT OdB frequency 1MHz or more e 1 dB gain c
404. r for connection to external controller 5 5 when remote controis the analyzer using a GPIB interface 0 GPIB connector GPIB connector for external control 1 connection to printer plotter Battery mount Battery Anton Bauer PROPAC14 or AC DC 2 4 Adapter A08364 mounts here FUSE Fuse for the external DC power supply IN connector EXT TRIG connector J o 2 4 4 10A 250V External DC power connects here via the external DC power cable A01434 Input voltage range 10V to 16V Cooling fan exhausts heat outside the analyzer e 1 1 p 1 1 t D 3 14 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 2 U4341 series Figure 3 5 Rear panel U4341 series 10 97 Jun 3 15 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 3 2 U4341 series 3 2 3 Top Panel Figure 3 6 shows the location of each numbered item further details and explanations will be found in the indicated sections Lights when memory card iS in use 5 4 Lights when memory card B is in use Drive A slot Memory card is inserted here Drive B slot Memory card B is inserted here Drive A eject Push button to eject memory card 5 4 CAUTION DO NOT PRESS THE EJECT BUTTON WHILE THE DRIVE LAMP IS RED LIGHT Volume and intensity Knob to control the light for display by turning 7 1 6 knob wit
405. r or sales and support office You will find address and telephone numbers at the end of this manual Please note that you will be charged for any repair work necessary including anything in the check list here The analyzer cannot be The battery AC DC Adapter and Turn off the power supply and powered up or the DC power supply cable is reconnect carefully not making good contact with the analyzer _ The AC Adapter Power Switch is not turned On Turn on the Adapter Power Switch and check that the green LED comes on Check whether or not operation is possible with an external DC supply or the battery Exchange with a new battery Replace the fuse Change the location or the angle of view of the analyzer Use the CONFIG function to change the Color settings present it is not displayed _ not making good connection the source and the analyzer The analyzer will not sweep Single Sweep mode has been Change to Continuous Sweep selected mode Trace is in VIEW mode Set the Trace to WRITE mode Measurement Levels are Level shift due to environmental Redo the internal Calibration incomect procedure AC Adapter is defective The battery has been discharged The power fuse is blown __ Maybe because of too much ambient light or light is reflecting off of the screen Displays on the
406. r type R9833 if you use a plotter 682 provided by Hitachi Electronics Ltd Figure 5 9 Plotter type selection 5 8 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data Plot mode selection The display screen output mode is set with the Each push cycles through the possible modes see Table 5 2 In the case of TABLE DATA a further selection process is needed Figure 5 10 Plotter mode selection Table 5 2 Plot mode owes eye me OOOO Outputs setting condition only Outputs grid line on display screen only Outputs marks only such as display line limit line or marker Outputs table data such as antenna coefficient or limit line shown in Table 5 3 When all or setup is selected the input label are automatically output Table 5 3 Table data Table data on limit line 2 5 9 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data TABLE data type selection This menu item only becomes active if the Plotter Mode has been set to be TABLE Pushing the MKR 400 003 MH REF D 0 dBm _ c 104 will cycle the selection arrow through the possible data types see Table 5 3 If necessary to escape from this menu push to return to Paper size selection MKR 400 003 MHz REF D Q0 Figure 5 12 Paper size selection 5 10 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MAN
407. r use in the U4941 series Cards should conform either to the JEIDA IC Memory Card Guideline Version 4 1 or to the PCMCIA Release 2 0 Specification Audio and video outputs available Monitoring of AM or FM modulated audio signals is possible using a built in speaker The video output composite signal of NTSC standard is equipped and can be changed into PAL standard by optional specification There is also an output signal for this video available for connection to an external video printer to make hard copy of display waveforms easy 1 2 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 1 1 Outline of the Analyzer Remote control via RS 232 or GPIB The analyzer can be remotely controlled either by an RS 232 serial connection or a GPIB parallel port Thus the analyzer can also be incorporated into a larger measurement system When using GPIB output can be directed to printer or plotter Accessory and peripheral equipment Besides the battery and memory card there are also carrying bags and carrying cases available 1 3 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 1 1 Outline of the Analyzer 1 1 2 14341 series U4341 series have TV demodulation function to see the picture and to listen to the sound as well as ordinary TV TV video modulation is supported by AM system but not by FM system The input impedance of U4341 is 500 The input impedance of U4341N is 750 Feature D e Outputs color picture on scr
408. rated inside a spectrum analyzer by leakage from the local oscillator or other specific internal signal sources even when no signal for analysis is applied Residual response is important when analyzing extremely small signals The residual response for the analyzer is shown in Table 6 5 _ Table 6 5 Residual response 4 4 U4941 4341 4942 49414N 4941N 4342N Remarks response U4941PHS 4342PHS Amplifier OFF 100 dBm or less frequency of 1 MHz or more Amplifier ON 10 or less 4941 4341 4342 U4941PHS 4342PH3 Input terminal of 500 U4941N 4341N 4342N Input terminal of 75 9 115 dBm or less 5 dB V or less The above four items therefore give rise to the limits on measurement dynamic range It is important to be able to decide which factor has the largest influence in any given situation For example when measuring spurious signals due to distortion etc the input attenuator should be set as large as possible in order that the mixer input level be as small as possible However to the extent that the attenuation is increased the input sensitivity will be decreased When the distortion level to be measured is much larger than the analyzer internal distortion then there is especially no particular problem however to measure distortion levels similar to or even much smaller than the analyzer distortion level it is necessary to use a filter or other means
409. re 2 3 AC DC adapter and battery connection diagram LED for checking power source Rear panel U4941 Attach the connection side of the AC DC adapter to the battery mounter position of the rear panel Push the AC DC adapter in and down The attachment is completed by hearing a click sound source on the upper adapter is lit Plug the power cord into the AC inflate of the AC DC adapter for connecting to the AC line Turn on the power supply switch of the AC DC adapter The LED for checking power When removing the AC DC adapter turn off the power supply of the analyzer and the AC DC adapter and lift up the detachment lever on the upper panel on the unit backward and then detach the AC DC adapter 2 6 Jun 10 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 2 4 Before Turning the Power 3 2 4 4 1 2 Power plug cables ADVANTEST provides the power cables for each country See yellow page of Table of Power Options at this manual DC Power Supply Operation DC power supply requirements The DC power supply can be operated by using the external DC power cable A01434 option The operation requirements for the unit is shown in Table 2 3 Table 2 3 Analyzer DC power requirements Input voltage 10 V to 16 V Power consumption 50 W or less U4941 series 55 W or less U4341 series U4342 series Connecting a DC supply to the analyzer CAUTION 1 When attaching to the Supply be sure t
410. re 5 21 Video printer connection diagram 2 Video printer output operation The analyzer at all times presents a composite video output signal that corresponds to the current display being seen on the color LCD display After connection Figure 5 21 a hard copy can be made at any time by simply pressing the PRINT key on the video printer 5 20 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 4 Memory Card Use 5 4 Memory Card Use Memory Cards are used by the analyzer as a storage medium for backing up the current setup configuration and waveform spectral data As the features of the memory card function of this analyzer the memory card drive has two slots Therefore two memory cards can be used at a time CAUTION Use memory cards conforming to either standard of the following e Japan Electronic Industry Developmane Association JEIDA IC Memory Card Guideline Version 4 1 United States standards PCMCIA Release 2 0 5 4 1 Memory Card Related Functions This section will describe the how memory cards are initialized and used 1 Memory cards that can be used in the analyzer D Corresponds to JEIDA Ver 4 1 68 pin 2 piece connector TYPE 1 Comprises a common memory and an attribute memory including card attribute information device information tuple attribute memory information common memory information Or comprises only a command memory including card attribute information The following memory typ
411. requency X frequency reference accuracy 1LSD 5Hz S N gt 2598 50kHz lt SPAN lt 10MHz RBW gt 100kHz Frequency reference accuracy 2x10 6 Year 1 10 5 0 C to 50 C Frequency span Range Accuracy 50kHz to 2 4GHz ZERO lt 5 SPAN gt 100kHz Frequency stability Residual FM Drift lt 3kHz p p 100ms lt 10kHz Frequency is fixed 30 minutes after power ON Sweep time 50ms to 5s temperature is fixed e Sideband noise lt 100dBc Hz 20kHz offset le Resolution bandwidth 3dB Range Bandwidth range accuracy ikHz to 3MHz 1 3 sequence lt 20 1kHz to 1MHz lt 25 3MHz Selectivity lt 15 1 609 Bandwidth 6dB 9kHz 120kHz Video bandwidth 10Hz to 3MHz 1 10 sequence 13 31 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 5 U4342 4342PHS Specifications 2 Amplitude Range 20dBm to Average indicated noise level Measurement range Maximum input level Preamplifier OFF 27dBm Input ATT z 10dB 50V DC max 13dBm ATT 0dB 50V DC max Preamplifier ON e Display range Log 10 10div 10 5 2 1dB div 10 div of reference level 40dB 5dB div Linear QP Log Heference level range Preamplifier OFF Log 64dBm to 40dBm 0 1dB step Linear 141 1
412. rogramming Examples 1 How to use the serial O 2 Input output of trace data 3 Status byte readout function 4 Panel key lock function 5 5 7 Data Communication Errors 5 5 8 List of Control Character Codes 5 5 9 N88 BASIC HP BASIC Sample Programs 5 5 10 Exceptional Processing sauces EXCPTEUR 1 Input signal frequency range 2 Resolution bandwidth 3 Video Bandwidth VBW 4 Sweep ime OWP sai ek rene 5 Input attenuator ATT we eked hae eH ROC 6 1 2 Maximum Input Level and Dynamic Range C Maximum Input lGVBl 5 estate Sore Cot e 2 Dynamic TANCES ex ws E ARCA Average display noise level 1 dB gain compression point SDUNOUS TESDONSS Residual response xu des hee EE 6 2 Frequency Measurement Moi ipa a ats 6 2 1 Normal Marker Frequency Measurement 6 2 2 Marker Frequency Counter Mode Frequency Measurement 6 3 Level Measurement
413. s 4 4 Panel keys and Sofikeys sve Ila RR EA RO 4 5 Active arsa display eoe d RS EES 4 7 Data input Lee cuc Vea e de NX wA EXON CR M ARCA 4 7 Panel kevys and Soll KoyS 2 20 RS SX ssi eed E rre 5 1 Softkey menu and softkeyS 5 2 Panel keys in the function section 5 3 DATA ENTRY section part of the front panel 5 5 4 Display annoteblion d roit ui Daa Rede ce wot ad oe 5 5 Plotter connection diagram 5 6 Plotter DIP switch settingS 4 5 7 Plotter configuration window 2 2 4 24 4 4 5 8 Plotter type selection or RO dO a Rn 5 8 Plotter mode selection TIPP 5 9 TABLE data type selection 5 10 Paper size selection 5 10 Pan count Salecuoli lp GE E aue ORC GENER as ae 5 11 F 1 Jun 10 97 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 20 5 20b 5 20c 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 5 34 5 35 5 36 5 37 5 38 5 39 6 1 6 3 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Display division douce ace die ae
414. s in channel input mode identifies TV channel number by marker frequency and displays the channel besides the marker frequency the marker level the applicable channel number does not exist is displayed At the time of monitor screen the present marker channel number is displayed on the top left of the screen as Fig 9 9 shows SPAN 10 0 SWF 50 ms Figure 9 9 Channel number display screen 9 15 Apr 1 96 ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table 9 5 TV Channel Table 9 5 1 Standard Mode The relationship between TV mode and scan line is shown in Table 9 1 Table 9 1 TV mode and scan line number eos 625 625 sos The following table shows TV standard mode TV mode in each country D PAL D PAL Table 9 2 TV standard mode foa M NTSC M NTSC V WNTSO WNTSC Bugara D SECAM K SECAM BPAL _ Old Soviet Union B PAL G PAL D SECAM Greece IBISECAM G SECAM Old East Germany Holland B PAL G PAL ia PAL _ Spain B PAL G PAL Sweden BPAL O Old West Germany B PAL G PAL 9 16 e 525 Czechoslovakia D SECAM 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channei Tabie 9 5 2 Channel Table Title by Band The followings show the channel tables which can be used with channel assignment function 1 VHF Table 9 3 Channel table
415. s on the signal name refer to Table 5 7 Signal names of serial input output interfaces 5 19 Apr 20 97 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data 3 Printer output procedure CONFIG key is used for the setup printer Press COPY key for the print output D PRINTER output selection SHIET CONFIG ts 4 1 5 Press 4 When the printer has been selected at the output devices where the screen data is sent Q PRINTER size selection SHIFT CONFIG Press to LRG or SML 1 and select the print size t LRG SML B Selecting LRG Print in large size Selecting SML Print in small size GPIB address selection This is available when the PCL command is selected SHIFT CONFIG e PRINTER 6 3d _CONFIG_ ADRS 01 mae m Press 2 and select the addressing mode to TALK or ADRS 01 Selecting TALK TALK ONLY mode is selected initial default mode Selecting ADRS 01 The address of the output device must be entered Use the NUMERIC key pad Lo step key or data knob to enter the GPIB address of the printer Note Make sure the printer is really set to the same address Printer selection with commands SHIFT CONFIG o nity 1 gt z SOT Y Pressing ESC ones 1 conme 1819 8 pcuesc
416. s set the screen is automatically set from the former output position When the MNL is set the position to be output can be set M GPIB addressing mode address setup 7 Pushing the key toggles between addressing modes When TALK appears in reverse video the analyzer is setup to be a GPIB talk only device When ADRS 01 is active the address of the output device must be entered Use the numeric key vA step keys or data knob e to enter the GPIB address of the plotter 5 13 Apr 20 97 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data CAUTION Make sure the plotter is really set to the same address 4 Plotter output execution and cancellation SHIFT COPY Now that all the setup has been completed pressing Perform the plotter output according to the step 3 Plotter output procedure SHIFT CONFIG pee OE Pressing CANCEL enables to cancel the plotter output during the plot is output 5 14 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data CAUTION 1 Please refer to the appropriate instruction manual for each plotter for information about its use 2 The analyzer and all of the plotters that can be used by the analyzer support the protocol HP GL specification In setting up mode check that your plotter is set for HP GL Some plotters can not support display division For example tow picture division can not be done wit
417. screen data to the plotter Outputs the screen data to the memory card drive Outputs the screen data to the memory card drive B Return to the previous menu CAUTION Please don t select printer and attach a plotter or plotter and attach a printer Display screen copy cannot be done if the selection here is reversed 7 65 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function Initialization Function 2 Printer output configuration menu SHIFT CONFIG AT PRINTER Display the printer configuration setup menu 1 CONFIG For details see 5 3 2 Printer Output Toggle the printer size LRG SML When LRG is selected Print out in large size When SML is selected Print out in small size Note This key is effective when the PCL command was selected Toggle the printer TALK TALK only ADRS 01 address 01 In TALK the analyzer becomes a TALK ONLY device and the printer should be set to LISTEN ONLY When ADRS 01 is selected then the printer address can be specified with the numeric key and units keys the Le step keys or the data knob Be sure the printer is actually set to the same address CMND Toggle the print command PCL ESC PCL ESC When PCL is selected Select the printer to which the PCL command can be used This command is output from the GPIB port When ESC is selected Select the printer to which the ESC P command can
418. scription of specifications of PHS ID demodulation function perfor mance Note following specifications of performance are about PHS ID demodulation functions For other specifications of performance see Specifications of performance in the operation manual U3641 Series Operation Manual U4941 4341 4342 Series Operation Manual Refer to the manual which you are using e incoming signal PHS logic control channel Except option Based on RCR STD 28 Level measurement Pre amp ON 16dBuV to 67dBuV 0dB 91dBm to 40dBm _ Pre amp OFF 52dBuV to 107dbuV ATT 10dB 55dBm to OdBm Sweep time is under 400 ms Level operating function Median process average process maximum minimum process Trigger mode Free Run Video ID Sync CS ID Measurement items Base station mobile station level measurement Specified base station burst error rate measurement Specified base station cycle measurement Function Frequency channel set Measurement result list display CS ID PS ID CI level and time marker Auto measurement Saves measurement results into memory card Mar 15 97 _ 7 1 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION Recommended operation environment 10 C to 40 7 2 Apr 1 96 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION APPENDIX This chapter provides a description of PHS carrier frequency assignment memory card C
419. several types as follows Spurious signals can Higher Harmonic spurious This is the higher harmonic level generated by the spectrum analyzer itself normally in the mixer circuit when an ideal undistorted signal is fed to the analyzer This also means the efficiency to measure higher harmonic distortion Adjacent spurious This is the small spurious signal generated in the vicinity of the spectrum when a pure single spectrum signal is fed to the spectrum analyzer Non higher Harmonic spurious This is spurious signal of a certain inherent frequency generated by the spectrum analyzer itself This is also called residual response Spurious Response This is distortion caused by the higher harmonic spurious signal generated in the input mixer when the signal level is increased The range that can be used without distortion varies according to the input level of the basic wave In the example shown Figure 4 the range is from 30dBm to 70dB If the input signal level is too great the input attenuator is used to decrease the signal fed to the mixer so that a proper input level can be obtained 10 Fundamentay ELE Harmonics EP 7 2 FLU TU 70 70 dB n ppl ale alle ih T Sine 3rd Order 10 Harmonics MEX bue 60 40 20 0 20 dBm Input level 5 2 a 2 2 A Figure A 4 Spurious Response 4 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER O
420. sh 4 4 1 Getting setup for the measurement 4 4 2 Measurement BEGINS xxx d s ewe ei PY Sq E Sale cedat ad 4 4 3 Some preliminary information about the analyzer operation 4 5 4 Setting the center frequency 4 8 5 Setting the frequency span 4 8 6 Setting the reference level 4 9 7 Measuring the frequency and level 4 9 8 Some handy functions MKR CF MKR REF 4 10 5 METHOD OF OPERATION ac 46 646 ence acie rra edes 5 1 5 1 Analyzer Control Key Functions 5 1 1 The display section dE uL S trud 5 2 2 uc a E DON t 5 3 3 DATA ENIRY SSecUOD 44 4 02444 544 peu EEG c 5 4 5 2 Screen Display Annotation 5 5 5 9 Soren Dala eue La a bo drca nC nx 5 6 Soe PIONEER 20 E REOR beraten ici 5 6 1 Connection to the plotter 5 6 2 PIOUGr s Rer ax e p eR ad BR ea E qs 5 7 3 Plotter output procedure 5 7 4 Plotter output execution and cancellation 5 14 C 2 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL Table of Contents 5 9 2 RR
421. st Function Listener code Remarks Output format Header OFF ON Soft menu display Soft menu display ON Soft menu display OFF MND OFE el RA m m Product type U4341N U4342 U4342N U4941PHS U4342PHS Product type character character strings delimiter strings character strings delimiter character strings delimiter 35 characters X 2 lines LABEL 1 line Revision output Screen output Back light BKLGT ON OFF BKLGT OFF 11 60 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes M RR RR NU ME aaa Table 11 6 Examples or data entry GPIB codes with asterisk Command example CF100MZ CS100KZ FON10MZ SP500MZ Description Sets center frequency to 100MHz Sets frequency step size to 100 2 Turns frequency offset ON and set it to 10MHz Sets frequency span to 500MHz FA100KZ or FT100KZ FBAOOKZ or FP400KZ RE 25DB or HL 2508 DD5DB Sets start frequency to 100kHz Sets stop frequencies to 400kHz Sets reference level to 25dBm if units are set to dBm Sets 5dB div Turns level offset ON and sets it to 30dB Sets RBW to 300kHz Sets VBW to 100kHz Sets Sweep time to 200msec Sets Attenuator to 20dB RONSODB Turns Marker pause ON and sets the ti
422. state at CHECK is low at DC CHECK OFF the ON When it is not in a normal display blinks state the display blinks and the buzzer sounds 7 72 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function Initialization Function ALARM LEVEL setting Set an alarm level according to some kinds of available batteries Example of Ni Cd battery Setting value Final electric Remarks discharge voltage 11 0V to 12 0V PROPAC14 Manufactured 10 0V to 11 0V by Anton Bauer company 10 0V CAUTION 1 The battery check function operates only after each sweep has been complete 2 When the power supply voltage cannot be monitored displayed 15 7 73 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 9 Copy Function 7 9 Function Figure 7 40 Front panel COPY function key The COPY key is used to make a hard copy of the screen by outputting the data to a printer plotter or memory card Before using the Copy key the output device configuration should be completed with the CONFIG function key refer to 5 3 Output of Screen Data for the hard copy device configuration details SHIFT COPY The copy is then executed by pressing 8 1 Printer plotter memory card output execution SHIFT COPY Output the screen data to the selected output device previously configured When specifying an existing filename to store the screen data on a memory car
423. surement window In NORM stop the window sweep and sweep normally Delete the window display If any measurements are in progress that use the window they are also canceled at that point Display the horizontal movement menu and the increase decrease menu Window vertical axis direction window sweep setup SHIFT m yy ST 1 LOWER AA MX M oor o 5 d 1 P 65 MUR 4 MW Move the window position to the vertical axis direction with the step keys or the data knob C Increase Decrease the window vertical axis width AY with the step keys or the data knob Toggle the UPPER LOWER level of the window When UPPER is selected the upper level can be moved with the numeric key and units keys the 7A step keys or the data knob 7 When LOWER is selected the lower level can be moved with the numeric key and units keys the step keys or the data knob Return to the previous menu 7 93 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 14 Measurement Window Function 3 Measurement example using the window When the window is opened the measurement area is set to only inside the window for sweep or marker function Thus it is possible to define the measurement time SWEEP or search area Marker D Window sweep SHIFT MW NT SW EPC XE
424. surrounding it Pulse modulated waveforms such as from RADAR are commonly analyzed with spectrum analyzers to easily make the following sorts of measurements Pulse repetition frequency PRF Pulse width Carrier frequency fc Peak power Average power Paye Main lobe Side lobe 7 545 labs fc 1 7 fc 1 2 Time axis display b Frequency axis display Figure 6 30 Pulse modulation 6 29 1 96 1 2 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 4 Modulation Signal Measurements CAUTION The maximum allowable input level to the analyzer is 27 dBm and or 50 VDC when the input attenuator is set to 10 dB or higher Since pulse modulated signals ike radar can often have very high peak powers a directional coupler or other attenuator should be inserted in front of the analyzer to provide sufficient attenuation The total input attenuation should be set so that the will be less than the 10 dBm maximum level at the mixer input To avoid mixer saturation it is recommended that you begin with a maximum 50 dB of input attenuation then reduce the attenuation 10 dB at a time as long as the signal level does not decline no gain compression This will find the smallest attenuation necessary Pulse width z Pulse width z is either the inverse of 1 2 the main lobe width or the inverse of the side lobe width In order to get a sufficiently well resolved lo
425. t Function 7 7 Preset Function Figure 7 36 Front panel preset function key PRESET Pushing the key returns of the analyzer display control parameters back to the initial values they had when shipped from the factory Table 7 4 Factory initial setup Parameter setting Initial values Center frequency Frequency span Reference level 0 dBm 110 dBzV Vertical scale 10 dB DIV Sweep time AUTO 50 msec Resolution bandwidth AUTO 3 MHz Video bandwidth AUTO 3 MHz Input attenuator AUTO 10 dB Trigger mode FREE RUN Trace mode A WRITE B BLANK Marker Display line Note The output device printer plotter Me parameters that had set with the CONFIG function cannot be Internal pre amplifier initialized Label function 7 63 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function Initialization Function 7 8 Configuration CONFIG Function Initialization Function Figure 7 37 Front panel CONFIG function key The configuration menus are used to set some items that should only seldom have to be changed in the normal course of using the analyzer Printer plotter memory card output configuration setup Date and time setup DATE function Power OFF function setup RS 232 remote control function setup CPU check function setup LOCK UNLOCK function at the zero span mode setup Battery check function setup 10 MHz frequency reference source external
426. t to ID character is displayed inversely mm homm 2 25 L ph A A b 44 i UN Mor g Ha 453840010 9889406 PAD 0 0 0005 9 4 ID trigger mode Sets the trigger mode to SYNC CS ID The functioning of SYNC CS ID Generates internal trigger signal synchronizing to the set CS ID DOWN cycle Specified ID signal can be observed even if ID could not be detected because of the signal level down etc The delay time for changing the display position can be set in SYNC CS ID mode The range of the setting is the minimum value to ID cycle time Minimum value 351 at the condition of sweep time lt 4 5ms 0 at the condition of sweep time 4 5ms Apr 1 96 5 5 DEMODULATION FUNCTION i 3 25 Soft me pee config FUTT ER oe CAUTION 1 Confirm that ID cycle is measured correctly before setting SYNC CS ID If ID cycle cannot be measured SYNC CS ID trigger cannot be set 2 When ID demodulation cannot be performed for along time due to measurement accuracy of cycle the dis play position of observation signal is changed 3 Use the trigger conditions with CS ID DOWN If UP it becomes DOWN forcibly 4 Delay sweep and zoom function cannot be set in SYNC CS ID mode _ 4 RETURN Ends the trigger mode selection SWEEP sets sweep time SWP can be set in the range between 4 5 ms and 1000 s The function is the
427. ta knob Press rer Level y and then adjust a reference level with the ten keys the step keys or the data knob TT CALTON If resolution bandwidth is 120kHz or less connect a cable between TG output TG ADJ i D ito correct a tracking connector and RF input connector and press error that is a level error caused by the difference between the output frequency of a tracking generator and the tuned frequency of the analyzer 10 1 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 10 1 Usage of Tracking Generator amp Connect a cable between TG OUTPUT connector and INPUT connector A through line frequency characteristic appears on the screen Through line if the transmission loss is not ignored calibrate the loss according to Section 10 2 Connect a device under test DUT CAUTION If the input and output impedance of DUT is not 500 for U4342 4342PHS 750 for U4342N match the input and output impedance of DUT to that of TG INPUT and OUTPUT Opening of measurement See Section 10 3 10 2 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 10 2 How to Normalize a Frequency Characteristic with Reference to a Display Line 10 2 How to Normalize a Frequency Characteristic with Reference to a Display Line This section explain how to normalize the frequency characteristic of a cable with reference to a trace and a display line This operation normalizes the frequency characteristic of t
428. te into variable S 80 IF S AND 4 0 THEN GOTO Executes the loop until 1 stands at the second bit 90 BEEP GOTO LOOP Beeps out the end of the sweep 100 END Example PC 21 Read out the peak frequency and level at every end of the single sweep The SRQ interrupt is not output mr adii 10 ISET IFC ISET REN 20 PRINT 8 HDO SI MFL Sets the header OFF and the single sweep 30 ON SRQ GOSUB SPOLL Specifies the jump destination when the SRQ interrupt is received 40 PRINT 8 S0 Sets the analyzer so as to output the SRQ interrupt 50 SRQ ON Sets PC9801 for enabling the SRQ interrupt 60 POLL 8 5 Clears the status byte 70 LOOP 80 SWP 0 90 PRINT 08 SR Starts the sweep 11 28 Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 7 Service Request SRQ cont d 4OOINTWAT 110 IF SWP 0 THEN GOTO INTWAIT Waits for an interrupt 120 130 PRINT 8 PS Executes the peak search 140 INPUT 28 MF ML Reads the marker frequency and level 150 PRINT PEAK FREQ MF PEAK LEVEL ML 160 GOTO Reads the status byte into variable 5 170 180 SPOLL 190 POLL 8 5 Reads the status byte variable S 200 IF S AND 4 lt gt 0 THEN SWP 1 Ends the sweep if 1 stands at the second bits 210 RETURN Example PC 22 Read out the peak and the second peak of the measurement waveform with the marker counter
429. ted WRITE PROTECT is enable When OFF is selected WRITE PROTECT is disable Return to the previous menu i ei HL Aas 90 Register the setting conditions to the recall register setting conditions specify a file saved in memory card Number of the registerable settings is maximum 9 Register the file in memory card to the recall register Clear the recall register Specify a drive of the card which contains a file to register Return to the previous menu C WALL IW 7 61 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 6 Save Recall Functions of Memory Card Select the active drive in memory card Drive A is the one closest to the front panel of the analyzer Switch the recall function 2 In FAST mode D How to recall SAVE Numeric keys 1 to 9 Register number set with Menu explanation SAVE The softmenu in FAST mode is displayed Register the setting conditions to the recall register setting conditions specify a file saved in memory card Number of the registerable settings is maximum 9 US M CARD DRV Select the active drive in memory card Drive A is the one closest to the front panel of the analyzer Switch the recall function 7 62 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 7 Prese
430. ted at the end of this Operation Manual or Advantest s sales representatives to determine the operating life of a specific component or part as the operating life may vary depending on various factors such as operating condition and usage environment SALES amp SUPPORT Advantest Korea Co Ltd 22BF Kyobo KangNam Tower 1303 22 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul 137 070 Korea Phone 82 2 532 7071 Fax 82 2 532 7132 Advantest Suzhou Co Ltd Shanghai Branch Office Bldg 6D NO 1188 Gumei Road Shanghai China 201102 P R C Phone 86 21 6485 2725 Fax 86 21 6485 2726 Shanghai Branch Office 406 F Ying Building Quantum Plaza No 23 Zhi Chun Road Hai Dian District Beijing China 100083 Phone 86 10 8235 3377 Fax 86 10 8235 6717 Advantest Singapore Pte Ltd 438A Alexandra Road 08 03 06 Alexandra Technopark Singapore 119967 Phone 65 6274 3100 Fax 65 6274 4055 Advantest America Inc 3201 Scott Boulevard Suite Santa Clara CA 95054 U S A Phone 1 408 988 7700 Fax 1 408 987 0691 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Europe GmbH M hldorfstrabe 15 D 81671 M nchen Germany P O B 80 14 60 D 81614 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 4129 137 1 Fax 49 89 4129 13723 ADVANTEST ADVANTEST CORPORATION Shin Marunouchi Center Building 1 6 2 Marunouchi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0005 Japan Phone 81 3 3214 7500 OFFICES http www advantest co jp
431. th and sweep time etc are not set properly accurate measurements may not result Analysis parameters are set with the Coupling key This chapter describes the setting of the resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth the sweep time and the input attenuator 2 Resolution bandwidth RBW The frequency resolution of a spectrum analyzer is specified in terms of its resolution bandwidth This is the bandwidth between the frequency of the peak level and the frequency where the level has dropped 3 dB from the peak With the analyzer the RBW can be set from 1 kHz to 3 MHz REF 11 7 dBm iUdB ATT 10 dB REF 11 7 10dB 10 dB pss D RN pe 5 00 MHz 50 ms Figure 6 1 Using the largest possible IF _ Figure 6 2 Using a very narrow RBW such bandwidth such that 2 signals can that the same two signals are still just be resolved completely separated 6 1 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 1 Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Common to Measurements 3 REF 31 0 dBm When the resolution bandwidth is set to be very narrow the resulting spectrum is also very fine in detail and has increased resolution of the spectral components See Figure 6 2 Thus it is possible to separate a signal from neighboring noise or two closely spaced spectral components But as the resolution
432. the WRITE mode then the current sweep result has B memory data subtracted from it and then this is stored When trace A is in the VIEW or BLANK mode then the difference is taken between the B and memories and the result stored in A But when trace is in the WRITE mode then B has the current sweep result subtracted from it and then this is stored in A When trace is in the VIEW or BLANK mode then subtract the display line from the A memory data and save the result in A But when trace is in the WRITE mode then subtract the display line from the current sweep result and store the result in A G MSS art 45 Display the normalize menu Si en 1 See the next section 7 2 4 Normalize Return to the previous menu 7 23 Apr 1 96 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 7 2 TRACE Functions 7 2 4 Normalize Mode Trace A Only The normalize function makes waveform comparison easy by treating reference signal as a display line data The normalize is operated in the following procedure Display the display line data Store the reference signal into the memory as CORRECTION DATA and establish the value as display line Relative difference between the CORRECTION DATA and the input data is displayed on screen by inputting the comparing signal Normalize ON CAUTION When executing the normalize always be sure to display the display line the n
433. the color The adjustment stages are from 0 to 99 1 1 e 2 lu Adjusts the brightness of the displayed characters OSD The adjustment stages are from 0 to 99 d M As zi 4 x P 4 O Displays the following menu TVIDEO HF Switches VIDEO input demodulation system AM FM 54 AM FM_j 7 Note FM demodulation cannot be set now 1 T GOLOR Switches NTSC system and PAL system i Emm NTSC PAL PAL system contains SECAM system Refer to 9 5 1 Y 8 5 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 8 3 Adjustment of TV Monitor Screen SHIFT Key PICTURE Key Selects TV standard mode Refer to 9 5 1 gt I e Sets up the standard mode B G Sets up the standard mode Sets up the standard mode D K K1 Sets up the standard mode 1 11 Sets up the standard mode M Returns to the previous softkey menu were ee is es ees ee ee eee PRINS uf Selects NORMAL mode or INVERT mode to use the picture frequency and the sound frequency which demodulate during TV monitoring Normal mode is when the picture frequency the sound frequency Invert mode is when the picture frequency gt the sound frequency oe 4
434. ti a 4 i n nx xcd mc em c ede l i j wt ere wre oe ee d ge i ee 7 e gt 1 2l gt 258525050 R iff i So Dopo o t D 2 2 Dl 1 i m 1 t q lt q lt 1 4 SET M e peque 1 M 5 yy 25 i ur ARP ELE E EE n 92 i I a ae z gt L2 E 02 Jo oan Oa I ln I gt thy LI 2 b c i gt 5 7 1 s item 7 1 4 10 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL A 3 Menu Lists I lo Is d AL ie 3 Eg 5 i TEC E CHO ler 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 1 on of Zi Tui 1 E Iz jt um oi WICI on Hs oS ox QUOC iy il 1 OF 1 Sa wasso amp 2 i im iD Or i i 0 rH LLI LL zo Be Ss 5 7 1 J GE GENE DCN NGC PARE f aire mite itr 1 i 1 i i i 01 2 Oi Quz ID 0 0 O O HO ler N i i
435. tic input level Figure 6 7 1 dB gain compression point 6 5 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 1 Spectrum Analyzer Parameters Common to Measurements Since gain compression is a error factor in making normal signal level measurements the 1 dB gain compression point effectively sets the upper limit to the dynamic range Thus it is necessary to use the attenuator to control the amplitude of the signal applied to the input mixer mixer input level so that gain compression will not occur when making level measurements The 1 dB gain compression level for the analyzer is shown in Table 6 3 Table 6 3 1 dB gain compression Frequency 10 MHz or more 1 4941 4341 4342 es U4941N 4341N 4342 Remarks compression U4941PHS 4342PHS Preamplifier OFF 100 dBuV Mixer input level Preamplifier ON 40 dBm 70 dBuv RF input level When making level measurements input attenuator or external attenuator must be set to keep the mixer or RF input below the level shown in Table 6 3 Example Suppose we want to measure 0 dBm signal Input attenuator set to 10 dB In this case the level at the mixer input would be 10 dBm gain compression would be occurring and the accuracy of the level measurement would be compromised Input attenuator set to greater than 20 dB In this case the level at the mixer input would be less than 20 dBm there would be no gain compression But on the other hand th
436. to Manual gt gt gt gt deum o m A ee Memory card output File number Automatic file update ON MCPINC ON OFF MCPINC OFF Bitmap data Monochrome bitmap Invert monochrome bitmap gt gt Oe Ac X cH 9 4 Ri am m m gt 10MHz Reference signal ded Meam source internal External LOL Gum SA r ee h e e i Xon Xoff Output ON PRTCL RMT or Output is valid Output is not valid __1__________ LOCK of zero span mode LOCK UNLOCK Antenna type 1 0 1 Dipole 2 Log Periodic Antenna selection Die poll Log Peri Antenna OFF 11 53 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker request Output format CR OFF ON Correction table Correction table ON CR ON Correction table OFF Correction table input Correction table deletion Correction OFF ON Correction ON Correction OFF Correction mode Antenna PAssFALjdgmm Cp o 0C Trace PASS OFF ON PASS UPPER FAIL LOWER FAIL UPPER amp LOWER FAIL Upper FAIL point 2 bytes 2 b
437. to 300 MHz these examples CF and MZ are GPIB command codes See Section 11 9 for a complete list of GPIB codes 11 9 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 4 Command Syntax L stener HP200 and 300 series programming examples GPIB address 1 Example HP 1 Master reset the analyzer and set the center frequency to 25 MHz 10 OUTPUT 701 IP 20 OUTPUT 701 CF25MZ 30 END Example HP 2 Set the start and stop frequencies to 300 kHz and 800 kHz respectively and add 50 kHz to the frequency offset 20 OUTPUT 701 FB800KZ 30 OUTPUT 701 FONSOKZ 40 END Example HP 3 Set the reference level to 20 dBm 5 dB div resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz and detector mode to positive 20 OUTPUT 701 DD5DB 30 OUTPUT 701 RB100KZ 40 OUTPUT 701 DTP 50 END Example HP 4 Set the trigger mode to single and the sweep time to 2 seconds and match the marker with the maximum level at each sweep 4 ee eee ey es ee ee ee ee ee 40 10 OUTPUT 701 51 20 OUTPUT 701 SW2SC 30 OUTPUT 701 SR Starts the sweep 40 WAIT 2 5 Pauses the analyzer until the sweep ends or a service request is received 50 OUTPUT 701 PS Peak search of the marker frequency 60 GOTO 30 70 STOP 80 END 11 10 Aor 1 96 RF ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 4 Command Syntax Listener
438. to 408 00 408 00 to 414 00 414 00 to 420 00 420 00 to 426 00 426 00 to 432 00 432 00 to 438 00 438 00 to 444 00 444 00 to 450 00 9 42 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table 7 Singapore VHF Table 9 34 Channel table of VHF in gt Analyzer Channel Pie quent range Picture frequency Sound RENTES channel MHz MHz MHz 174 00 to 181 00 195 00 to 202 00 223 00 to 230 00 8 Malaysia VHF Table 9 35 Channel table of VHF in Malaysia Sound frequency MHz 54 00 to 61 00 209 00 to 216 00 510 00 to 518 00 Table 9 36 Channel table of VHF in 5 Analyzer s Channel Tm frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz MHz 54 00 to 60 00 60 00 to 66 00 66 00 to 72 00 76 00 to 82 00 82 00 to 88 00 174 00 to 180 00 180 00 to 186 00 186 00 to 192 00 192 00 to 198 00 198 00 to 204 00 204 00 to 210 00 210 00 to 216 00 9 43 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table UHF Table 9 37 Channel table of UHF in 5 Analyzer s Frequency range Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz MHz 470 00 to 476 00 475 75 476 00 to 482 00 482 00 to 488 00 488 00 to 494 00 494 00 to 500 00 500 00 to 506 00 506 00 to 512 00 512 00 to 518 00 518 00 to 524 00 524 00 to 530 00 530 00 to 536 00 536 00 to 542 00 542 00 to 548 00 548 00 to 554 00 554 00 to 56
439. to input channel Refer to the section 9 3 Channel Auto Function 2 START frequency STOP frequency setup START frequency is the best value determined by the lower limit of frequency bandwidth of the input channel number STOP frequency is the best value determined by the upper limit of frequency bandwidth of the input channel number Set up each best value See Fig 9 1 VHE tO dB REF 40 0 amp TT 0 dB er 30 00 i 2 im iz VER SDO kHz SWE Lower limit of frequency Upper limit of frequency bandwidth of the input channel bandwidth of the input channel Start frequency Stop frequency Figure 9 1 Start frequency Stop frequency setup 9 1 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 1 Channel Setu V Ke The relation between START frequency and STOP frequency is always START frequency lt STOP frequency Fig 9 2 shows the setup example Lower Limit and Upper Limit of Frequency Bandwidth START 4 5 START CH STOP CH 4 170 00 MHz 8 198 00 2 Set 4 STOP 5 4 170 00 MHz 85 182 00MHz Set START START CH STOP CH 5 176 00 MHz 5 182 00MHz Set 5CH Leave it as it is START 5 START CH STOP CH 6 182 00 MHz 86 188 00MHz Set 6CH Changes to 6CH automatically Figure 9 2 Relation between lower limit and upper limit of frequency bandwidth 9 2 Apr 1 96
440. ture frequency Sound frequency Johanne MHz _ MHz MHz 111 00 to 118 00 118 00 to 125 00 125 00 to 132 00 132 00 to 139 00 139 00 to 146 00 146 00 to 153 00 153 00 to 160 00 160 00 to 167 00 167 00 to 174 00 230 00 to 237 00 237 00 to 244 00 244 00 to 251 00 251 00 to 258 00 258 00 to 265 00 265 00 to 272 00 272 00 to 279 00 279 00 to 286 00 286 00 to 293 00 293 00 to 300 00 302 00 to 310 00 310 00 to 318 00 318 00 to 326 00 326 00 to 334 00 334 00 to 342 00 342 00 to 350 00 350 00 to 358 00 358 00 to 366 00 366 00 to 374 00 374 00 to 382 00 382 00 to 390 00 390 00 to 398 00 398 00 to 406 00 406 00 to 414 00 414 00 to 422 00 422 00 to 430 00 430 00 to 438 00 438 00 to 446 00 9 51 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 10 1 Usage of Tracking Generator 10 TRACKING GENERATOR FUNCTION Standard equipment on UA342 series 10 1 Usage of Tracking Generator Operation method D the tracking generator on to set its output level LED lights up upward on the left side of keys Then press keys or the data knob It is possible to set the output level of OdBm to 31dBm 1 steps Q Set a center frequency a frequency span and a reference level as follows Press and then adjust a center frequency with the ten keys the step keys or the data knob SPAN Press and then adjust a frequency span with the ten keys the step keys or the da
441. tussvms COPY key Copy the display to a printer or plotter SHIFT 8 Qrnasssvadduuatutrusssswrrhinaauussitnusdurssrdantan uuusinueurudeututsauuusysnuuricumepnhtnunsnmuauauauru uddvutzusascunaauarjpervtseumsetssisttetsimstusevmtut LABEL key Put a label on the display screen SHIFT 9 Backspace to edit numeric pad input Select a set of units and input corresponding values ee ee ee S 5m hh 4n Hm rh Frequency in GHz level in dBm eee 44 Freq MHz level dBm time in sec auapauirvw s4dueununurnuasusauannvvetatehunuss mv cC BRAMATYTTENEGSS 44 Freq in kHz level in mV time in msec ee eee eee ee ee Se in Hz time in Eli TG key N Type connector 9 Units keys f it is pressed LED lights up on it and TG starts This is an output connector of tracking generator 3 21 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MA
442. uld from the front panel Read or query existing settings and data Send and receive measurement data including screen trace data write and read out Send service requests to the controller this interrupts the controller s current task and reads the status byte 11 2 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 2 GPIB Specifications 11 2 GPIB Specifications 1 GPIB Bus The following figure shows the configuration of a typical GPIB system in this case with four devices Data lines eight Transfer control handshake lines three Bus control lines five GPIB bus sixteen lines IFC ATN SRQ REN EOI DAV NRFD NDAC DIO1 to 8 932 e Control Talk and talk and listen listen Device A Device B Device C Device D Figure 11 1 GPIB bus configuration The GPIB bus cables include eight data lines three transfer control lines handshake lines and five bus control lines These lines function as follows e Data lines these bit parallel byte serial data lines provide asynchronous bi directional data transfer between devices This allows the GPIB system to use high speed and low speed at the same time Data is transferred as ASCII code e Transfer control lines handshake lines these contro the asynchronous data transfer between devices and use the following signals DAV Data valid indicates the data valid state low state NRFD Not rea
443. um ii cC deas w Frequency Multi Marker No 1 ON OFF Multi Marker No 2 ON OFF Multi Marker No 3 ON OFF Multi Marker No 4 ON OFF Muiti Marker No 5 ON OFF Multi Marker No 6 ON OFF Note Calculated value is used as time or frequency data 11 45 Mar 1 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 GPIB Command Codes cont d Talker request Function Listener code Remarks Output format Frequency MF Active marker Frequency Active marker Level Level Same as the marker level Active marker Frequency level Same as MF Frequency Level and ML Multi Marker All frequencies Frequency MF 6 markers Multi Marker Ali levels Level Same as ML 6 markers Peak list In frequency order In level order E NNMERO rn Lio ERR Signal track OFF ON OFF ON Signal track ON SG ON SGN Signal track OFF SIG OFF Sa OFF SGF Noise Hz NOISE f 0 Frequency NI 1 Frequency Frequency Frequency dBm Hz ON NIDBM NIM dBuV VHz ON NIDBU NIU dBc Hz ON NIDBC NIC Noise Hz OFF NOISE OFF NI OFF 11 46 Mar 1 97 FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 11 9 Command Codes Talker request cont d Function Listener
444. ution Time display on the list Time differences between slots UW detected are displayed When the specified base station slot is UW error in Sync CS ID mode time is not displayed Data number Maximum is 300 Data after 301 are junked ID marker ID marker is positioned for the display based on ID list The marker cannot be moved to undemodulatable signal Also when the trigger mode is FREE RUN the display waveform and ID marker are not matched Apr 1 96 PHS ID DEMODULATION FUNCTION ERE 5 1 Outline 5 Explanation of Functions This chapter provides an explanation of PHS ID demodulation functions 5 1 Outline The functions are as follows 1 2 3 4 Apr 1 96 To set and combine optical CI CS ID PS ID code as a sweep trigger To set frequency with channel input corresponding to PHS carrier number To demodulate PHS channels successively and detect signals by auto scan function ID list function displays ID code of measured signal level and relative time sort time and level in order for the list display To select right aligned or left aligned in hexadecimal for ID code display display only the signals with over the specified level by using the display line To display only wanted ID code signals from measurement signals by using ID filter function ID marker function displays ID code of measurement signal To set ID marker value to ID trigger To m
445. width OBW Measurement The analyzer has an OBW function that can calculate the occupied bandwidth from the measurement data displayed on the screen t works by finding the frequency band that contains a specified percentage of the total power Initial the default value is 99 but any value between 10 0 and 99 896 can be specified CAUTION 1 If the signal level is displayed as being below 50 dB then increased calculation errors can arise Change the Reference Level so as to make the signal amplitude be greater than 50 dB The Span should be set at about three times the expected occupied bandwidth 2 If the BS specified bandwidth of the analyzer is less than 100 kHz it is possibility to increase the measurement error since the setting stability 3 kHzp p 100 msec in remaining FM of the analyzer is close to the value 1 Measurement procedure Set the center frequency to the known carrier frequency or use the PEAK function if it is unknown and set the span resolution bandwidths and sweep time to their expected or estimated values 3 Calculate the occupied bandwidth MEAS2 6 32 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 6 5 Occupied Bandwidth OBW Measurement When the calculation is complete the occupied bandwidth and the carrier frequency 15 actually the occupied band center frequency appear at the top left of the screen Markers are set at both sides of t
446. with a GPIB interface as a standard such as personal computers a simple measurement system be configured using an RS 232 interface The interface usually allows remote control to be controlled externally and the RS 232 interface also allows similar external control 1 Compatibility with GPIB remote control codes The RS 232 remote contro uses the same codes as the GPIB of the analyzer except for GPIB specific codes and functions Note 1 Refer to 11 9 GPIB Codes List e Talker listener codes can be used without modification e The codes are compatible with the header information corresponding to the talker request e The codes are compatible with the output formats Note 2 Refer to 5 5 5 Differences from GPIB Remote Programming e The codes differ the GPIB codes of the analyzer 2 Functions controlled externally The following functions can be controlled using the RS 232 remote control Q Setting of measurement conditions Input of various measurement conditions similar to the conditions input by key operation on the panel Output of settings Output of various settings and data of this system Input output of measurement data Write in readout of screen trace data Status output Readout of data indicating the current conditions of the measurement instrument similar to status bytes in the GPIB 5 36 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 5 RS 232 Remote Control Functi
447. with the al ESC P language VP 600 MJ 400 or its equivalent Rear panel 505 or its equivalent Printer Rear panel RS 232 Cable Figure 5 20a Printer connection diagram Example of the analyzer and VP 600 connection CAUTION 1 Be sure that the power is OFF before connecting the RS 232 cable 2 Please read the instruction manual for the printer before you begin to use it 5 18 Apr 20 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 5 3 Output of Screen Data Two kinds of methods of connecting the RS 232 cable are shown One is for connecting this unit and the printer directly The other is for connecting this unit and the printer by using a serial to parallel converter The name of each signal line used here conforms to the notation of EIA Electronic Industries Association This unit 9 pin D SUB Printer serial I O Pin No Signal name Signal name Pin No 2 BB RxD 2 3 TxD RD BB 3 5 GND GND AB 7 Figure 5 20b RS 232 cable connection diagram for the direct connection This unit 9 pin D SUB Serial to parallel converter Pin No Signal name Signal name Pin No RxD TxD 3 BI GND AB CD CB CA Figure 5 20 RS 232 cable connection diagram for the connection using serial to parallel converter For detail
448. y channel Channel MHz MHz 1312 00 to 1348 00 1352 00 to 1388 00 1392 00 to 1428 00 1432 00 to 1468 00 1472 00 to 1508 00 1512 00 to 1548 00 SCC V TV 1330 00 1370 00 1410 00 1450 00 1490 00 1530 00 SCC H TYPE1 For SCC communication local oscillation 11 3 GHz horizontally polarized waves Table 9 21 Channel table of CS in Japan 5 Transponder range Center frequency channel MHz MHz 992 00 to 1028 00 1032 00 to 1068 00 1072 00 to 1108 00 1112 00 to 1148 00 1152 00 to 1188 00 1192 00 to 1228 00 1232 00 to 1268 00 1272 00 to 1308 00 1312 00 to 1348 00 1352 00 to 1388 00 1392 00 to 1428 00 9 29 SCC H TYPE1 1010 00 1050 00 1090 00 1130 00 1170 00 1210 00 1250 00 1290 00 1330 00 1370 00 1410 00 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 9 5 TV Channel Table SCC H TYPE2 For SCC communication local oscillation 10 99 GHz horizontally polarized waves Table 9 22 Channel table of CS in vere o S Toe Frequency range channel MHz 1302 00 to 1338 00 1342 00 to 1378 00 1382 00 to 1418 00 1422 00 to 1458 00 1462 00 to 1498 00 1502 00 to 1538 00 1542 00 to 1578 00 1582 00 to 1618 00 1622 00 to 1658 00 1662 00 to 1698 00 1702 00 to 1738 00 9 30 SCC H TYPE2 Center frequency 1320 00 1360 00 1400 00 1440 00 1480 00 1520 00 1560 00 1600 00 1640 00
449. y lt 15 1 60 dB 3 dB Bandwidth 6 dB 9 kHz 120 kHz e Video bandwidth 10 Hz to 3 Sideband noise Resolution bandwidth 3 Range Bandwidth range accuracy 13 8 Jun 10 97 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL TD 13 2 U4941N Specifications 2 Amplitude range Measurement range e Maximum input level Preamplifier OFF 130 dB V to average indicated noise level 134 dB V Input ATT gt 10 dB 50V DC max 120 50V DC max Preamplifier ON Display range Log 10 10div 10 5 2 1 dB div 1096 div of reference level 40 dB 5 dB div Linear QP Log je Reference level range Preamplifier OFF Log 46 dByV to 150 dBzV 0 1 dB step Linear 199 5 to 31 62 V Preamplifier ON Log 26 dBuV to 115 dBzV 0 1 dB step Linear 19 95 V to 1 V 0 to 50 dB 10 dB step Input attenuator range 13 9 Apr 1 96 RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL 13 2 U4941N Specifications 3 Dynamic range e Display average noise level Preamplifier OFF 8 dB 2 7f GHz aB RBW 1 kHz VBW 10 Hz INPUT ATT 0 dB frequency 1 MHz or more Preamplifier ON 23 dBuV 3 3f GHz dB RBW 1 kHz VBW 10 Hz INPUT 0 frequency 1 MHz or more 1 dB gain compression Preamplifier OFF gt 100 dB V mixer input level Frequency 10 MHz or more Preampli
450. y recommended or authorized by Advantest and performed in accordance with Advantest s instructions b any improper or inadequate handling carriage or storage of the Product by the Purchaser or any third party other than Advantest or 15 agents c use of the Product under operating conditions or environments different than those specified in the Operation Manual or recommended by Advantest including without limitation 1 instances where the Product has been subjected to physical stress or electrical voltage exceeding the permissible range and 11 instances where the corrosion of electrical circuits or other deterioration was accelerated by exposure to corrosive gases or dusty environments d use of the Product in connection with software interfaces products or parts other than software interfaces products or parts supplied or recommended by Advantest e incorporation in the Product of any parts or components 1 provided by Purchaser or 1 provided by a third party at the request or direction of Purchaser or due to specifications or designs supplied by Purchaser including without limitation any degradation in performance of such parts or components f Advantest s incorporation or use of any specifications or designs supplied by Purchaser g the occurrence of an event of force majeure including without limitation fire explosion geological change storm flood earthquake tidal wave lightning or act of war or h
451. ytes X pic Lower FAIL point ____ MS 2 bytes 2 bytes x pic _ Limit line type selection L LIMTYPE FREQ TIME _ Continuous PASS FAIL ON Continuous PASS FAIL OFF Judgment result Limit line type selection Frequency domain LIMTYP Time domain TIME Limit line Frequency or time ABS REL ABS LIMPOS ABS REL LIMPOS REL 11 54 Apr 20 97 Limit ind level ABS REL ABS REL Limit line 1 Limit line 1 ON Limit line 1 OFF Limit line 1 table input Limit line 1 table deletion Limit line 2 Limit line 2 ON Limit iine 2 OFF Limit line 2 table input SENE ane 2 deletion TIPPS de P pa stets NN E Memory card initialization Copy ALL copy m m Label imput Label deletion Label display ON or RF FIELD ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL LIMAPOS LIMAPOS ABS LIMAPOS REL LMTA ON LAN LMTA OFF LAF LMTAIN LMTADEL LMTB ON LBN LMTB OFF LBF LMTBIN LMTBDEL re h ya c o LB ON LON LB OFF LOF LBDSP ON LBDSP OFF 11 55 11 9 GPIB Command Codes OFF ON OFF ON Character string Character string he yp ie

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Automatic on-demand prescale calibration across multiple devices  防水性能について  おかげさまで 800号！  Appels à projet Grand emprunt  Panasonic DMC-FZ48  télécharger le manuel d`utilisation en français - EURO  User`s Manual - ultrasonic plastic welding machine|ultrasonic    Samsung GT-S5698 用户手册(Gingerbread)  JVC GR-AXM250 Camcorder User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file